IT & SysAdmin

Google IT Support Professional Certificate

Google IT Support Professional Certificate, course consists of 5 individual courses, and each of those courses are further subdivided into different modules.

1. Technical Support Fundamentals

Technical Support Fundamentals is a first course of Google IT Support Professional Certificate.

It has been sub-divided into the following modules…

2. The Bits and Bytes of Computer Networking

This course delves deep into computer networking and transport layers.

It has following sub-modules…

3. Operating Systems and You: Becoming a Power User

It teaches about the inner workings of computer operating systems, and how manipulate and control different processes running on a computer.

This course has following sub-modules…

4. System Administration and IT Infrastructure Services

This is all about managing different IT services, including public and private cloud, platform services (PAAS, SAAS, IAAS). Also it teaches about data different backup solution and data recovery techniques.

This courses is sub-divided into 6 weeks of study program, which has 5 sub-topics and a final project…

5. IT Security: Defense against the Digital Dark Arts

This course teaches about the best security practices and as well as methods to defend against evolving digital threats.

It has 6 sub-modules about different security related topics and a 7th project module…

IBM IT Support Professional Certificate

1. Introduction to Technical Support

This is the IBM version of introduction to IT Support. But it also gives information about different ticketing systems and service level agreements. It provides details about job opportunities and different skill levels in the field.

It has following sub-modules…

2. Introduction to Hardware and Operating Systems

This course is all about building computers and installing different operating systems on them. It also explains about computer connectors and their types, and peripheral devices. In the end, it gives details about how to troubleshoot a system step by step.

It has been divided into following modules…

3. Introduction to Software, Programming, and Databases

It goes into details about different computing platforms and types of software applications. It also lists down the available web-browsers, types of cloud computing, basics of programming and types of database queries.

It has following 4 sub-modules…

4. Introduction to Networking and Storage

It teaches about the types of networks, like LAN, WAN etc. It lists down the storage types and also goes into the details of troubleshooting common networking problems like DNS issues etc.

This course has following sub-topics…

5. Introduction to Cybersecurity Essentials

This courses teaches about:

  • Everyday digital threats like viruses, malware, social engineering etc.
  • How to remain safe online and how to use password management techniques to remain protected.
  • While surfing the web, how to avoid phishing and other threats.

and more…

It has 4 sub-modules…

6. Introduction to Cloud Computing

Learning opportunities are:

  • PaaS, IaaS, SaaS
  • Private, public and hybrid cloud models
  • Types virtual machines, hypervisors etc

and more…

This course talks about these topics…

Subsections of IT & SysAdmin

Google IT Support Professional Certificate

Google IT Support Professional Certificate, course consists of 5 individual courses, and each of those courses are further subdivided into different modules.

1. Technical Support Fundamentals

Technical Support Fundamentals is a first course of Google IT Support Professional Certificate.

It has been sub-divided into the following modules…

2. The Bits and Bytes of Computer Networking

This course delves deep into computer networking and transport layers.

It has following sub-modules…

3. Operating Systems and You: Becoming a Power User

It teaches about the inner workings of computer operating systems, and how manipulate and control different processes running on a computer.

This course has following sub-modules…

4. System Administration and IT Infrastructure Services

This is all about managing different IT services, including public and private cloud, platform services (PAAS, SAAS, IAAS). Also it teaches about data different backup solution and data recovery techniques.

This courses is sub-divided into 6 weeks of study program, which has 5 sub-topics and a final project…

5. IT Security: Defense against the Digital Dark Arts

This course teaches about the best security practices and as well as methods to defend against evolving digital threats.

It has 6 sub-modules about different security related topics and a 7th project module…

Subsections of Google IT Support

Subsections of IT Fundamentals

Introduction to IT

It is the first module, of the Technical Support Fundamentals.

What is IT?

The use of digital technology, like computers and the internet, to store and process data into useful information.

  • Digital Divide: The lack of digital literacy among the masses.

Role of IT Support Specialist

  • Managing
  • Installing
  • Maintaining
  • Troubleshooting
  • Configuring

History of Computing

From Abacus to Analytical Engine

Computer

A device that stores and process data performing calculations.

Abacus

The oldest known computer, invented in 500 BC to count large numbers.

Mechanical Engine of 17th Century

It was able to perform summation, subtraction, multiplication, and division but still need human intervention to operate its knob and levers.

Invention of Punch Cards in 18th century shaped the world of computing

Charles Babbage invented the Difference Engine

It was a combination of sophisticated mechanical calculators and was able to perform pretty complex mathematical operations but not much else.

Analytical Engine

Babbage followed his Difference Engine with an Analytical Engine, he was inspired by Punch Cards, and it was able to perform automatic calculations without human interaction.

But it was still a giant Mechanical Computer, though being impressive.

Invention of Algorithms

A Mathematician, Ada Lovelace, realize the true potential of the Analytical Engine. She was the first person to recognize that a machine can be used more than just for pure calculations. She developed the first algorithm for the Engine.

Because of this discovery of Lovelace, the Analytical Engine became the first general purpose computing device in the history.

Algorithm

A series of steps that solve specific problems.

Digital Logic

Computer Language

Binary System

The communication that a computer uses, also known as a base-2 numeral system.

  1. Bit: A number in binary.
  2. Byte: A group of 8-bits.
  3. Each bit can store one character, and we can have 256 possible values thanks to the base-2 system (2**8)
  Examples:
    10100011, 11110011, 00001111

Character Encoding

Assigns our binary values to characters, so that we as human can read them.

ASCII

The oldest used character encoding system for English alphabet, digits, punctuation marks.

UTF-8

The most prevalent encoding standard used today. Along with the same ASCII table, it lets us use the variable number of bytes.

Binary

As in Punch Card systems, a hole represents the number 1, and no-hole represents the number 0.

In binary, electrical circuits are used to represent zeros and ones (0s,1s), when current passes through the circuit, the circuit is on, and it represents 1, when no electricity passes, the circuit is closed and represents 0.

Logic gates

Allow our transistors to do more complex tasks, like decide where to send electrical signals depending on logical conditions.

  1. AND logic gate

  2. OR logic gate

  3. NOT logic gate

  4. XOR logic gate

  5. NAND logic gate

  6. XNOR logic gate

How to Count in Binary?

256 128 64 28 16 8 4 2 unit(0,1) Decimal System
                0 0
                1 1
              1 0 2
              1 1 3
            1 0 0 4
            1 0 1 5
            1 1 0 6
            1 1 1 7
          1 0 0 0 8
          1 0 0 1 9
          1 0 1 0 10

Computer Architecture layer

Abstraction

“To take a relatively complex system and simplify it for our use.”

We don’t interact with the computers in the form of 0s and 1s (we actually do), instead an abstraction layer like, keyboard, mouse, error messages instead of showing a bunch of machine code etc.

Software layer

How we as human interact with our computer.

User

User interacts with a computer. One can operate, maintain, and even program the computer.

Introduction to Computer Hardware

Desktops Computers

They are just computers that can fit on or under our desks.

The following are components of a desktop:

  1. Monitor
  2. Keyboard
  3. Mouse
  4. Desktop

Laptops

They have all the components baked-in inside a single chassis.

Ports

To extend the functionality of a computer, we can plug devices into connection points on it.

CPU (Central Processing Unit)

The brain of our computer, it does all the calculations and data processing.

RAM (Random Access Memory)

Our computer’s short-term memory.

Hard Drive

Holds all of our data, which includes all of our music, pictures, applications.

Motherboard

The body or circulatory system of the computer that connects all the pieces together.

  • It holds everything in place, and lets our components communicate with each other. It’s the foundation of our computer.

Power Supply

It converts the wall power supply to the format which our computer can use.

Programs and Hardware

Programs

Instructions that tell the computer what to do.

Hardware

  1. External Data Bus (EDB)/Address Bus -The instruction travel between CPU and RAM through EDB.
  2. Registers
  • They let us store the data that our CPU works with.
  1. Memory Controller Chip
  • The MCC is a bridge between the CPU and the RAM.
  • The MCC grabs the Data from the RAM and sends it through the EDB
  1. Cache
  • CPU also uses cache. Cache is smaller than RAM, but it let us store data that we use often.
  • Cache levels: There are three different level of cache in a CPU
    • L1 L1 is the smallest and the fastest cache.
    • L2
    • L3
  1. Wire Clock:
  • How does our CPU know when the set of instruction ends, and a new one begins. Here comes the Wire Clock in play.
  • “When you send or receive data, it sends a voltage to that clock wire to let the CPU know it can start doing calculations.”
  1. Clock Cycle: When you send a voltage to the clock wire, it is referred to as a clock cycle.
  2. Clock Speed: The maximum number of clock cycles that it can handle in a certain time period.
  3. Over-clocking: There are ways to increase the clock speed of the CPU, called over-clocking. It increases the rate of your CPU clock cycles in order to perform more tasks.
  • Overclocking can increase the performance of low-end CPUs, but it has certain cons attached to it, like overheating, more power usage etc
  • It can lower CPU lifespan as you’re pushing it limits
  • Increased power and heat will degrade most PC components faster

Components

CPU

Instruction Set

Literally, a list of instructions that our CPU is able to run.

  • Adding
  • subtracting
  • copying data
    • When you select your CPU, you’ll need to make sure it’s compatible with your motherboard & the circuit board that connects all your components together.

CPU Socket Types

  1. Land grid array (LGA)
    • pins stick out of the motherboard
  2. pin grid array (PGA)
    • pins are located on the processor itself

Heat Sink

To cool down CPU, attached with a cooler fan.

RAM

  • There are lost of types of RAM, and the one that’s commonly found in computers is DRAM, or dynamic random-access memory.
  • There are also different types of memory sticks that DRAM chips can be put on. The more modern DIMM stick, which usually stand for Dual Inline Memory Module, have different sizes of pins on them.
  1. SDRAM: Stands for synchronous DRAM. This type of RAM is synchronized with our systems’; clock speed, allowing quicker processing of data.
  2. DDR SDRAM:
  • In today’s system, we use another type of RAM, called the double data rate SDRAM or DDR SDRAM for short.

    1. DDR1
    2. DDR2
    3. DDR3
    4. DDR4
  • Just like the CPU, make sure your RAM module is compatible with your motherboard.

Motherboards

Every motherboard has few characteristics:

Chipset

A chipset is a key component of our motherboard that allows us to manage data between our CPU, RAM, and peripherals.

It decides how components talk to each other on our machine:

  1. Northbridge: It interconnects stuff like RAM and video cards. In some CPUs, northbridge directly baked into the CPU itself.
  2. Southbridge: It maintains our IO or input/output controllers, like hard drives and USB devices that input and output data.

Peripherals

External devices we connect to our computer, like a mouse, keyboard, and monitor.

Expansion Slots

Give us the ability to increase the functionality of our computer.

  • The standard for peripheral slot today is PCI Express or Peripheral Component Interconnect Express.

Form Factor

There are different sizes of motherboards available in market toady.

  • Form factor plays an important role in the choice of PCIes
  • You don’t want to respond to a ticked without knowing that a customer bought a GPU which doesn’t fit in the PCIe slot.
  1. ATX (Advanced Technology eXtended)
  • In desktops, you’ll commonly see full sized ATX’s
  1. ITX (Information Technology eXtended) These are much smaller than ATX board, for example Intel NUC uses a variation of ITX, which comes in three form factors: 1) mini-ITX 2) nano-ITX 3) pico-ITX

Storage

  • HDD (Hard disk drive)

  • SDD (solid state drive)

    There are few interfaces that hard drive use to connect our system:

  • ATA ; the most common ATA is serial ATA or SATA

    • SATA drive are hot swappable, meaning you don’t need to turn off your computer to swap them
    • The interface couldn’t keep with speeds of newer SSDs
  • NVM Express or NVMe are used for more modern SSDs and reduces the pitfalls of SATA

kilobyte

The kilobyte is a multiple of the unit byte for digital information.

  • In base 10, one kilobyte is 1000 bytes
  • In base 2, one kilobyte is 1024 bytes

Power Supplies

It converts the AC we get from the wall into low voltage DC that we can use and transmit throughout our computer.

Power supplies have the following components:

  • chassis
  • fan
  • I/O cables
  • power cable

Voltage

  • Be sure to use proper voltage for your electronics

Ampere

An ampere, often abbreviated as “A,” is the unit of electric current in the International System of Units (SI). Electric current is the flow of electric charge through a conductor, such as a wire. One ampere is defined as the amount of current that flows when one coulomb of electric charge passes through a given point in a circuit per second.

In equation form, it can be expressed as:

$$ 1A = 1C/s $$

This means that if a current of 1 ampere is flowing in a circuit, it indicates that 1 coulomb of charge is passing through a particular point in the circuit every second.

Wattage

The amount of volts and amps that a device needs.

  • All kinds of issues are caused by bad power supply, sometimes the computer doesn’t even turn on.
  • Power supplies can fail for lots of reasons like burnouts, power surge, or even lightning strikes.

Mobile Devices

Mobile devices are a computer too. They have:

  • CPUs
  • RAM
  • Storage
  • Power systems
  • Peripherals
    • Mobiles devices can use peripherals too, like headset, micro-USB, USB-C, and lightening USB etc.
    • Mobiles devices can themselves be the peripherals, like Smart-watch, fitness band etc.

Very small mobile devices uses system-on-chip or SoC

System on a Chip (SoC)

Packs the CPU, RAM, and sometimes even the storage onto a single chip

Batteries and Charging Systems

  • Battery can be charged via wireless pads or cradle
  • Rechargeable batteries have limited life span measured in charge cycle

Components require to charge batteries:

  • Charger
  • PSU or power supply unit to control power flow
  • Wall outlet
  • or Solar panel etc

Charge Cycle

One full charge and discharge of a battery.

Peripherals

Anything that you connect to your computer externally that add functionality

Examples:

  • Universal serial bus USB
    • USB 2.0 – transfer speeds of 480 Mb/s
    • USB 3.0 – transfer speeds of 5 Gb/s
    • USB 3.1 – transfer speeds of 10 Gb/s
    • USB 4 – transfer speed of 40 Gb/s
  1. Difference of MB and Mb/s: MB is a megabyte, unit of data storage, while Mb/s is a megabit per second, which is a unit of data transfer rate.
  2. DVI: It is generally used for video output, like slide presentation, but for audio you’re out of luck
  3. HDMI: Have audio and video output
  4. Display Port: Also outputs audio and video
  5. Type C connector: It can do power and data transfer

Projector

Projectors are display devices for when you need to share information with people in the same location! Most projectors can be used just like any other display on a computer, and with a few differences, can be troubleshot just like any other display device. For example, projectors can have dead or stuck pixels, and can acquire image burn-in, just like other types of displays.

Starting it Up

BIOS

Our CPU doesn’t know that there is a device that it can talk to, so it has to connect to something called the BIOS

The BIOS is software that helps initialize the hardware in our computer and gets our operating system up and running.

It performs the following functions:

  • Initialize hardware

  • POST or power on self test

  • Checks what devices are connected to the computer

    The BIOS can be stored on the motherboard in the following components:

  • ROM or read only memory

  • More modern systems use UEFI stands for Unified Extensible Firmware Interface

  • Eventually, UEFI will become the predominant BIOS

Drivers

They contain the instructions our CPU needs to understand external devices like keyboards, webcams, printers.

Power ON Self Test or POST

When the computer starts it runs systems checks from time to time, refer to as POST.

CMOS Battery

It stores basic data about booting your computer like the date, time and how you wanted to start up.

Reimaging

A frequently performed IT task is the reimaging of a computer.

It refers to a disk image which a copy of an operating system, the process involves wiping and reinstalling an operating system.

The following devices can be used for reimaging:

  • USB stick
  • CD/DVD
  • Server accessible through the network

Putting all together

To build a PC, we need to take care of certain things:

  • prevent static charge
  • To avoid, static discharge, you can touch two devices you plugged in but not powered on from time to time
  • or wear an anti-static wristband

Building Steps

  • Motherboard: match up holes on motherboard with holes on the desktop
  • CPU: match CPU pointers alignment on the motherboard, don’t forget to buy compatible motherboard and CPU
  • Heat-sink: Before attaching on, we need to put even amount of thermal paste on your CPU
  • Plug molex connector (on Heat sink) to the motherboard to control fan speed
  • Install RAM sticks on motherboard, line up the pins correctly
  • Hard Drive: One SATA cable to connect SSD to mother board
  • Make sure you connect the SATA power to the SSD
  • Case Fans: Check for label on motherboard which says rear fans
  • Power Supply: secure it in the case, big pin power the mother board, other for SATA I/O, 8 pin will power the CPU
  • Plug the cable lying in the case to the mother board, used for buttons, lights etc
  • Fastens the cables
  • GPU: plug in PCIe slot
  • Closed the case
  • Turn it on plugging it to the monitor, keyboard, mouse, and power outlet.

Mobile Device Repair

  • Know and understand RMA or return merchandise authorization
  • Do a factory reset before sending it off-site repair
  • Before the doing reset inform the end user for possible outcomes of losing all the data

Factory Reset

Removes all data, apps, and customization from the device.

Operating Systems

What is an OS?

An operating system (OS) is software that manages computer hardware and facilitates communication between applications and the underlying hardware. It oversees processes, allocating resources like CPU and memory, and provides a file system for data organization. The OS interacts with input/output devices and often includes a user interface for human-computer interaction. It ensures security through features like user authentication and access control. Examples include Windows, macOS, Linux, and mobile OS like Android and iOS. The OS is a fundamental component that enables the proper functioning of computers and devices.

Remote Connection and SSH

Remote Connection

Allows us to manage multiple machines from anywhere in the world.

Secure Shell (SSH)

A protocol implemented by other programs to securely access one computer from another.

  • Popular software to work with SSH, on Linux, OpenSSH program, while on Windows, PuTTY is used.
  • In SSH, a pair of public and private keys is used to authenticate the process.
  • To securely connect to a remote machine, a VPN is used.

VPN

Allows you to connect to a private network, like your work network, over the Internet.

Remote Connections on Windows

PuTTY

A free, open source software that you can use to make remote connections through several network protocols, including SSH.

  • DOING PuTTY can be used from CL, as putty.exe & ssh user@ip\<address>

  • PuTTY comes with a Plink or PuTTYlink program, which can also be used for SSH-ing to other computers.

  • Microsoft provides another way to remotely connect with Windows computer via GUI, called Remote Desktop Protocol (RDP).

Components of an Operating System

Operating System

The whole package that manages our computer’s resources and lets us interact with it.

  • Two main parts
    1. Kernel: Storage and file management, processes, memory control, I/O management
    1. User Space: Everything out of the scope of the Kernel, like application, CLI tools etc

Files and File Systems

File storage include three things:

  1. Data
  2. File handling
  3. Metadata

Block Storage

Improves faster handling of data because the data is not stored as one long piece and can be accessed quicker.

Process Management

Process

A program that is executing, like our internet browser or text editor.

Program

An application that we can run, like Chrome.

Time slice

A very short interval of time, that gets allocated to a process for CPU execution.

Role of Kernel

  • Create processes
  • efficiently schedules them
  • Manages how processes are terminated

Memory Management

Virtual Memory

The combination of hard drive space and RAM that acts like memory that our processes can use.

Swap Space

Allocated Space for virtual memory.

I/O Management

  • Kernel does Input/Output devices by managing their intercommunicating and resource management etc.

Interacting with the OS: User Space

Two ways to interact with the OS

  • Shell

    A program that interprets text commands and sends them to the OS to execute.

  • GUI

Logs

Files that record system events on our computer, just like a system’s diary.

The Boot Process

The computer boots in the following order.

BIOS/UEFI

A low-level software that initializes our computer’s hardware to make sure everything is good to go.

POST

Power on Self Test (POST) is performed to make sure the computer is in proper working order.

Bootloader

A small program that loads the OS.

Kernel

  • System Processes
  • User Space

Networking

Physical Layer

This layer describes that how devices connect to each other at the physical level. On this level, twisted-pair cables and duplexing is used.

Duplex communication has two types;

  1. Half-duplex: Communication is possible only in one direction at a time.

  2. Full-Duplex/Duplex: The information can flow in the both direction at the same time.

The information travels in the form of bits in the Physical layer.

Responsible for defining a common way of interpreting signals coming from the physical layer, so network devices can communicate with each other.

It consists of following protocols;

  1. Wi-Fi
  2. Ethernet

The data sent in this layer in the form of frames. We can identify devices working at the Physical layer by their MAC addresses.

Network Layer

This layer corresponds to the combination of Data Link Layer and Physical Layer of OSI Model. It looks out for hardware addressing and the protocols present in this layer allows for the physical transmission of data.

This layer includes

  • IP addressing

  • Encapsulation

    The unit of data in the network layer is datagram.

Transport Layer

Transport layer is the second layer in TCP/IP model. It is an end-to-end layer used to deliver messages to a host. It is termed an end-to-end layer because it provides a point-to-point connection rather of hop-to-hop, between the source host and destination host to deliver the services reliably. The unit of data in the transport layer is a segment.

Multiplexing and Demultiplexing

Multiplexing allows simultaneous use of different applications over a network that is running on a host. The transport layer provides this mechanism, which enables us to send packet streams from various applications simultaneously over a network. The transport layer accepts these packets from different processes, differentiated by their port numbers, and passes them to the network layer after adding proper headers. Similarly, Demultiplexing is required at the receiver side to obtain the data coming from various processes. Transport receives the segments of the data from the network layer and delivers it to the appropriate process running of the receivers’ machine.

MAC Address

A globally unique identifier attached to the individual network interfaces. It is a 48-bits number, normally represented by 6 groups of 2 hexadecimal numbers.

MAC addresses split up into two categories;

1) Organizationally Unique Identifier (UIO):

The first three groups represent the UIO of the device, which is unique to every organization issuing it. I.e., for Cisco, UIO is 00 60 2F.

2) Vendor Assigned(NIC Cards, interfaces):

The last three octets are assigned by the vendor, depending upon their preferences. Which tells us about that particular device it’s assigned for.

IP Address

An IP address, or Internet Protocol address, is a series of numbers that identifies any device on a network. Computers use IP addresses to communicate with each other, both over the internet and on other networks.

An IP address consists of 4 octets of 8 bits, so it has 32-bits in total. There are two types of IP addresses;

1) IPv4 address

IPv4 addresses consist of 4 octets of decimal numbers, each octet range from 0-255. There are only 4 billion IPv4 addresses to use for us, so we need some other way to assign IPs to the devices to overcome the shortage of IP addresses.

IPv4 addresses are further divided into three major classes;

a) Class-A Addresses: These have only the first octet for network ID, and the rest for the host IDs.

b) Class-B Addresses: These have the first 2 octets for network IDs, and the rest for the host IDs.

c) Class-C addresses: These have first 3 octets for Network IDs, and the only last one for host IDs.

2) IPv6 Addresses

IPv6 addresses has 132-bit of hexadecimal numbers, it has 2^128 IP addresses, which solves our problem of IP address shortage.

TCP Port

A 16-bit number that’s used to direct traffic to specific services running on a networked computer.

There are almost, 65535 ports available to use which are categorized as follows;

Port 0 used for internal traffic between different programs on the same computer.

Ports 1-1024 are called system ports or well known ports. These are used for some well known services such HTTP, FTP, SMTP and require admin level privileges for the port to be accessed.

Ports 1025-49151 are called registered ports. They are used for the services not well known as used by system ports. They don’t require admin level access for the port to be accessed.

Ports 49152-65535 are called ephemeral ports. They are used for establishing outbound connections.

Checksum Check

A checksum is a value that represents the number of bits in a transmission message and is used by IT professionals to detect high-level errors within data transmission.

The common algorithm used for checksum is MD5, SHA-2 etc

Routing Table

A routing table is a set of rules, often viewed in table format, that is used to determine where data packets traveling over an Internet Protocol (IP) network will be directed. All IP-enabled devices, including routers and switches, use routing tables.

Destination Subnet mask Interface
128.75.43.0 255.255.255.0 Eth0
128.75.43.0 255.255.255.128 Eth1
192.12.17.5 255.255.255.255 Eth3
default Eth2

Entries of an IP Routing Table:

A routing table contains the information necessary to forward a packet along the best path toward its destination. Each packet contains information about its origin and destination. The routing table provides the device with instructions for sending the packet to the next hop on its route across the network.

Each Entry in the routing table consists of the following route.

1) Network ID:

The network ID or destination corresponding to the route.

2) Subnet Mask:

The mask that is used to match a destination IP address to the network ID.

3) Next Hop:

The IP address to which the packet is forwarded.

4) Outgoing Interface:

Outgoing interface the packet should go out to reach the destination network.

5) Metric:

A common use of the metric is to indicate the minimum number of hops (routers crossed) to the network ID.

Routing table entries can be used to store the following types of routes:

  • Directly Attached Network IDs
  • Remote Network IDs
  • Host Routes
  • Default Routes
  • Destination

TTL

Time-to-live (TTL) in networking refers to the time limit imposed on the data packet to be in-networking before being discarded. It is an 8-bit binary value set in the header of Internet Protocol (IP) by sending the host. The Purpose of a TTL is to prevent data packets from being circulated forever in the network. The maximum TTL value is 255, while the commonly used one is 64.

What is Software?

Coding

Translating one language to another.

Scripting

Coding in a scripting language.

  • Scripts Mainly used to perform a single or limited range task.

Programming

Coding in a programming language.

Programming Languages

Special languages that software developers use to write instructions for computers to execute.

Types of Software

  • Commercial Software
  • Open-source Software

Application Software

Any software created to fulfill a specific need, like a text editor, web browser, or graphic editor.

System Software

Software used to keep our core system running, like OS tools and utilities.

Firmware

Software that is permanently stored on a computer component.

Revisiting abstraction

The concept of taking a complex system and simplifying it for use.

Recipe for Computer

Assembly language

Allowed computer scientists to use human-readable instructions, assembled into code, that the machine could understand.

Compiled programming languages

Uses human-readable instructions, then sends them through a compiler.

Interpreted programming languages

The script is run by an interpreter, which interprets the code into CPU instructions just in time to run them.

Troubleshooting Best Practices

1) Ask Questions

  • Ask good questions to get more information about the problem.
  • IT Support is about working in the service of others. Always try to create a positive experience for the user.

2) Isolating the Problem

  • Shrink the scope of the Problem by asking good questions and looking at root cause.

3) Follow the Cookie Crumbs

  • Go back to the time when the issue started.
  • Look at the logs at time of crash.
  • Start with the Quickest Step First

4) Troubleshooting Pitfalls to Avoid

  • Going into autopilot mode.
  • Not finding the Root Cause.

Troubleshooting

The ability to diagnose and resolve an issue.

Root Cause

The main factor that is causing a range of issues.

Customer Service

Intro to Soft Skills

  • Build the trust between you and the User.

  • Know the Company Policies about handling support request.

    Following are some important features for IT Support.

  • Exhibiting empathy

  • Being conscious of your tone

  • Acknowledge the Person

  • Developing the trust

Anatomy of an Interaction

  • Learn to say “Hello” in a friendly way.
  • Good grammar during text/email support.
  • Just be professional, acknowledge the user, and show them some respect.
  • Respond to User Questions nicely.
  • Just clarify the issue beforehand while going for troubleshooting steps.
  • During a remote support session, tell the user when you are running certain commands.
  • The last five minutes of the process set the overall impact, so end on positive terms with the user.

How to Deal with Difficult Situations

  • What you face a difficult situation, relax, and think about what went wrong? How are you feeling? What was your reaction? Why did you raise your voice? Discuss with your peers the situation and get their feedback.
  • Try to be alerted, when interaction goes sideways, and redirect the conversation.
  • Try to see things from others people’s point of view.

Documentation

Ticketing Systems and Documenting Your Work

Some ticketing systems help track the user issues.

  • Bugzilla

  • JIRA

  • Redmine

    Using the ticketing system and documentation is important for two reasons.

  • It keeps the user in the loop.

  • It helps you audit your steps in case you need to go back and see what you did.

Tickets

A common way of documenting an issue.

Bugs

Issues with the system that weren’t caused by an external source.

System and processes are always changing, so should your documentation.

Always write documentation that is easy to read and follow for your user.

Getting Through a Technical Interview

Standing Out from the Crowd

  • Make sure you have a good and updated online presence and fine-grained resume to stand out from the crowd.
  • Research about the company you are applying for.

Resume

Your resume is your first introduction to a new company.

  • If you are a new graduate, or are still studying, you’ll want to include a few additional details, like interesting projects that you did during your studying or highlight an elective subject that you took. After a few years of professional experience, though, you may simply include the degree, year, and location.
  • Functional or skill based resume format works fresh graduates or candidates with limited work experience: The focus of this format is more around your skill set, rather than your work experience. You can include a brief summary of qualifications, followed by a list of skills with examples for each. This format works well for candidates with less employment history, but lots of applicable skills.
  • For relevant skills. You want to include the general topics that you are knowledgeable about, as in customer support, networking, system administration, programming, etc. You may list the Operating Systems that you’ve worked with and the programming languages that you are skilled in, but don’t try to list every networking protocol you’ve heard about or every IT tool that you’ve ever used. The noise distracts from the relevant information.
  • Regardless of the format you decide to use (chronological, functional, etc.), make sure you keep the format and structure consistent throughout. For example, if you use full sentences for your bullets, be sure to use that format for all of them and include proper punctuation and grammar. Check your font sizes and styles to ensure those are consistent as well.

Tailoring the resume

  • Good practice to check if your resume match with the job description.
  • Tailor your resume to each job you are applying for.
  • Add your relevant experience for the job, no matter where you got if from.

Your online Presence

  • Keep your linked-in and other social media up-to-date
  • Writing a summary that tell both your current role (if applicable) and your career aspiration.
  • LinkedIn profiles are much more in depth than resumes. You can include specific accomplishments from as many roles as you like, but use the same format as your resume (Action Verb + specific task + quantifiable point).
  • Adding in personal projects can also be helpful, especially if you have something tangible to show from it. For example, if you’ve created an application, a website, or similar type of product as part of a hobby or school project, include it and provide a link to it.
  • Just like a resume, list your skills, your experience and what you are looking for as your next step. Make sure that you include all the relevant background information that a recruiter looking at your profile might be interested in. Make sure you are descriptive, don’t assume the reader will have context.

Getting Ready for the Interview

  • Mock Interview: Pretending that you are in an interview, even if it is not real, will help you perform your best.
  • Practice to explain ideas for non-technical audience will make you better equipped for an interview.
  • Actively listen to the other person, maintaining eye-contact. Ask relevant questions.
  • Don’t try to memorize the answers, just try to practice with different conceptual approaches to get better at explaining stuff.
  • You can memorize your Elevator Pitch.

Elevator Pitch

A short summary of who you are and what kind of career you are looking for.

Creating Your Elevator Pitch

An elevator pitch is a short description of yourself. The name comes from the fact that you want it to be so short that you can deliver it to someone that you are meeting in an elevator ride.

  • The goal of the elevator pitch is to explain who you are, what you do, and why the other person should be interested in you.
  • In an interviewing context, you want to be able to quickly define who you are, what your current role is and what your future goals are.
  • Remember that you want to keep it personal, you want to get the attention of the other person and let them know why they are interested in you.

Examples

  • 1) If you are a student, you will want to include what and where you are studying, and what you are looking to do once you have graduated.

Hi! I’m Jamie, I’m in my senior year at Springfield University, studying Computer Science. I enjoy being able to help people and solve problems, so I’m looking forward to putting my tech skills into practice by working as an IT Support Specialist after I graduate.

  • 2) If you already have a job, looking for a change. You will include what you do and what different you are looking for.

Hi! I’m Ellis, I’ve been working at X Company as an IT Support Specialist for the past two years. During those years, I’ve learned a lot about operating systems and networking, and I’m looking to switch to a system administrator position, where I can focus on large scale deployments.

What to Expect During the Technical Interview

  • A good Interviewer may push you to the limits of your knowledge.
  • If you don’t know the answer, don’t say just say, I don’t know; Rather explain how would you solve it by going around it.
  • Having a good problem-solving strategy is more important than knowing all the answers.
  • If the question is a bit complex, think out loud to keep the interviewer on your thought train, and before going straight into the solution, break into pieces.
  • When you mention concepts or technologies, you should be ready to explain them and articulate why you may choose one thing over another.
  • It is OK, and even expected, to ask the interviewer follow-up questions to ensure that the problem is correctly framed.
  • Take notes when an issue involves many steps, but don’t feel the necessity to write everything during an interview.

Showing Your Best Self During the Interview

  • Take a good sleep at night.
  • Don’t try to cram information at the last minute.
  • Ask for pen and paper for notes during an interview.
  • Be sure to fully present for the duration of the interview.
  • Be yourself.
  • Ask questions about the things that you care about.
  • Remember to slow down.

Subsections of Computer Networking

Introduction to Networking

What is Networking?

Basics of Networking

Network

An interconnection of Computers.

The Internet

The physical connection of computers and wires around the world.

The Web

The information present on the Internet.

Networking

In an IT field, managing, building, and designing networks.

Networking Hardware

  • Ethernet Cables
  • Wi-Fi
  • Fiber Optics
  • Router
  • ISP Network
  • Switches and Hubs

Network Stack

A set of hardware or software that provides the infrastructure for a computer.

Language of the Internet

IP

Delivers packets to right computers.

TCP

Delivers information from one network to another.

The Web

  • URL
  • Domain Name (registered with ICANN: internet corporation for assigned names and numbers)
  • DNS

Limitations of the Internet

History of the Internet

  • 1960s DARPA project introduced with the earliest form of Internet called ARPANET.
  • 1970s invention of TCP/IP made possible the interconnection of computers and different networks.
  • 1990s was the start of World Wide Web (WWW).

Limitations of the Internet

  • IPV4 addresses are limited, only >4 billion.
  • IPV6 addresses solve this problem with 2128 addresses, but adaptation is slow and expensive.

Network Address Translation (NAT)

Lets an organization use one public IP address and many private IP addresses within the network.

Impact of the Internet

Globalization

The movement that lets governments, businesses, and organizations communicate and integrate together on an international scale.

Internet of Things (IOT)

Smart devices like thermostat, refrigerators, and other home appliances as well as every day smart devices which are being connected to the internet thanks to the IOT.

Privacy and Security

  • GDPR (General Data Protection Regulation)
  • COPPA (Children Online Privacy Protection Act)
  • Copyright Laws

Introduction to Computer Networking

Protocol

A defined set of standards that computers must follow in order to communicate properly.

Computer Networking

The name we’ve given to the full scope of how computer communicate with each other.

  • TCP/IP five layered network model

The Basics of Networking Devices

Cables

“Connect different devices to each other, allowing data to be transmitted over them.”

  • Copper Cables

    • Change voltage to get binary data
    • The most common forms of copper twisted-pair cables used in networking are Cat5, Cat5e, and Cat6 cables

    Types of Twisted-Pair Copper Cables Types of Twisted-Pair Copper Cables

    Crosstalk: “When an electrical pulse on one wire is accidentally detected on another wire.”

  • Fiber Optic Cables

    Contain individual optical fibers, which are tiny tubes made out of glass about the width of a human hair.

  • Unlike copper cables, fibers use light pulses to send 1s and 0s

Hubs and Switches

Hub

A physical layer device that allows for connections from many computers at once.

Hubs’s Working Hubs’s Working

  • Layer 1 device

  • Collision domain: A network segment where only one device can communicate at a time.

  • If multiple systems try sending data at the same time, the electrical pulses sent across the cable can interfere with each other.

    Data Collision Data Collision

Network Switch

  • Layer 2 device
  • Can direct traffic to a particular node on network, so reduces Collision Domain

Routers

  • The primary devices used to connect computers on a single network, usually referred to as a LAN or local area network

A device that knows how to forward data between independent networks

  • Layer 3 (network) device
  • Core ISP routers (More complex than home routers) form the backbone of the internet.

Servers and Clients

Server Provide data to some client, requesting it

  • Vague definition, as individual programs running on the computer can also act a server

The TCP/IP Five-Layer Network Model

1) Physical Layer

Represents the physical devices that interconnect computers.

  • 10 Base T, 802.11

  • Bits

    The smallest representation of data that a computer can understand; it’s a one or zero

  • 1s and 0s are sent across the network using modulation

    Modulation: A way of varying the voltage of charge moving across the cables

  • When using modulation in computer networks, it’s called Line coding

Twisted-Pair Cabling and Duplexing

  • Most common
  • Twisted-Pair to avoid interference & crosstalk

Duplex Communication: The concept that information can flow in both directions across the globe

Simplex Communication: This is unidirectional

Simplex and Duplex Communication Simplex and Duplex Communication

Network Ports and Patch Panels

  • Twisted-Pair Cables end with the plug which takes the wires and act as a connector

  • The most common plug RJ45

    Plugs and Connector Plugs and Connector

    Network Ports: They are generally directly attached to the devices that make up a computer network

  • Most network ports have two small LEDs

    Activity LED: Would flash when data actively transmitted across the cable

    Link LED: Lit when cable properly connected to two devices that are both powered on

  • Sometimes a network port isn’t connected directly to a device. Instead, there might be network ports mounted on a wall or underneath your desk. These ports are generally connected to the network via cables, run through the walls, that eventually end at a patch panel.

    Patch Panel: A device containing many network ports. But it does no other work.

Responsible for defining a common way of interpreting these signals so network devices can communicate.

  • Ethernet: The Ethernet standards also define a protocol responsible for getting data to nodes on the same network.
  • WI-FI
  • Frames
  • Mac-Address

Ethernet and MAC Addresses

  • Ethernet is the most common means of sending data

  • Ethernet solves Collision domain by using a technique known as carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD).

    CSMA/CD: Used to determine when the communications channels are clear, and when device is free to transmit data

    MAC Address: A globally unique identifier attached to an individual network interface

    • It’s a 48- bit number normally represented by six groupings of two hexadecimal numbers
    • Hexadecimal: A way to represent numbers using 16 digits

    Hexadecimal Numbers Hexadecimal Numbers

    • Another way to represent MAC Address is Octet
    • Octet: In computer networking, any number can be represented by 8 bits
    • MAC-Address is split in two categories

    1) Organizationally Unique Identifier(OUI): The first three octets of a MAC address

    2) Vendor Assigned(NIC Cards, Interfaces): Last three octets are assigned by the vendor, depending upon their preferences.

    MAC Address Types MAC Address Types

    • Ethernet uses MAC addresses to ensure that the data it sends has both an address for the machine that sent the transmission, and the one the transmission was intended for.

Uni-cast, Multicast and Broadcast

  • Uni-cast

    A uni-cast transmission is always meant for just one receiving address

    Unicast Unicast

    • It’s done by looking at a specific bit in the destination MAC address
    • If the least significant bit in the first octet of a destination address is set to zero, it means that an Ethernet frame is intended for only the destination address.
    • If the least significant bit in the first octet of a destination address is set to one, it means you’re dealing with a Multicast frame.

    Multicast Multicast

  • Broadcast

    An Ethernet Broadcast is sent to every single device on a LAN

    • This is accomplished by a special address known as Broadcast address
    • Ethernet broadcast are used, so devices can learn more about each other
    • Ethernet broadcast address used is FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF

    Broadcast Broadcast

Dissecting an Ethernet Frame

  • Data Packet

    An all-encompassing term that represents any single set of binary data being sent across a network link

  • Ethernet Frame

    A highly structured collection of information presented in a specific order

    Ethernet Frame Ethernet Frame

    • The first part of an Ethernet frame is called a preamble.

    Preamble: 8 bytes (or 64 bits) long, and can itself split into two sections

    • Preamble can split into two part of 1 byte of series of 1s and 0s
    • Last frame in preamble is called Start frame delimiter (SFD)

    Signals to a receiving device that the preamble is over and that the actual frame contents will now follow

    • Next is Destination MAC address

    The hardware address of the intended recipient

    • Followed by Source Address
    • The next part of Ethernet Frame is EtherType field

    16 bits long and used to describe the protocol of the contents of the frame

    • WE can use VLAN header in place of EtherType field

    Indicates that the frame itself is what’s called a VLAN frame

    • If a VLAN header is present, the EtherType field follows it.

    Virtual LAN (VLAN): A technique that lets you have multiple logical LANs operating on the same physical equipment

    • VLANs, use to segregate different type of network traffic

    Vlan Network Vlan Network

    • The next part of Ether frame is payload

    In networking terms, is the actual data being transported, which is everything that isn’t a header.

    • Following payload is, Frame Check Sequence (FCS)

    A 4-byte (or 32-bit) number that represents a checksum value for the entire frame

    • This checksum value is calculated by performing what’s known as a cyclical redundancy check against the frame.

    Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC): An important concept for data integrity, and is used all over computing, not just network transmissions

3) Network Layer

Allows different networks to communicate with each other through devices known as routers.

  • IP: IP is the heart of the Internet and smaller networks around the world.
  • Datagram
  • IP Address

Inter-network

A collection of networks connected together through routers, the most famous of these being the Internet.

4) Transport Layer

Sorts out which client and server programs are supposed to get that data.

  • TCP/UDP
  • Segment
  • Ports

5) Application Layer

There are lots of different protocols at this layer, and as you might have guessed from the name, they are application-specific. Protocols used to allow you to browse the web or send, receive email are some common ones.

  • HTTP, SMTP etc.
  • Messages

The Network Layer

IP Addresses

  • 32 bit long

  • 4 octets describe in decimal number

  • Each octet range from 0 to 255

  • IP Addresses belong to Networks, not to the devices attached to those networks

    When connecting to a network, an IP address is assigned automatically by Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)

    IP address assigned by DHCP is called Dynamic IP address

  • Other type is static IP addresses

  • In most cases, static IP addresses are reserved for servers and networks devices, while Dynamic IP addresses are reserved for clients

IP Datagrams and Encapsulation

  • IP Datagram

    A highly structured series of fields that are strictly defined.

IP Datagram Header

  • Version

    IPv4 is more common than IPv6

  • Header Length field

    Almost always 20 bytes in length when dealing with IPv4

  • Service Type field

    These 8 bits can be used to specify details about quality of service, or QoS, technologies

  • Total Length field

    Indicates the total length of the IP datagram it’s attached to

  • Identification field

    A 16-bit number that’s used to group messages together

    The maximum size of a single datagram is the largest number you can represent with 16 bits which is 65535 If the total amount of data that needs to be sent is larger than what can fit in a single datagram, the IP layer needs to split this data up into many individual packets

  • Next are closely related Flags and Fragment Offset fields

  • Flags field

    Used to indicate if a datagram is allowed to be fragmented, or to indicate that the datagram has already been fragmented

    • Fragmentation

    The process of taking a single IP datagram and splitting it up into several smaller datagrams

  • Time to Live (TTL) field

    An 8-bit field that indicates how many router hops a datagram can transverse before it’s thrown away

  • Protocol field

    Another 8-bit field that contains data about what transport layer protocol is being used, the most common ones are TCP and UDP

  • Header checksum field

    A checksum of the contents of the entire IP datagram header

  • Source IP address (32-bits)

  • Destination IP address (32-bits)

  • IP Options field

    An optional field and is used to set special characteristics for datagrams primarily used for testing purposes

  • Padding field

    A series of zeros used to ensure the header is of correct total size, due to variable size to option field

Encapsulation

IP datagram is basically the payload section of network layer, the process involved is called Encapsulation.

  • Entire content IP datagram are encapsulated in the form of IP payload of 3rd layer

IP Datagrams IP Datagrams

IP Address Classes

  • IP addresses can be split into two sections: the network ID and host ID

    IP Address Classes IP Address Classes

Address class system

A way defining how the global IP address space is split up.

  • Three Types of IP addresses, ClassA, ClassB, ClassC
  • ClassA

Only first octet is used for network ID, rest is used for host ID.

  • ClassB

Only the first two octets are used for network ID, the rest are used for host ID.

  • ClassC

First three octets used for network ID, the last one used for host ID.

IP Address Classes IP Address Classes

Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)

A protocol used to discover the hardware address of a node with a certain IP address.

ARP table

A list of IP addresses and the MAC addresses associated with them.

  • ARP table entries generally expire after a short amount of time to ensure changes in the network are accounted for.

Subnetting

The process of taking a large network and splitting it up into many individual and smaller subnetworks, or subnets.

  • Class-C subnetting table.

    Subnetting Table Subnetting Table

Subnet Masks

32-bits numbers that are normally written out as four octets in decimal.

OR

A way for a computer to use AND operators to determine if an IP address exists on the same network.

  • A single 8-bit number can represent 256 different numbers, or more specifically, the numbers 0-255.

Subnet ID

  • Generally, an IP address consists of Network ID and Host ID

  • In Subnetting world, Host ID is further divided into Subnet ID to identify the subnet mask.

    Subnet ID Subnet ID

Basic Binary Math

Basic Binary Table Basic Binary Table

  • Two of the most important operators are OR and AND.
  • In computer logic, a 1 represents true and a 0 represents false.

CIDR (Classless Inter-Domain Routing)

  • Addresses should be continuous
  • Number of addresses in a block must be in power of 2
  • First address of every block must be evenly divisible with the size of the block

Demarcation point

To describe where one network or system ends and another one begins.

CIDR CIDR

Routing

Basic Routing Concepts

Router

A network device that forwards traffic depending on the destination address of that traffic.

Basic Routing Basic Routing

Routing Tables

  • Destination Network

    Destination Network Destination Network

  • Next Hop

  • Total Hops

  • Interface

Routing Protocols

  • Routing protocols fall into two main categories: interior gateway protocols and exterior gateway protocols.
  • Interior Gateway Protocols
    • Link state routing protocols
    • distance-vector protocols

Interior Gateway Protocols

Used by routers to share information within a single autonomous system.

Autonomous system

“A collection of networks that all fall under the control of a single network operator.”

Interior Gateway Protocols Interior Gateway Protocols

In computer science, a list is known as a vector.

Exterior Gateway Protocol

Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA)

“A non-profit organization that helps manage things like IP address allocation.”

  • Also, responsible for ASN allocation

Autonomous System Number (ASN)

Numbers assigned to individual autonomous systems.

  • 32-bits long as IP addresses

  • But has only single decimal block instead of 4 octets

    The Internet The Internet

Non-Routable Address Space

  • IPv4 standard doesn’t have enough IP addresses
  • There are non-routable address spaces, set aside for internal use only and couldn’t free communicate on the free internet

Transport Layer and Application Layer

The Transport Layer

“Allows traffic to be directed to specific network applications”

  • It handles multiplexing and demultiplexing through ports

    De/multiplexing De/multiplexing

  • Port

A 16-bit number that’s used to direct traffic to specific services running on a networked computer

Port Number Port Number

A Small Company Network Hosted on a Single Server A Small Company Network Hosted on a Single Server

Dissection of a TCP Segment

  • IP datagram encapsulate TCP segment

TCP segment

“Made up of a TCP header and a data section.”

TCP Header

A TCP Header A TCP Header

  • Destination port

    The port of the service the traffic is intended for.

  • Source port

    A high-numbered port chosen from a special section of ports known as ephemeral ports.

  • Sequence number

    A 32-bit number that’s used to keep track of where in a sequence of TCP segments this one is expected to be.

  • Acknowledgement number

    The number of the next expected segment.

  • Data offset field

    A 4-bit number that communicates how long the TCP header for this segment is.

  • Control Flag (See next part)

  • TCP window

    Specifies the range of sequence numbers that might be sent before an acknowledgement is required.

  • TCP checksum

    Operates just like the checksum fields at the IP and Ethernet level.

  • Urgent pointer field

    Used in conjunction with one of the TCP control flags to point out particular segments that might be more important than others. (No real world adoption of this TCP feature)

  • Options field

    It is sometimes used for more complicated flow control protocols. (rarely used in real world)

  • Padding

    Just a sequence of zeros to make sure the data payload section starts at the expected location.

TCP Control Flags and the Three-way Handshake

TCP Control Flags

Not in strict order;

  • URG (urgent)

A value of one here indicates that the segment is considered urgent and that the urgent pointer field has more data about this. (No particular real world use for this flag)

  • ACK (acknowledged)

A value of one in this field means that the acknowledgement number field should be examined.

  • PSH (push)

The transmitting device wants the receiving device to push currently-buffered data to the application on the receiving end asap.

  • RST (reset)

On the sides in a TCP connection hasn’t been able to properly recover from a series of missing or malformed segments.

  • SYN (synchronize)

It’s used when first establishing a TCP connection and makes sure the receiving end knows to examine the sequence number field.

  • FIN (finish)

When this flag is set to one, it means the transmitting computer doesn’t have any more data to send and the connection can be closed.

The Three-way Handshake

  • Handshake

“A way for two devices to ensure that they’re speaking the same protocol and will be able to understand each other.”

A Three-way Handshake A Three-way Handshake

A TCP Handshake A TCP Handshake

The Four-way Handshake

  • Not very common

  • TCP connection when finishes sending data, it sends FIN to request the port closure.

  • Then receiving end responds with ACK flag and connection closes

  • Even though the port, on one end, can simply remain open, and the connection ends without closing it

    A Four-way Handshake A Four-way Handshake

TCP Socket States

Socket

“The instantiation of an end-point in a potential TCP connection.”

Instantiation

“The actual implementation of something defined elsewhere.”

Socket States

  • LISTEN

    A TCP socket is ready and listening for incoming connection.

  • SYN-SENT

    A synchronization request has been sent, but the connection has not been established yet.

  • SYN-RECEIVED

    A socket previously in a LISTEN state has received a synchronization request and sent a SYN/ACK back.

  • ESTABLISHED

    The TCP connection is in working order and both sides are free to send each other data.

  • FIN-WAIT

    A FIN has been sent, but the corresponding ACK from the other end hasn’t been received yet.

  • CLOSE-WAIT

    The connection has been closed at the TCP layer, but the application that opened the socket hasn’t yet released its hold on the socket yet.

  • CLOSED

    The connection has been fully terminated and that no further communication is possible.

Connection-oriented and Connectionless Protocols

Connection-oriented Protocol

“Established a connection, and uses this to ensure that all data has been properly transmitted.”

A lossless TCP Transfer A lossless TCP Transfer

A Packet loss during TCP Transfer A Packet loss during TCP Transfer

Connectionless Protocol

  • The most common one is UDP
  • Used where data integrity is not super important, i.e., video streaming

System Ports vs. Ephemeral Ports

  • Port 0 isn’t in use for network traffic, but sometimes used in communications taking place between different programs on the same computer
  • Ports 1-1024 are referred as system ports or sometimes as well-known ports. These ports represent the official ports for the most well-known network services.
    • i.e., HTTP uses port-80, FTP uses port-21
    • Admin level access is needed to listen on these port in mos OSs
  • Ports 1024-49151 are known as registered ports. These ports are used for lots of other network services that might not be quite as common as the ones that are on system ports.
    • i.e., Port-3306 is used for many Databases listen on
    • Some of these ports are registered with IANA but not always
  • Ports 49152-65535 are known as Private or ephemeral ports. Ephemeral ports can’t be registered with the IANA and are generally used for establishing outbound connections.
    • When a client wants to communicate with a server, the client will be assigned an ephemeral port to be used for just that one connection, while the server listen on a static system or registered port
    • Not all OSs follow the ephemeral port recommendation of the IANA

Firewalls

“A device that blocks traffic that meets certain criteria.”

The Application Layer

“Allows network applications to communicate in a way they understand.”

The TCP Five-Layered Model The TCP Five-Layered Model

  • Too many protocols in use at application layer, a hassle to list them all.
    • i.e., HTTP, SMTP, etc.

The Application Layer and the OSI Model

Session Layer

“Facilitating the communication between actual applications and the transport layer.”

  • Takes application layer data and hands it off to the presentation layer

Presentation Layer

“Responsible for making sure that the un-encapsulated application layer data is able to understand by the application in question.”

The OSI 7-Layer Model The OSI 7-Layer Model

Networking Services

Name Resolution

Why do we need DNS?

  • Human brain is not good at remembering numbers
  • So a system called DNS is developed to assign those IP addresses to memorable domain names

Domain Name System (DNS)

“A global and highly distributed network service that resolves strings of letters into IP addresses for you.”

Domain Name

“The term we use for something that can be resolved by DNS.”

The Many Steps of Name Resolution

There are five primary types of DNS servers;

  • Caching name servers
  • Recursive name servers
  • Root name servers (13 root servers all over world)
  • TLD name servers
  • Authoritative name servers

Caching and Recursive name servers

The purpose is to store known domain name lookups for a certain amount of time.

Recursive name servers

  • Perform full DNS resolution requests
  • Time to live (TTL)

A value, in seconds, that can be configured by the owner of a domain name for how long a name server is allowed to cache an entry before it should discard it and perform a full resolution again

A Typical DNS Query

A DNS query: Step 1 A DNS query: Step 1

Step 2 Step 2

Step 3 Step 3

Step 4 Step 4

Step 5 Step 5

Anycast

“A technique that’s used to route traffic to different destinations depending on factors like location, congestion, or link health.”

DNS and UDP

  • DNS, an application layer service, uses UDP

  • A full DNS lookup with TCP in use, will use 44 total packets

    A DNS resolution with TCP A DNS resolution with TCP

  • A full DNS lookup with UDP on the other hand require only 8 packets

  • Error recovery is done by asking again in the UDP, as no error check is present

    A DNS Lookup with UDP A DNS Lookup with UDP

Name Resolution is Practice

Resource Record Types

A record

“An A record is used to point a certain domain name at a certain IPv4 IP address.”

  • A single A record is configured for a single domain
  • But a single domain name can have multiple A records, this allows for a technique known as DNS round-robin to be used to balance traffic across multiple IPs

Round-robin is a concept that involves iterating over a list of items one by one in hastily fashion. The hope is that this ensures a fairly equal balance of each entry on the list that’s selected.

AAAA – Quad A

“Quad A record is used to point a certain domain name at a certain IPv6 IP address.”

CNAME

“A CNAME record is used to redirect traffic from one domain name to another.”

MX record – mail exchange

“This resource record is used in order to deliver e-mail to the correct server.”

SRV record – service record

“It’s used to define the location of various specific services.”

  • MX record is only used for e-mails, SRC is used for every other service
    • I.e., caldav (calendar and scheduling service)

TXT record – text

  • Used to communicate configuration preferences of a domain

Anatomy of a Domain Name

Top level domain (TLD)

The last part of a domain name. E.g. .com, .net etc.

  • TLDs are handled by non-profit The Internet Corporation for Assigned Names and Number (ICANN)
  • ICANN is a sister organization to IANA, together both help define and control the global IP spaces and DNS system

Domains

“Used to demarcate where control moves from a TLD name server to an authoritative name server.”

Subdomain

“The WWW portion of a domain.”

Full qualified domain name (FQDN)

When you combine all of these parts together, you have what’s known as this.

  • A DNS can technically support up to 127 level of domain in total for a single fully qualified domain name
  • Some other restrictions are, each individual section can only be 63 characters and a complete FQDN is limited to 255 characters

DNS Zones

“An authoritative name server is actually responsible for a specific DNS zone.”

  • Allow for easier control over multiple level of a domain.

  • DNS zones are a hierarchical concept. The root name servers are responsible for some even finer-grained zones underneath that.

  • The root and TLD name servers are actually just authoritative name servers, too. It’s just that the zones that they’re authoritative for are special zones.

  • E.g., a large company has three servers, one in LA, other in Paris and 3rd one in Shanghai. It will have three zones that and fourth for large company server, so in total 4 DNS server zones.

    DNS Zones of Large Company DNS Zones of Large Company

Zone files

“Simple configuration files that declare all resource record for a particular zone.”

Start of authority (SOA)

“Declares the zone and the name of the name server that is authoritative for it.”

NS records

“Indicate other name servers that might also be responsible for this zone.”

Reverse lookup zone files

These let DNS resolvers ask for an IP and get the FQDN associated with it returned.

Pointer resource record (PTR)

Resolves an IP to a name.

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

Overview of DHCP

Every single computer on a modern TCP/IP based network needs to have at least four things specifically configured;

  • IP address
  • Subnet mask
  • Gateway
  • Name server

DHCP

“An application layer protocol that automates the configuration process of hosts on a network.”

  • Resolves problem having to manually give an IP address to a device each time, it connects to the internet.

  • DHCP works on some standards, like Dynamic allocation.

    DHCP DHCP

Dynamic Allocation

“A range of IP addresses is set aside for client devices, and one of these IPs is issued to these devices when they request one.”

  • Under Dynamic allocation, IP of the computer is different every time, it connects to the Internet. Automatic allocation does it**.

Automatic Allocation

“A range of IP addresses is set aside for assignment purposes.”

  • The main difference is that, the DHCP server is asked to keep track of which IPs it’s assigned to certain devices in the past.
  • Using this information, the DHCP server will assign the same IP to the same machine each time if possible.

Fixed Allocation

Requires a manually specified list of MAC address and their corresponding IPs.

Network time protocol (NTP) servers

“Used to keep all computers on a network synchronized in time.”

  • DHCP keeps track of NTP

DHCP in Action

It is an application layer protocol, so it relies on:

  • Transport layer
  • Network layer
  • Data link layer
  • Physical layer

So, how DHCP works in practice:

DHCP discovery

“The process by which a client configured to use DHCP attempts to get network configuration information.”

It has four steps

  • The DHCP clients sends what’s known as a DHCP discover message out onto the network.

DHCPDISCOVER Message DHCPDISCOVER Message

  • The response is sent via DHCP offer message.

DHCPOFFER Message DHCPOFFER Message

  • A DHCP client will respond to a DHCP offer message with a DHCP request message.

DHCPREQUEST Message DHCPREQUEST Message

  • DHCP server will receive DHCPREQUEST and respond with DHCPACK message

DHCPACK Message DHCPACK Message

  • All of this configuration is known as DHCP lease, as it includes an expiration time. DHCP lease might last for days or only a short amount of time.

Network Address Translation

Basics of NAT

  • It is a technique, instead of a protocol.
  • Different hardware vendor implement NAT differently

Network Address Translation (NAT)

“A technology that allows a gateway, usually a router or firewall, to rewrite the source IP of an outgoing IP datagram while retaining the original IP in order to rewrite it into the response.”

  • Hides the IP of the computer originating the request. This is known as IP masquerading.

  • To the outside world, the entire space of Network A is hidden and private. This is called One-to-many NAT.

    A NAT in action A NAT in action

NAT and the Transport Layer

  • When traffic is outbound, for hundreds, even thousands of computers can all have their IPs translated via NAT to a single IP.
  • The concept become a bit cumbersome when return traffic is involved.
  • In inbound traffic, we have potentially hundreds of responses all directed at the same IP, and the router at this IP needs to figure out which response go to which computer.
  • The simplest way to do this, is port preservation technique.

Port preservation

“A technique where the source port chosen by a client is the same port used by the router.”

Port preservation in Practice Port preservation in Practice

Port forwarding

“A technique where specific destination ports can be configured to always be delivered to specific nodes.”

Port forwarding in practice Port forwarding in practice

NAT, Non-Routable Address Space and the Limits of IPv4

IANA is in-charge of distributing IPs since 1988. The 4.2 billion have run out since long.

  • For some time now, the IANA has primarily been responsible with assigning address blocks to the five regional internet registries or RIRs.

    • AFRINIC servers the continent of Africa. (Mar 2017 – ran out of addresses)
    • ARIN serves the USA, Canada, and parts of the Caribbean. (Sep 2015 – ran out of addresses)
    • APNIC is responsible for most of Asia, Australia, New Zealand, and Pacific island nations. (2011 – ran out of addresses)
    • LACNIC covers Central and South America and any parts of the Caribbean not covered by ARIN. (June 2014 – ran out of addresses)
    • RIPE serves Europe, Russia, the Middle East, and portions of Central Asia. (Sep 2012 – ran out of addresses)
  • The IANA assigned the last unallocated /8 network blocks to the various RIRs on February 3, 2011.

  • Solution is NAT, and Non-Routable Address Space, defined rfc1918.

    NAT, Non-Routable Address space at Rescue NAT, Non-Routable Address space at Rescue

VPNs and Proxies

Virtual Private Networks

“A technology that allows for the extension of a private or local network to hosts that might not be on that local network.”

VPN in practice VPN in practice

  • A VPN is a tunneling protocol, it’s basically a technique not a strict protocol which involves, using different methods.

  • VPNs require strict authentication protocols to allow only access to the required clients

  • VPNs were the first to implement the 2FA on a large scale

  • VPNs can be used to have site to site connectivity as well

    VPN in action VPN in action

Two-factor authentication

“A technique where more than just a username and password are required to authenticate.”

Proxy Services

“A server that acts on behalf of a client in order to access another service.”

  • They sit between client and server, providing some additional benefits like;
    • Anonymity
    • Security
    • Content flittering
    • Increased performance
  • The most commonly heard are Web proxies intended for web traffic.

Reverse proxy

“A service that might appear to be a single server to external clients, but actually represents many servers living behind it.”

Reverse Proxy Reverse Proxy

Connecting to the Internet

POTS and Dial-up

Dial-up, Modems and Point-to-Point Protocols

  • In the late 1970s, two graduate students of Duke University were trying to come up with a better way to connect computers at further distances.
  • They realized basic infrastructure in the form of telephone lines already existed.
  • The Public Switched Telephone Network or PSTN also referred as the Plain Old Telephone Service or POTS.
  • The system they built was called USENET, which was the precursor for Dial-up.

Dial-up

A dial-up connection uses POTS for data transfer, and gets its name because the connection is established by actually dialing a phone number.

A Dial-up A Dial-up

  • Transferring data on dial-ups is done through Modems, stands for Modulator/Demodulator.

    A Modem In Practice A Modem In Practice

  • Early modems have very low Baud rate

  • By the late 1950s, computers can generally send data at the rate of 110bps.

  • When USENET was developed, this rate was increased to 300bps

  • In the early 1990s, when the dial-up access to the Internet became a household commodity, this rate was increased to 14.4kbps.

Baud rate

“A measurement of how many bits can be passed across a phone line in a second.”

Broadband Connections

What is broadband?

“Any connectivity technology that isn’t dial-up Internet.”

  • In the late 1990s, it was to become common for most businesses to use T-carrier technologies.
  • T-carrier technologies require dedicated line, so are used by mainly only businesses.
  • Other solutions and technologies also available for businesses and normal consumers
    • DSL
    • Cable broadband
    • Fiber connections

T-carrier technologies

“Originally invented by AT&T in order to transmit multiple phone calls over a single link.”

  • Before Transmission System 1 or short T1, each phone call requires its own copper cable to transmit.

  • With T1, AT&T invented a way to carry 24 phone calls simultaneously over a single copper cable.

  • A few years later, T1 technology was repurposed for data transfers.

    T1 technology at play T1 technology at play

  • Over the years, the phrase T1 has come to mean any twisted pair copper connection capable of speeds of 1.544mbps, even if they don’t strictly follow the original Transferring System 1 specifications.

  • Initially, T1 lines were used to connect telecommunication channels only

  • But as the Internet grew, many businesses and companies paid to have T1 cables installed for faster connectivity.

  • Improvements were made by developing a way for multiple T1s to act as a single link.

  • T3 line was invented which has 28 T1 lines combined, and total speed of 44.736mbps.

  • Now for small businesses and companies, Fiber connection are more common as they cheaper.

  • For inner-ISP communications, different Fiber technologies have all replaced older copper-based ones.

Digital Subscriber Lines (DSL)

  • DSL made possible the occurrence of phone calls and data transfer on the same line, and at the same time.

  • DSL uses their own modems called Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexers (DSLAMs).

  • Just like dial-up modems, these devices establish data connections across phone lines, but inline dial-up connections, they’re usually long-running.

  • Two most common DLSs are:

    • ADSL (Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line)
      • Feature different speed of outbound and inbound data. It means faster download speeds and slower upload.
    • SDSL (Symmetric Digital Subscriber Line)
      • Same as ADSL, but upload and download speeds are the same.
      • Most SDSLs have an upper cap of speed, 1.544mbps.
  • Further developments in SDSL technology have yielded things like:

    • HDSL (High Bit-rate Digital Subscriber Lines)
      • These provision speeds above 1.544mbps.

    A DSL connection A DSL connection

Cable Broadband

  • The history of both computer and telephone tells a story that started with all communications being wired, but the recent trend is moving towards more traffic as wireless.

  • But television followed the opposite path. Originally, all television broadcast was wireless, sent out by giant television towers and received by smaller antennas in people’s houses.

  • You had to be in range of that towers to receive signals, like today you’ve to be in range of cellular tower for cellular communications.

  • Late 1940s, first television technology was developed.

  • In 1984, Cable Communications Policy Act deregulated the television industry, started booming, rest of the world soon followed suit.

    Cable and DSL Cable and DSL

  • Cable connections are managed by Cable modems.

Cable modems

The device that sits at the edge of a consumer’s network and connects it to the cable modem, termination system, or CMTS.

Cable modem termination system (CMTS)

Connects lots of different cable connections to an ISPs core network.

Fiber Connections

  • Fiber achieve higher speed, no degradation in signal transfer.

  • An electrical signal can only travel a few hundred meters before degradation in copper cable.

  • While light signal in fiber cables can travel many, many KMs before degradation.

  • Producing and laying fibers a lot more expensive than copper cables.

  • Fiber connection to the end consumers, varies tons due to tons of implications.

  • That’s why the phrase FTTX or fiber to the X was developed.

    • FTTN: Fiber to the Neighborhood
    • FTTB: Fiber to the Building, FTTB is a setup where fiber technologies are used for data delivery to an individual building.
    • FTTH: Fiber to the Home
    • FTTB and FTTH, both may also refer to as FTTP or Fiber to the Premises
  • Instead of modem, the demarcation point for Fiber technologies is known as Optical Network Terminator or ONT.

    Fiber to the X Fiber to the X

Optical Network Terminator (ONT)

Converts data from protocols, the fiber network can understand, to those that more traditional, twisted-pair copper networks can understand.

WANs

Wide Area Network Technologies

“Acts like a single network, but spans across multiple physical locations.”

  • It works at Data Link Layer.
  • WANs are built to be superfast.
  • Some technologies used in WANs:
    • Frame Relay

    Frame Relay is a standardized wide area network (WAN) technology that specifies the Physical & Data Link Layer of digital telecommunications channels using a packet switching methodology. Originally designed for transport across Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) infrastructure, it may be used today in the context of many other network interfaces.

    • High-Level Data Link Control (HDLC)

    HDLC is a bit-oriented code-transparent synchronous data link layer protocol developed by the International Organization for Standardization (ISO). The standard for HDLC is ISO/IEC 13239:2002.

    • HDLC provides both connection-oriented and connectionless service.
    • Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM)

    A standard defined by **American National Standards Institute (ANSI) and ITU-T for digital transmission of multiple types of traffic.

    • ATM was developed to meet the needs of the Broadband Integrated Services Digital Network (BISDN) as defined in the late 1980s.

Local Loop

“In a WAN, the area between a demarcation point and the ISP’s core network is called Local Loop.”

Point-to-Point VPNs

  • A popular alternative to WAN technologies

  • Companies are moving to cloud for services such as email, Cloud Storage. So, expensive cost of WANs is often outnumbered.

  • They maintain their secure connection to these cloud solutions through Point-to-Point VPNs.

  • Point-to-Point VPN, typically called Site-to-Site VPN.

    Point-to-Point VPNs Point-to-Point VPNs

Wireless Networking

Introduction to Wireless Networking Technologies

“A way to network without wires.”

  • IEEE 802.11 Standards or 802.11 family define the most common workings of Wireless networks.

  • Wireless devices communicate via radio waves.

  • Different 802.11 generally use the same basic protocol but different frequency bands.

  • In North America, FM radio transmissions operate between 88 and 108 MHz. This specific frequency band is called FM Frequency Band.

  • Wi-Fi works at 2.4GHz and 5GHz bands.

  • There are many 802.11 specifications, but common ones, you might run into are: (In order of when it were introduced)

    • 802.11b
    • 802.11a
    • 802.11g
    • 802.11n
    • 802.11ac
  • 802.11 = physical and data link layers

  • All specifications operate with the same basic data link protocol. But, how they operate at the 88physical layer** varies.

  • 802.11 frame has a number of fields.

    • Frame control field

    It is 16-bits long and contains a number of subfields that are used to describe how the frame itself should be processed.

    • Duration field

    It specifies how long the total frame is, so the receiver knows how long it should expect to have to listen to this transmission.

    • The rest are 4 address fields. 6 bytes long.
      • Source address field
      • Intended destination
      • Receiving address
      • Transmitter address
    • Sequence control field

    It is 16-bits long and mainly contains a sequence number used to keep track of the ordering of frames.

    • Data payload

    Has all the data of the protocols further up the stack.

    • Frame check sequence field

    Contains a checksum used for a cyclical redundancy check, just like how Ethernet does it.

  • The most common wireless setup includes wireless access point.

    802.11 Data Frame 802.11 Data Frame

Frequency band

“A certain section of the radio spectrum that’s been agreed upon to be used for certain communications.”

Wireless access point

“A device that bridges the wireless and wired portions of a network.”

Wireless Network Configuration

  • There are few ways wireless networks can be configured
    • Ad-hoc networks: Nodes speak directly to each other.
    • Wireless LANS (WLANS): Where one or more access point act as a bridge between a wireless and a wired network.
    • Mesh Networks: Hybrid of the former two.

Ad-hoc Network

  • Simplest of the three

  • In an ad-hoc network, there isn’t really any supporting network infrastructure.

  • Every device on the network speaks directly to every other device on the network.

  • Used in smartphones, Warehouses

  • Important tool during disaster like earthquake, the relief workers, can communicate via ad-hoc network.

    Ad-hoc Network Ad-hoc Network

Wireless LAN (WLAN)

  • Most common in business settings

    Wireless LAN Wireless LAN

Mesh Network

  • Most mesh networks are only made up of wireless access points. And are still connected to the wired network.

    Mesh Network Mesh Network

Wireless Channels

“Individual, smaller sections of the overall frequency band used by a wireless network.”

  • Channels solve the problem of collision domain.

    2.4 GHz band and Wireless Channels 2.4 GHz band and Wireless Channels

Collision domain

“Any one of the network segment where one computer can interrupt another.”

Wireless Security

  • Data packets sent in the air via radio waves need to be protected.
  • Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) was invented to encrypt data packets.
  • WEP uses only 40-bits for its encryption keys, which could easily be compromised with modern and fast computers.
  • So, WEP was quickly replaced in most places with WPA or Wi-Fi Protected Access.
  • WPA, by-default, uses 128-bits key.
  • Nowadays, the most common wireless encryption method used is WPA2, an update to the original WPA
  • WPA2 uses 256-bits key.
  • Another common way of securing wireless traffic is MAC filtering.

Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP)

“An encryption technology that provides a very low level of privacy.”

MAC filtering

You configure your access points to only allow for connections from a specific set of MAC addresses belonging to devices you trust.

Cellular Networking

  • Cellular networks have a lot in common with 802.11 networks.

  • Just like Wi-Fi, they also operate on radio waves.

  • There are cellular frequency bands reserved for Cellular communications.

  • Phone frequency waves can travel several KMs.

    Cellular Networking Cellular Networking

Mobile Device Networks

  • Mobile devices use wireless networks to communicate with the Internet and with other devices.
  • Depending on the device, it might use:
    • Cellular networks
    • Wi-Fi
    • Bluetooth
    • Internet of Things (IoT) network protocols

IoT Wireless network protocols at the physical layer

  • IoT devices can use both wired and wireless connections.
  • Most IoT devices can use at least one of the following network protocols:

Wi-Fi

  • Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi): IEEE 802.11 Standard
  • Wi-Fi 6 can support up-to 500mbps
  • The 2.4 GHz frequency extends to 150 feet (45.72 m) indoors, and 300 feet (91.44 m) outdoors.
  • 2.4 GHz may feel congestion due to limited number of channels and high interference from other devices.
  • 5.0 GHz provide stronger signal and has more channels to handle more traffic. The drawback is a limited range of 50 feet (ca. 15 meters) indoors and 100 feet (30.48 m) outdoors.

IEEE 802.15.4

  • An inexpensive, low-power wireless access technology intended for IoT devices that operate on battery power.
  • IEEE 802.15.4 uses 2.4 GHz or lower frequencies
  • IEEE 802.15.4 is normally used for low-rate wireless personal area networks (LR-WPANs) and uses a 128-bits encryption.

ZigBee

  • ZigBee is an LR-WPANs intended for smart home use. Also adopted globally for commercial use. ZigBee LR-WPAN networks can be accessed through Wi-Fi or Bluetooth.

Thread

  • Thread: a low latency wireless mesh network protocol based on IPv6.
  • Don’t use proprietary gateways or translators, making them inexpensive and easier to implement and maintain than other wireless technologies.
  • Thread is used by Google Nest Hub Max.

Z-Wave

  • Z-Wave: An interoperable, wireless mesh protocol that is based on low powered radio frequency (RF) communications.
  • The Z-Wave protocol uses an RF signal on the *908.2MHz frequency and extends to 330 feet (0.1 km).
  • Z-Wave is inexpensive, reliable, and simple to use. The Z-Wave protocol supports a closed network for security purposes.
  • Over 3300 types and models of home and business IoT devices are certified to use Z-Wave technology, with more than 100 million devices in use worldwide.

Wireless mesh network (WMN)

Mesh networks are used by many popular wireless IoT network protocols, like Zigbee and Z-Wave, for device communication. Wireless mesh networks use less power than other wireless connectivity options. Wireless mesh is a decentralized network of connected wireless access points (WAP), also called nodes. Each WAP node forwards data to the next node in the network until the data reaches its destination. This network design is “self-healing,” meaning the network can recover on its own when a node fails. The other nodes will reroute data to exclude the failed node. Wireless mesh is a good option for high reliability and low power consumption, which is better for battery powered IoT devices. Wireless mesh networks can be configured to be full or partial mesh:

  • Full mesh network: Every node can communicate with all the other nodes in the network.
  • Partial mesh network: Nodes can only communicate with nearby nodes.

Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a widely used wireless network that operates at a 2.45 GHz frequency band and facilitates up to 3 Mbps connections among computing and IoT devices. Bluetooth has a range of up to 100 feet (ca. 30 m) and can accommodate multiple paired connections. It is a good choice for creating a short distance wireless connection between Bluetooth enabled devices. Bluetooth is often used by computing devices to manage, configure, control, and/or collect small amounts of data from one or more close range IoT devices. For example, Bluetooth may be used to control smart home lighting or thermostat IoT devices from a smartphone.

Near-Field Communication (NFC)

NFC is a short-range, low data, wireless communication protocol that operates on the 13.56 MHz radio frequency. NFC technology requires a physical chip (or tag) to be embedded in the IoT device. NFC chips can be found in credit and debit cards, ID badges, passports, wallet apps on smartphones (like Google Pay), and more. A contactless NFC scanner, like a Point-of-Sale (POS) device, is used to read the chip. This scanner communication connection typically requires the IoT device to be within 2 inches (5.08 cm) of the scanner, but some NFC chips have an 8 inch (20.32 cm) range. This short-distance range helps to limit wireless network security threats. However, criminals can carry a portable NFC scanner into a crowded area to pick up NFC chip data from items like credit cards stored inside purses and wallets. To protect against this type of data theft, the cards should be placed inside special NFC/RFID sleeves that make the chips unreadable until they are removed from the sleeves. NFC technology may also be used in the pairing process for Bluetooth connections.

Long Range Wide Area Network (LoRaWAN)

LoRaWan is an open source networking protocol designed to connect battery powered, wireless IoT devices to the Internet for widely dispersed networks.

Troubleshooting and the Future of Networking

Introduction to Troubleshooting and the Future of Networking

  • After every possible safeguard in place, misconfiguration happens and:
    • Error still pop-up
    • Misconfiguration occur
    • Hardware breaks down
    • System incompatibilities come to light

Error-detection

“The ability for a protocol or program to determine that something went wrong.”

Error-recovery

“The ability for a protocol or program to attempt to fix it.”

Verifying Connectivity

Ping: Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP)

ICMP Message

  • ICMP packet is sent to troubleshoot network issues.

  • The make-up of an ICMP packet is pretty simple, it has a HEADER and DATA section.

  • The ICMP HEADER has the following fields:

    • TYPE: 8-bits long, which specifies what type of data is being delivered. Like, destination unreachable or time exceeded.
    • CODE: 8-bits long, which indicates a more specific reason than just a type. I.e., destination unreachable type, there are different cods for destination network unreachable or destination port unreachable.
    • Checksum: 16-bits checksum, that work like every other checksum field.
    • Rest of Header 32-bits long, this field is optionally used by some specific codes and types to send more data.
  • Data Payload section for ICMP

    • The payload for an ICMP packet exists entirely so that the recipient of the message knows which of their transmissions caused the error being reported.
    • It contains the entire IP Header, and the first 8-bytes of the data payload section of the offending packet.
  • ICMP isn’t developed for the humans to interact with.

    ICMP Message ICMP Message

Ping

Ping lets you send a special type of ICMP message called an Echo Request.

  • Echo Request just asks, hi, are you there?
  • If the destination is up and running and able to communicate on the network, it’ll send back an ICMP Echo Reply message type.

Traceroute

“A utility that lets you discover the path between two nodes, and gives you information about each hop along the way.”

Traceroute Traceroute

  • Two similar tools to traceroute are:
    • MTR - Linux/macOS
    • pathping - Windows

Testing Port Connectivity

  • Sometimes, you need to know if things working at transport layer.
  • There are two powerful tools for this at your disposal:
    • netcat - Linux/macOS
    • Test-NetConnection - Windows

Digging into DNS

Name Resolution Tools

  • The most common tool is nslookup.
  • Available on all OSs.

Public DNS Servers

  • An ISP almost always gives you access to a recursive name server as part of the service it provides.

  • Many businesses run their own name servers. To give names to the Printers, computers etc. instead of referring them with their IPs.

    A Private Name server A Private Name server

  • Another option is using DNS as a service provider. It is becoming more popular.

  • Some organizations run Public DNS servers, like Google’s 8.8.8.8, Cloudflare’s 1.1.1.1, quad9’s 9.9.9.9 etc.

  • Some level 3 DNS provider also provide free public DNS servers, but not advertised by them. I.e., 4.2.2.3 etc.

    • Name servers specifically set up so that anyone can use them, for free.
    • Most public DNS servers are available globally through anycast.
  • One should be careful when using Public DNS server, hijacking outbound DNS query, and redirecting the traffic to a malicious website is a common intrusion technique.

  • Always make sure the name server is run by a reputable company, and try to use the name servers provided by your ISP outside of troubleshooting scenarios.

    DNS Hi-jacking DNS Hi-jacking

DNS Registration and Expiration

Registrar

An organization responsible for assigning individual domain names to other organizations or individuals.

  • Originally, there was only one company, Network Solutions INC responsible for domain Registration.
  • Network Solutions Inc. and USA government came to an agreement to let other companies also sell domain names.

Hosts Files

  • The original way that numbered network addresses were correlated with words was through hosts files.
  • Most modern system, like computers and Mobile phones, still hosts files.
  • Hosts files are a popular way for the computer viruses to disrupt and redirect users’ traffic.

Hosts File

“A flat file that contains, on each line, a network address followed by the host name it can be referred to as.”

Loopback Address

A way of sending network traffic to yourself.

  • Loopback IP for IPv4 is 127.0.0.1
  • Almost all hosts files in existence will, in the very least, contain a line that reads 127.0.0.1 localhost, most likely followed by ::1 localhost, where ::1 is the loop back address for IPv6.

The Cloud

What is The Cloud?

  • Not a single technology, it’s a technique.

Cloud Computing

“A technological approach where computing resources are provisioned in a shareable way, so that lots of users get what they need, when they need it.”

Or

“A new model in computing where large clusters of machines let us use the total resources available in a better way.”

  • Hardware virtualization is at the heart of cloud computing.
  • Hardware virtualization platforms deploy what’s called a hypervisor.

Virtualization

“A single physical machine, called a host, could run many individual virtual instances, called guests.”

Hypervisor

“A piece of software that runs and manages virtual machines, while also offering these guests a virtual operating platform that’s indistinguishable from an actual hardware.”

A Hypervisor A Hypervisor

Public Cloud

A large cluster of machines runs by another company.

Private Cloud

Used by a single large corporation and generally physically hosted on its own premises.

Hybrid Cloud

A term used to describe situations where companies might run a thing like their most sensitive proprietary technologies on a private cloud, while entrusting their less-sensitive servers to a public cloud.

Everything as a Service

  • X as a Service, where X can mean many things.

Infrastructure as a Service (IaaS)

You shouldn’t have to worry about building your own network or your own servers.

Platform as a Service (PaaS)

A subset of cloud computing where a platform is provided for customers to run their services.

Software as a Service (SaaS)

A way of licensing the use of software to others while keeping that software centrally hosted and managed.

  • Gmail for Business
  • Office 365 Outlook

Cloud Storage

  • Operate in different geographic region.
  • Pay as you use
  • Good for backup

IPv6

IPv6 Addressing and Subnetting

  • IPv4 was run out of new IPs

  • IPv5 was an experimental protocol that introduced the concept of connections.

  • IPv6 = 128 bits, written as 8 groups of 16-bits each. Each one of these groups is further made up of four hexadecimal numbers.

  • Full IPv6 address looks like this

    An IPv6 Address An IPv6 Address

  • Reserved IPv6 range is as follows, for education, documentation, books, courses etc.

    Reserved IPv6 Addresses Reserved IPv6 Addresses

Shortening of an IPv6 address

Two rules

  • Remove any leading zeros from a group
  • Any number of consecutive groups composed of just zeros can be replaced with two colons ::.
  • Any IPv6 address begins with FF00:: is used for multicast.
  • Any IPv6 address begins with FE80:: is used for Link-local unicast.
  • The first 32-bits of IPv6 are network ID, and last are host ID.
  • IPv6 uses the same CIDR notation for subnet mask.

Multicast

A way of addressing groups of hosts all at once.

Allow for local network segment communication and are configured based upon a host’s MAC address.

IPv6 Headers

  • Header, much simpler than IPv4 header.

  • IPv6 header has the following components:

    • Version field

    A 4-bit field that defines what version of IP is in use.

    • Traffic class field

    An 8-bit field that defines the type of traffic contained within the IP datagram, and allows for different classes of traffic to receive different priorities.

    • Flow Label Field

    A 20-bit field that’s used in conjunction with the traffic class field for routers to make decisions about the quality of service level for a specific datagram.

    • Payload length field

    A 16-bit field that defines how long the data payload section of the datagram is.

    • Next header field

    A unique concept of IPv6, and needs a little extra explanation. It defines what header is up next after that. To help reduce the problems with additional data that IPv6 addresses impose on the network, the IPv6 header was built to be a short as possible. One way to do that is to take all the optional fields and abstract them away from the IPv6 header itself. The next header field defines what kind of header is immediately after this current one. These additional headers are optional, so they’re not required for a complete IPv6 datagram. Each of these additional optional headers contain a next header field and allow for a chain of headers to be formed if there’s a lot of optional configuration.

    • Hop limit

    An 8-bit field that’s identical in purpose to the TTL field in an IPv4 header.

    • Source Address : 128-bits
    • Destination Address : 128-bits
    • Data Payload section

    An IPv6 Header An IPv6 Header

IPv6 and IPv4 harmony

  • Not possible for whole Internet to switch to IPv6 in no time.

  • So, IPv6 and IPv4 traffic need to coexist during the transition period.

  • This is possible with IPv4 mapped address space. The IPv6 specifications have set aside a number of addresses that can be directly correlated to an IPv4 address.

    IPv4 mapped address space IPv4 mapped address space

  • More important is IPv6 traffic needs to travel to IPv4 servers.

  • This is done through IPv6 tunnels.

IPv6 tunnels

Servers take incoming IPv6 traffic and encapsulate it within traditional IPv4 datagram.

  • They consist of IPv6 tunnel servers on either end of a connection. These IPv6 tunnel servers take incoming IPv6 traffic and encapsulate it within traditional IPv4 datagrams. This is then delivered across the IPv4 Internet space, where it’s received by another IPv6 tunnel server. That server performs the de-encapsulation and passes the IPv6 traffic further along in the network.

    IPv6 tunneling IPv6 tunneling

IPv6 tunnel broker

Companies that provide IPv6 tunneling endpoints for you, so you don’t have to introduce additional equipment to your network.

Oct 6, 2022

Subsections of Operating Systems and You

Navigating the System

Basic Commands

In this, we’ll learn about:

  • Windows
    • GUI (Graphical User Interface)
    • CLI (Command Line Interface)
  • Linux
    • Command
    • Shell

    The CLI interpreter on Linux is called a shell, and the language that we’ll use to interact with this shell is called Bash.

List Directories in a GUI

  • On Windows, filesystems are assigned to drive letters, which look like C:, or D:, or X:.
  • The parent/root directory of C: would be written **C:*, and the root directory of X: would be written **X:*.
  • Subdirectories are separated by ****.

Windows List Directories in CLI

  • To list contents of C drive

    ls C:\
    
  • To get help for specific command

    Get-Help <command name>
    
    • In case of, ls command,
    Get-Help ls
    
    • To get more detailed help
    Get-Help ls-full
    
  • To see hidden files in a directory

    ls -Force C:\
    

Linux: List Directories

  • To list the contents of root directory

    ls /
    
    • /bin: essential binaries for program
    • /etc: system configuration file
    • /home: Where user files and configs live
    • /proc: Contain information of currently running processes
    • /usr: Meant for user installed software
    • /var: Stores system logs and anything that constantly changing
  • ls command has very useful flags too.

  • To see available flags for ls

    ls --help
    
  • man shows the manual pages.

    man <command>
    
  • To see hidden files, and long listing

    ls -al
    
  • You can hide a file by prepending a . in the start of the filename.

Flags

Similar to Windows command parameters, a flag is a way to specify additional options for a command.

Windows: Changing Directories in a GUI

Absolute path

An absolute path is one that starts from the main directory.

Relative path

A Relative path is the path from your current directory.

Windows: Changing Directories in the CLI

  • To know where you are in the folder

    pwd
    
  • To change the directory you’re in

    cd <path\to\the\directory>
    
  • To go one level up

    cd ..
    
  • Get to the $HOME directory

    cd ~
    

Windows: Making Directories in the & CLI

  • To make a new directory

    mkdir <directory name>
    
  • To make a directory with spaces in its name

    mkdir 'directory name'
    mkdir directory` name
    

Linux: Making Directories in Bash

  • To make a directory with spaces in its name

    mkdir directory\ name
    mkdir 'directory name'
    

Windows: Command History

  • To see the history of previous commands

    history
    
  • To reverse-search through history, shortcut is <ctrl+r>

  • To clean PowerShell palette

    clear
    

Windows: Copying Files & Directories

  • To copy a file

    cp <Path\to\the\file\to\be\copied> <Path\to\the\directory\of\copying> 
    
    • To copy multiple file at once, Wildcard is used

      cp *.<common pattern> <path\to\where\copied>
      
  • To copy a directory and its content

    cp <directory name> <Path\to\where\copied> -Recurse -Verbose
    

Wildcard

A character that’s used to help select files based on a certain pattern.

Linux: Copying Files & Directories

  • To copy a directory

    cp <Directory/to/be/copied> <Path/where/to/be/copied>
    

File and Text Manipulation

Windows: Display File Contents

  • To view the file contents

    cat <File Name>
    
  • To view the file contents, one page at a time

    more <File Name>
    
  • To see only part of the file contents

    cat <File Name> -Head <Number of Lines>
    
  • To see only part of the file contents from the tail

    cat <File Name> -Tail <Number of Lines>
    

Linux: Display File Contents

  • To see file’s contents, interactively

    less <File Name>
    
  • more has been abandoned in favor of more useful less command on Linux.

  • To see only part of a file’s contents, head is used, which by default only shows first 10 lines

    head <File Name>
    
  • To see only part of file’s contents, tail is used, which by default only shows last 10 lines

    tail <File Name>
    

Windows: Modifying Text Files

  • To modify file’s contents from a CLI

    start notepad++ <File Name>
    

Windows PowerShell

  • PowerShell is a powerful and complex command line language.

  • To list directories, the real PowerShell command is can be found by:

    Get-Alias ls
    

so, to list directories

Get-ChildItem <path\to\directory>
  • Some old but not powerful as PowerShell, cmd.exe commands are

    cmd.exe cmd.exe

Windows: Searching within Files

  • In GUI, Indexing Options applications are used.

  • In command-line, search is done as:

    Select-String <Search String> <path\to\the\file>
    
  • To search in multiple files at once

    Select-String <Search String> *.<file extension name>
    

Windows: Searching within Directories

  • -Filter parameter is used with ls so search for particular files in a directory.

    • The -Filter parameter will filter the results for file names that match a pattern.
    ls <path\to\the\file> -Recurse -Filter *.exe
    
    • The asterisk means match anything, and the .exe is the file extension for executable files in Windows.

Linux: Searching within Files

  • To search in files

    grep <Search String> <path/to/the/file>
    
  • To search through multiple files at once

    grep <Search String> *.txt
    

Windows: Input, Output, and the Pipeline

echo hello_word > hello.py
  • The echo is an alias for PowerShell command Write-Output.

  • Every Windows process and every PowerShell command can take input and can produce output. To do this, we use something called I/O streams or input output streams.

  • I/O streams are

    • stdin
    • stdout
    • stderr
  • The symbol > is something we call a Redirector operator that let us change where we want our stdout to go.

  • The symbol » is used to not create a new file, just append the stdout

    echo 'Hello Planet' >> hello.py
    
  • | Pipe operator is used to redirect the stdout of one command to stdin of another command.

    cat hello.py | Select-String planet
    
  • To put new stdout to a new file.

    cat hello.py | Select-String pla > planet.txt
    
  • If we don’t want to see error in CLI, to get them in a file

    rm secure_file 2> error.txt
    
    • All the output streams are numbered, 1 is for stdout and 2 for stderr
  • If we don’t care about error messages and don’t want to save them in a file, we can redirect them to a null variable (a black hole for stderr)

    rm secure_file 2> $null
    

Linux: Input, Output, and the Pipeline

  • On Linux, stdin operator can be used via symbol <.

    cat < SomeFile.py
    
    • Here we are using < operator for file input instead of keyboard input.
  • To redirect error message to a file

    ls /dir/fake_dir 2> error_output.txt
    
  • To filter out error message completely without saving

    ls /dir/fake_dir 2> /dev/null
    

Windows and Linux Advanced Navigation

  • For more advance navigation, regex is used.

Regular expression (Regex)

Used to help you do advance pattern-based selections.

Users and Permissions

Users and Groups

User, Administrators, and Groups

  • Two different types of users
    • Standard user
    • Admin
  • Users are put into different groups, according to level of permissions and ability to do certain tasks.

1) Standard user

One who is given access to a machine but has restricted access to do things like install software or change certain settings.

2) Administrator (Admin)

A user that has complete control over a machine.

Windows: View User and Group Information

  • To view user and groups information, Computer management application is used.
    • In an Enterprise environment, you can manage multiple machines in something called a domain.
  • You can manage admin tasks while being logged in as a normal user. This is done through User Access Control (UAC) prompt.

Windows domain

A network of computers, users, files, etc. that are added to a central database.

User Access Control (UAC)

A feature on Windows that prevents unauthorized changes to a system.

Windows: View User and Group Information using CLI

  • To check all users on the system and either admin access enabled or not.

    Get-LocalUser
  • To get all the groups present on a local machine

    Get-LocalGroup
  • To check members of an individual group

    Get-LocalGroupMember Administrator

Linux: Users, Superuser and Beyond

  • To see all groups, who are their members

    cat /etc/group
    • It shows information something like this
    sudo:x:27:user1, user2, user3
    
    • First field is a group name
    • 2nd is password but redacted
    • 3rd is a group id
    • 4th is a list of users in a group
      • To view all users on a machine
cat /etc/passwd
  • Most of these accounts are system processes running the computer.

Windows: Passwords

  • An admin shouldn’t know the password of the user using it.

  • But as an admin to manage users passwords, computer management application is used.

  • To change user’s password from CLI

    net user <username> <password>
  • To interactively change the password

    net user <username> *
  • To force user itself to change its password on next logon

    net user <username> /logonpasswordchg:yes

Linux: Passwords

  • To change a password on Linux

    sudo passwd <username>
  • To force a user to change his/her password

    sudo passwd -e <username>

Windows: Adding and Removing Users

  • To add users

    net user <username> * /add
  • To add a new user and forcing him/her to change its password on new logon

    net user <username> password /add /logonpasswordchg:yes
  • To remove a local user

    net user <username> /del

    OR

    Remove-LocalUser <username>

Linux: Adding and Removing Users

  • To add a user

    sudo useradd <username>
  • To remove a user

    sudo userdel <username>

Permissions

Windows: File Permissions

On Windows, files and directory permissions assigned using Access Control Lists or ACLs. Specifically, we’re going to be working with Discretionary Access Control Lists or DACLs.

  • Windows files and folders can also have System Access Control Lists or SACLs assigned to them.

    • SACLs are used to tell Windows that it should use an event log to make a note of every time someone accesses a file or folder.
  • Windows allow certain permissions to be set for files and folders.

    • Read

    The Read permission lets you see that a file exists, and allow you to read its contents. It also lets you read the files and directories in a directory.

    • Read & Execute

    The Read & Execute permission lets you read files, and if the file is an executable, you can run the file. Read & Execute includes Read, so if you select Read & Execute, Read will be automatically selected.

    • List folder contents

    List folder contents is an alias for Read & Execute on a directory. Checking one will check the other. It means that you can read and execute files in that directory.

    • Write

    The Write permission lets you make changes to a file. It might be surprising to you, but you can have write access to a file without having read permission to that file!

    • The Write permission also lets you create subdirectories, and write to files in the directory.
    • Modify

    The Modify permission is an umbrella permission that includes read, execute, and write.

    • Full control

    A user or group with full control can do anything they want to the file! It includes all the permissions to Modify, and adds the ability to take ownership of a file and change its ALCs

  • To view file permissions in a CLI, Improved change ACLs command icacls is used

    • To view more options and their explanation
    icacls /? #icacls is a old dos command
    icacls <filepath>

Linux: File Permissions

  • There are three different permissions you can have on Linux

    • Read – This allows someone to read the contents of a file or folder.
    • Write – This allows someone to write information to a file or folder.
    • Execute – This allows someone to execute a program.
  • To see file permissions

    ls -l <filepath>

Windows: Modifying Permissions

  • To modify permissions

    icacls <filepath> /grant 'Everyone:(OI)(CI)(R)'
  • Everyone gives permissions to literally everyone of the computer including guest users, to avoid this

    icacls <filepath> /grant 'Authenticated Users:(OI)(CI)(R)'
  • To remove permissions to everyone group

    icacls <filepath> /remove Everyone
  • To see the given permissions

    icacls <filepath>

Guest users

This is a special type of user that’s allowed to use the computer without a password. Guest users are disabled by default. You might enable them in very specific situations.

Linux: Modifying Permissions

  • The permissions are changed by chmod command

    • The owner, which is denoted by a “u”

    • The group the file belongs to, which is denoted a “g”

    • Or other users, which is denoted by an “o”

  • To change execute permission

    chmod u+x <filepath>
    chmod u-x <filepath>
  • To add/remove multiple permissions to file

    chmod u+rx <filepath>
  • To change permissions for owner, the group, and others

    chmod ugo+r <filepath>
  • This format of changing permissions is called symbolic format.

  • Other method is changing permissions numerically, which is faster.

  • The numerical equivalent of rwx is:

    • 4 for read or r
    • 2 for write or w
    • 1 for execute or x
  • To change permissions numerically

    chmod 745 <filepath>
    • 1st is for user
    • 2nd is for group
    • 3rd is for other
  • To change ownership of a file

    sudo chown <username> <filepath>
  • To change group of a file

    sudo chgrp <username> <filepath>

Windows: Special Permissions

  • The permissions we looked so far are called simple permissions.

Simple Permissions

Simple permissions are actually sets of special, or specific permissions.

  • When you set the Read permission on a file, you’re actually setting multiple special permissions.

  • To see special permissions, icacls command is used

    icacls <filepath>

Linux: SetUID, SetGID, Sticky Bit

  • SetUID is a special permission, use to allow a file to be run as the owner of the file.

  • To apply SetUID

    sudo chmod u+s <filepath>
  • The numerical value for SetUID is 4

    sudo chmod 4755 <filepath>
  • SetGID is a special permission which allow a user to run a particular file in a group member though the user isn’t part of that group.

    sudo chmod g+s <filepath>
  • The numerical value for SetGID is 2.

    sudo chmod 2755 <filepath>
  • Sticky Bit is a special permission, use to allow anyone to write to a file or folder but can’t delete it.

    sudo chmod +t <filepath>
  • The numerical value for Sticky bit is 1.

    sudo chmod 1755 <filepath>

Package and Software Management

Software Distribution

Windows: Software Packages

  • On Windows, software is usually packaged in a .exe executable file.
  • Software is packaged according to Microsoft Portable Executable or PE format.
  • Executable not only include install instructions but also things like text or computer code, images that the program might use, and potentially something called an MSI file.
  • For precise granular control over installation, you can use executable with a custom installer packaged in something like setup.exe.
  • On the other hand, .msi installer along with Windows installer program has some strict guidelines to be followed.
  • Windows store uses a package format called APPX.
  • To install an executable from CLI, type its name.

Executable file (.exe)

Contain instructions for a computer to execute when they’re run.

Microsoft install package (.msi)

Used to guide a program called the Windows Installer in the installation, maintenance, and removal of programs on the Windows operating system.

Linux: Software Packages

  • Fedora use Red-Hat package manager package or (.RPM).

  • Debian uses .deb file.

  • To install a standalone .deb package

    sudo dpkg -i abc.deb
  • To remove package on Debian

    sudo dpkg -r abc.deb
  • To list .deb Packages

    dpkg -l

Mobile App Packages

  • Software is distributed as Mobile Applications or Apps.
  • Mobile phones use App stores for software installation
  • Enterprise App management allows companies to distribute their custom apps internally.
    • Enterprise Apps are managed through Mobile Device Management or (MDM) service.
  • Another way to install apps is through side-loading
  • Apps stored their files to storage assigned to them called cache.
    • Clearing the cache will remove all changes to the settings, and sign out of any accounts that the app was signed-into.
    • Clearing the cache might not be the first step in application troubleshooting, but it is handy in desperate times.

App Stores

A central, managed marketplace for app developers to publish and sell mobile apps.

Side-loading

Where you install mobile apps directly, without using an app store.

  • Mobile apps are standalone software packages, so they contain all their dependencies.

  • To compress files from CLI

    Compress-Archive -Path <filepath: files to be compressed> <filepath: Where to save compressed file>

Windows: Archives

  • 7-zip is a popular Windows tools for archives management.

Archive

Comprised of one or more files that’s compressed into a single file.

  • Popular archive types are .tar, .zip, .rar.

Package archives

The core or source software files that are compressed into one file.

Linux: Archives

  • p7zip is the Linux version of 7-zip.

    • To extract a file, use the command 7z and the flag e for extract and then the file you want to extract.
    7z e <filepath>

Windows: Package Dependencies

  • A game might depend on rendering library for graphic and physics engine for correct movements.
  • On Windows, these shared libraries are called Dynamic Link Libraries or DLL.
    • A useful feature of DLL is, one DLL can be used by ‘many’ different programs.
  • In the past, when one DLL gets updated, some programs dependent on it, would become unusable, as they didn’t know how to update the DLL for next version number.
  • On modern systems, more shared libraries and resources on Windows are managed by something called side-by-side assemblies or SxS
    • Most of these shared libraries are stored in C:\Windows\WinSxS
    • If an application needs to use a shared library, this is declared in a file called manifest.
    • SxS stores multiple versions of DLLs, so programs dependent on them remain functioning.
    • Using a cmdlet Find-Package, can locate software, along with its dependencies, right from the command line.

Having Dependencies

Counting on other pieces of software to make an application work, since one bit of code depends on another, in order to work.

Library

A way to package a bunch of useful code that someone else wrote.

cmdlet

A name given to Windows PowerShell commands

Linux: Package Dependencies

  • dpkg on Debian and Debian-based Linux systems doesn’t handle dependencies automatically
  • So, package managers come to your rescue for automatic dependency resolution.

Package managers

Come with the works to make package installation and removal easier, including installing package dependencies.

Package Managers

Windows: Package Manager

“Makes sure that the process of software installation, removal, update, and dependency management is as easy and automatic as possible.”

  • Chocolatey is a third party package manager for Windows.

  • NuGet is another third party package manager for Windows.

    • Based on Windows PowerShell
    • Configuration management tools like SCCM & puppet integrate with Chocolatey.
  • To add Chocolatey as a package source

    Register-PackageSource -Name chocolatey -ProvideName Chocolatey -Location https://chocolatey.org/api/v2

    To verify package source

    Get-PackageSource

    To find a package

    Find-Package sysinternals -IncludeDependencies

    To actually install this package

    Install-Package -Name sysinternals

    To verify installation

    Get-Package -name sysinternals

    To uninstall a package

    Uninstall-Package -Name sysinternals

Linux: Package Manager Apt

  • apt or Advanced Package Tool
  • Ubuntu and Ubuntu based distros use apt.
  • APT comes with default distro software repo linked.
  • To add other repos, we add them through /etc/apt/sources.list
  • Ubuntu and based-distros have additional repos in the form of PPAs
    • PPAs are not as vetted by distros, so use them careful, or you might get infected, or break your installation with defected programs.

Personal Package Archive (PPA)

A Personal Package Archive or PPA is a software repo for uploading source packages to be built and published as an Advanced Packaging Tool (APT) repo by Launchpad.

What’s happening in the background?

Windows: Underneath the Hood

  • When click an .exe to install, next step depends on the developer, how he, setups the installation instructions for his/her program.
  • If an EXE contains code for a custom installation that doesn’t use the Windows installer system, then the details of what happens under the hood will be mostly unclear. As the most Windows’ software are closed source packages.
  • So, you can’t really see what instructions are given, but tools like Process Monitoring provided by Microsoft CIS internal toolkit.
    • It will show any activity the installation executable is taking, like the files it writes and any process activity it performs.
  • In case of MSI files, though code is closed source, but developers need to stick to strict guidelines.
    • Orca tool lets you examine, create and edit MSI files, it’s part of Windows SDK.

Linux: Underneath the Hood

  • Installations are clearer than Windows due to open nature of the OS
  • Software usually consists of setup script, actual app files and README.
  • Most devices you’ve got on your computer will be groped together according to some broad categories by Windows.
  • This grouping typically happens automatically when you plug in a new device, Plug&Play or PnP system.
  • When a new device plugs-in, Windows asks for its hardware ID.
  • When it gets the right hardware ID, it searches for its drivers in some known locations, starting with a local list of well-known drivers. Then goes on to Windows Update or the driver store.
  • Other times devices comes with custom drivers.

Device Software Management

Windows: Devices and Drivers

  • Device Manager console is used in GUI, for devices and drivers management.
  • You can open it by searching devmgmt.msc from the search console, or right-click on This PC and click Device Manager.

Driver

Used to help our hardware devices interact with our OS.

Linux: Devices and Drivers

  • On Linux, everything is considered a file, even the hardware devices.
  • When a new device is connected, a file is created in the /dev/ directory.
  • There are lots of devices in /dev/ directory, but not all of them are physical devices.
  • The more common one in there are character devices and block devices.
  • As in long ls listing - in the front represents file, and d represents directory, in /dev/, c shows block devices, and b represents block devices.
  • Device drivers on Linux are easy at the same time difficult to install.
    • Linux kernel is monolithic software, that contains drivers for popular devices as well.
    • The devices that don’t have driver backed in the kernel, will have drivers in the form of kernel modules.

Character Devices

Like a keyboard or a mouse, transmit data character by character.

Block Devices

Like USB drives, hard drives and CDROMs, transfer blocks of data; a data block is just a unit of data storage.

Pseudo Devices

Device nodes on Unix-like OSs, that don’t necessarily have to correspond to physical devices. I.e. /dev/null, /dev/zero, /dev/full etc.

Windows: Operating System Updates

  • When your OS vendor discovers a security hole in a system, they prepare a security patch.
  • As an IT specialist, it’s important to keep your system up-to-date with security and other patches, though feature updates can be delayed for reasons.
  • The Windows Update Client service runs in the background and download and install security patches and updates.

Security Patch

Software that’s meant to fix up a security hole.

Linux: Operating System Updates

  • For Ubuntu based distros

    sudo apt update && sudo apt upgrade
  • To be on the latest security patches, you need to run and update newer kernels.

    To see your kernel version

    uname -r

    -r is a flag, to know kernel release, to know kernel version you have.

Filesystems

Filesystem Types

Review of Filesystems

  • FAT32 reading and writing data to Windows, Linux, and macOS

    • Shortcomings are, max file size supported is 4 GB
    • Max file system 32 GB

    USB on Linux and Windows USB on Linux and Windows

    USB not Working on Windows USB not Working on Windows

Disk Anatomy

  • A storage device can be divided into partitions
  • You can dual-boot Windows and Linux, with disk partitions dedicated for each.
  • Other component is Partition table
    • Two main Partition tables are used

      • Master Boot Record (MBR)

      MBR MBR

      • GUID Partition Table (GPT)

      GPT GPT

    • For new booting standard UEFI, you need GPT table.

Partition

The piece of a disk that you can manage.

Partition Table

Tells the OS how the disk is partitioned.

Windows: Partitioning and Formatting a Filesystem

  • Windows ships with a great tool, Disk Management Utility.
  • To manage disks from CLI, a tool called Diskpart is used.

Diskpart

Typing Diskpart in the CLI, will open an interactive shell.

Next, type list disk to list out all the storage devices on your computer

Then to select a disk:

select disk <Disk ID>

After to wipe all volumes and files from the disk, type clean in the interactive shell.

To create blank partition in a disk

create partition primary

Then, to select the newly created partition

select partition 1

To mark it as active, simply type active.

To format the disk with filesystem:

format FS=NTFS label=<Label the Disk> quick

Cluster

Cluster (allocation unit size) is the minimum amount of space a file can take up in a volume or drive.

Cluster size

Cluster size is the smallest division of storage possible in a drive. Cluster size is important because a file will take up the entire size of the cluster, regardless of how much space it actually requires in the cluster.

  • For example, if the cluster size is 4kb (the default size for many formats and sizes) and the file you’re trying to store is 4.1kb, that file will take up 2 clusters. This means that the drive has effectively lost 3.9 Kb of space for use on a single file.

    Cluster size Cluster size

Volume

A single accessible storage area with a single file system; this can be across a single disk or multiple.

Partition

A logical division of a hard disk that can create unique spaces on a single drive. Generally used for allowing multiple operating systems.

Windows: Mounting and Unmounting a Filesystem

  • When you plug a USB drive, it shows up in the list of your devices, and you can start using it right away.
  • When done using, safely eject it.

Mounting

Making something accessible to the computer, like filesystem or a hard disk.

Linux: Disk Partitioning and Formatting a Filesystem

  • There are different disk partitioning CLI tools
    • parted Can be used in both interactive and in command line.

Parted

To list the devices

sudo parted -l

To run parted in interactive mode on some disk

sudo parted /dev/sdX

You can use help to see different commands used in the interactive mode.

To format the partition with filesystem using mkfs

sudo mkfs -t ext4 /dev/sdXx

Linux: Mounting and Unmounting a Filesystem

To mount the previously formatted disk

sudo mount /dev/sdXx /my_disk/

To unmount the disk

sudo umount /dev/sdXx

File System table (fstab)

To permanently mount a disk, we need to make changes in a fstab file.

The fstab configuration table consists of six columns containing the following parameters:

  • Device name or UUID (Universally Unique ID)
  • Mount Point: Location for mounting the device
  • Filesystem Type
  • Options : list of mounting options in use, delimited by commas.
  • Backup operation of dump – this is an outdated method for making device or partition backups and command dumps. It should not be used. In the past, this column contained a binary code that signified:
    • 0 = turns off backups
    • 1 = turns on backups
  • Filesystem check (fsck) order or Pass – The order in which the mounted device should be checked by the fsck utility:
    • 0 = fsck should not run a check on the filesystem
    • 1 = mounted device is the root file system and should be checked by the fsck command first.
    • 2 = mounted device is a disk partition, which should be checked by fsck command after the root file system.

Example of an fstab table:

FSTAB FSTAB

To get a UUID of a disk

sudo blkid

Fstab Options Fstab Options

Windows: Swap

  • Windows use Memory Manager to handle virtual memory.
  • On Windows, pages saved to disk are stored in a special hidden file on the root partition of a volume called pagefile.sys
  • Windows provides the way to modify size, number, and location of paging files through a control panel applet called System Properties.

Virtual memory

How our OS provides the physical memory available in our computer (like RAM) to the applications that run on the computer.

Linux: Swap

  • You can make swap, with tools like fdisk, parted, gparted etc.
  • To make it auto-mount on system start, add its entry in the fstab file.

Swap space

On Linux, the dedicated area of the hard drive used for virtual memory.

Windows: Files

  • NTFS uses Master File Table or MFT to represent the files.

  • Every file on the system has at least one entry on the MFT

  • Shortcut is an MFT entry which takes us to the specific location of a file, which it is a shortcut of.

  • Other methods to link to files are:

    • Symbolic Links: OS treats Symbolic links just like the files themselves

    To create a symbolic link:

    mklink <Symlink Name> <Original File Name> 
    • Hard Links: When you create a hard link in NTFS, an entry is added to the MFT that points to the linked file record number, not the name of the file. This means the file name of the target can change, and the hard link will still point to it.

    To create a hard link:

    mklink /H <Hard link Name> <Original File Name>

    Master File Table Master File Table

File metadata

All the data, other than the file contents.

Master File Table (MFT)

The NTFS file system contains a file called the master file table or MFT, There is at least one entry in the MFT for every file on an NTFS file system volume, including the MFT itself.

  • All information about a file, including its size, time and date stamps, permissions, and data content, is stored either in the MFT table, or in space outside the MFT that describe by MFT entries.
  • As files are added to an NTFS file system volume, more entries are added to the MFT and the MFT increases in size. When files are deleted from an NTFS file system volume, their MFT entries are marked as free and may be reused.

Linux: Files

  • In Linux, metadata and files organize into a structure called an inode.

  • Inode doesn’t store filename and the file data.

  • We store inodes in an inode table, and they help us manage the files on our file system.

  • Shortcut on Linux, referred to as Softlink.

    Linux file links Linux file links

    To create a soft link:

    ln -s <File Name> <Softlink Name>

    To create a hard link:

    ln <File Name> <Hardlink Name>
  • If you move a file, all the Softlinks, will be broken

Windows: Disk Usage

  • To check disk usage, open up, computer management utility.

  • Disk cleanup is done through CleanManager.exe, to clear out, cache, log file, temporary files, and old file etc.

  • Another disk health feature is Defragmentation.

    • This beneficial for spinning hard drives, and less of important for SSDs.
    • Defragmentation in spinning drives is handled by task schedulers on Windows automatically, and you don’t need to worry about manual intervention most of the time.
    • To start manual defragmentation, start Disk defragmenter tool.
  • For Solid state drives, the system can use the Trim feature to reclaim unused space.

  • For CLI, disk cleanup du tool is used

    DISK USAGE CLI DISK USAGE CLI

Defragmentation

The idea behind disk defragmentation is to take all the files stored on a given disk, and reorganize them into neighboring locations.

Linux: Disk Usage

To see disk usage:

du -h

du List file sizes of current directory if no option is specified.

To see free disk space:

df -h
  • Linux generally does a good job of avoiding fragmentation, more than Windows.

Windows: File-system Repair

  • Ejecting a USB drive is necessary, as the file copying/moving might still be running in the background, even after successful copy/move prompt.

  • When we read or write something to a drive, we actually put it into a buffer, or cache, first.

  • If you don’t give enough time for data to be moved away from buffer, you may experience a Data corruption.

  • Power outage, system failure, or some bug in the OS or the program, can also cause data corruption.

  • NTFS has some advanced feature in the form of Data journaling, which avoid data corruption or even attempts data recovery in case of failure.

  • Minor errors and data corruptions are self healed by NTFS.

    To check self-heal status:

    fsutill repair query C:

    In case of catastrophic failure, run chkdsk tool in PowerShell as an admin, by default it will run in read-only mode. So it will only report the error, and not fix it.

    chkdsk

    To fix the errors

    chkdsk /F <Drive Path>

    Most of the time, you won’t need to run chkdsk manually, and OS will handle it for you running it, and then fixing the errors, by looking the at the NTFS Journaling log.

Data buffer

A region of RAM that’s used to temporarily store data while it’s being moved around.

Linux: File-system Repair

Run fsck on unmounted drive, otherwise it will damage it.

sudo fsck /dev/sdX

On some systems, fsck runs automatically on boot.

Operating Systems in Practice

Remote Access

Remote Connection and SSH

  • The most popular SSH client on Linux is **OpenSSH program.
  • The most popular SSH program on Windows is PuTTY.
  • Another way to connect to a remote machine is VPN.
  • On Linux, GUI remote connection can be established through programs like RealVNC.
  • On MAC, remote GUI connections are possible via Microsoft RDP on Mac.

Remote Connection

Allows us to manage multiple machines from anywhere in the world.

Secure shell (SSH)

A protocol implemented by other programs to securely access one computer from another.

  • We can authenticate via password in SSH.
  • But more secure way is the use of SSH keys. An SSH key is a pair of two keys:
    • Private
    • Public

Virtual private network (VPN)

Allows you to connect to a private network, like your work network, over the Internet.

Remote Connections on Windows

  • Microsoft has built Remote Desktop Protocol or RDP for GUI remote connections.
    • A client named Microsoft Terminal Services Client or mtsc.exe is used for remote RDP connections.

PuTTY

A free, open source software that you can use to make remote connections through several network protocols, including SSH.

To connect via PuTTY in a CLI:

putty.exe -ssh username@ip_address <Port Number> # Port number is 22 by default for SSH connections

To enable remote connection on a pc go-to:

MY PC > Properties > Remote Settings

Remote Connection File Transfer

Secure copy (SCP)

A command you can use on Linux to copy files between computers on a network.

To copy file from local computer to remote:

scp <filepath> username@ip_address:location

Remote Connection File Transfer on Windows

  • PuTTY comes with PuTTY Secure Copy Client or pscp.exe.

    pscp.exe <filepath> username@ip_address:location
  • To transfer files via PuTTY is a little time-consuming, so Windows came up with the concept of ShareFolders.

    To share folders via CLI:

    net share <ShareName>=<drive>:<DirectoryPath> /grant:everyone,full
    

    To list currently shared folders on your computer:

    net share
    

Virtualization

Virtual Machines

  • To manage virtual instances, we can use FOSS program Virtual Box.

Virtual Instance

A single virtual machine.

Logging

System Monitoring

Log

A log is a system diary of events happening on the system.

Logging

The act of creating log events.

The Windows Event Viewer

It stores all the events happening on a Windows computer.

Linux logs

  • The logs on Linux are stored in /var/log directory.
  • One log file that pretty much everything on the system is /var/log/syslog
  • The utility logrotate is used for log cleanup by the system.
  • Centralized logging is used for parsing multiple systems log files in a single place.

Working with Logs

The logs are written in a very standard way, so we don’t need to go through each and every bit of them to troubleshoot problems, all you need to do is look for specific things.

  • Logs can be searched with keywords like, error.
  • Name of the troublesome program.
  • The troubleshooting technique is viewing logs in the real time, to find the out the specific errors causing the program to fail.

To see real-time logs on Linux:

tail -f /var/log/syslog

Operating System Deployment

Imaging Software

  • It is extremely cumbersome to install OSs on new machines via USB drive formatted with OS.
  • In IT world, tools are used to format a machine with an image of another machine, which includes everything, from the OS to the settings.

Operating Systems Deployment Methods

  • Disk cloning tools are used to obtain an image of a computer OS and settings. Some tools are:

    • Clonezilla (FOSS)
    • Symantec Ghost (Commercial)
  • Different disk cloning tools offer different methods to clone systems

    • Disk-to-disk cloning

    Let’s use Linux CLI tool dd to copy files from a disk to make a clone.

    To copy from a USB drive, first unmount it:

    sudo umount /dev/sdX

    Then run dd:

    sudo dd if=/dev/sdX of=~/Desktop/my_usb_image.img bs=100M

Mobile Device Resetting and Imaging

  • Factory resetting a device clean all user data and apps, and return the device to its original factory condition.
    • Watch out for expansion storage, like SD cards, as factory reset may format them too.
    • You will require primary account credentials to factory reset, this prevents misuse of stolen devices.
      • Re-flash a factory software can be done through computer.

OS Process Management

Life of a process

Program vs. Process Revisited

Programs

The applications that we can run, like the Chrome web browser.

Processes

Programs that are running.

  • When you open a program, a process is started, and it gets the process ID or PID.
  • Background or Daemon Processes are those who are always running in the background.

Windows: Process Creation and Termination

  • When Windows boots up or starts, the first non-kernel user mode that starts is the Session Manager Subsystem or smss.exe.

    • It kicks start some processes before login
    • Then smss.exe starts winlogon.exe along with client/server runtime subsystem or csrss.exe, which handles GUI and CLI.
    • Unlike Linux, Windows’ processes can run own their own in their respective Environment created by smss.exe independent of their parent process.
  • To terminate a process from CLI, taskkill utility is used, which can find and halt a process.

    • taskkill Uses PID to identify the process running.

    To kill notepad with taskkill from CLI:

    taskkill /pid 5856
    

    To forcefully kill a rogue process:

    taskkill /F /PID <PID>
    

Linux: Process Creation and Termination

  • On Linux, process has parent child relationship.
  • So every process that runs on the system has some parent process.
  • init Is the parent process for the kernel

INIT Process

When you start up your computer, the kernel creates a process called init, which has a PID of 1.

Managing Processes

Windows: Reading Process Information

  • Task Manager or taskmgr.exe is one way of obtaining processes information on Windows.

    To show all running processes in CLI:

    tasklist
    

    The PowerShell command for the same:

    Get-Process

Linux: Reading Process Information

To see process running on Linux:

ps -x

The following STAT for ps -x command are used to show processes current status

  • R: running
  • T: stopped
  • S interruptible sleep

To see full list of running processes, even by other users run:

ps -ef #'f' for full
  • UID: User ID
  • PID: Process ID
  • PPID: Parent Process ID
  • C: Number of children processes
  • STIME: Start Time of Process
  • TTY: Terminal associated with the process
  • TIME: Total CPU time process is taking up
  • CMD: Name of the command running

Everything in a Linux is a file, even the processes. So we can view them in /proc.

ls -l /proc

Windows: Signals

  • If we want to close an unresponsive process, we use signals.

  • The most common is SIGINT or signal interrupt. You can send this signal to a running process with the CTRL+C key combination.

    Windows Signals Windows Signals

Signal

A way to tell a process that something’s just happened.

Linux: Signals

There are lots of signals on Linux, starting with SIG. I.e. SIGTERM, SIGINT** etc.

Windows: Managing Processes

  • To restart or pause a process and to do even much more, Process Explorer tool is used.

Process Explorer

A utility, Microsoft created to let IT Support Specialists, system admins and other users to look at running processes.

Linux: Managing Processes

  • To terminate a process, kill command is used.

    • kill Without any parameters, sends SIGINT signal to the program/process to clean is running processes and close them properly

    To kill a process

    kill <PID>

    To send SIGKILL via kill command:

    kill -KILL <PID>

    -KILL Should the lost resort to stop a process, it doesn’t give time to the process for cleanup, it may cause more harm than good.

    To put process on pause instead of killing, SIGSTP or signal stop, is used

    kill -TSTP <PID>

    To resume from suspend:

    kill -CONT <PID>

Process Utilization

Windows: Resource Monitoring

  • Resource Monitoring tool is used.

  • To get resource monitoring from CLI

    Get-Process

    To get the three most resource heavy processes:

    Get-Process | Sort CPU -descending | Select -first 3 -Property ID,ProcessName,CPU

Linux: Resource Monitoring

top is a useful resource monitoring CLI tool:

top

Another useful CLI tool is uptime, which show info about the current time, how long your computer running, how many users are logged on, and what the load average of your machine is.

When ejecting a USB drive, you get the error “Device or resource busy” though none of the files on the USB drive is in use or opened anywhere, or so you think. Using the lsof lists open files and what processes are using them.

  • It is great for tracking down pesky processes that are holding open files.

Subsections of SysAmin and IT Infrastructure Services

What is System Administration?

System Administration

The field in IT that’s responsible for maintaining reliable computer systems in a multi-user environment.

What is System Administration?

IT Infrastructure

IT Infrastructure encompasses the software, the hardware, network, services required for an organization to operate in an enterprise IT environment.

  • Sysadmins work in the background to make sure the company’s IT infrastructure is always up and running.

  • In large companies, sysadmin can be split-up into:

    • Network Administrators

    • Database Administrators

    A Company X IT Infrastructure A Company X IT Infrastructure

Servers Revisited

  • Sysadmins, responsible for managing things like
    • Email
    • File storage
    • Running a website and more.
  • These services are stored on servers.

Server

Software or a machine that provides services to other software or machines.

Servers include:

  • Web server
  • Email server
  • SSH server

The servers can be of three of the most common types in terms of their space efficiency:

  • Tower Servers
  • Rack Servers
  • Blade Servers

Types of Server Types of Server

KVM Switch

Keyboard, Video, and Mouse (KVM) is an industry standard hardware device for connecting directly to the servers.

A KVM Switch in Action A KVM Switch in Action

The Cloud

  • Cloud computing, a concept in which you can access your files, emails etc. from anywhere in the world.
  • Cloud is not a magical thing, rather hundreds and even thousands of computer act as a server to form a cloud, somewhere in the data center.

Data Center

A facility that stores hundreds, if not thousands, of servers.

System Administration

Organizational Policies

  • In a small company, it’s usually a Sysadmin’s responsibility to decide what computer policies to use.
  • In larger companies with hundreds of employees or more, this responsibility typically falls under the chief security officer or CSO.

User and Hardware Provisioning

In other responsibilities, Sysadmins have is managing users and hardware.

There are four stages of hardware life cycle

A Company Hardware Life-cycle A Company Hardware Life-cycle

Routine Maintenance

To affectively update a fleet of hardware, you set up a Batch update, once every month or so, depending upon company policies.

Good practice is to install security and critical bug fixes routinely.

Vendors

  • Not only do sysadmins in a small company work with using computers, they also have to deal with printers and phone, too.

  • Whether your employees have cellphones or desk phones, their phone lines have to be setup.

    Other hardware generally used in companies is:

    • Printers
    • Fax machines
    • Audio/video conferencing equipment
  • Sysadmins might be responsible for making sure printers are working or, if renting a commercial printer, they have to make sure that someone can be on site to fix it.

  • Setting up businesses account with vendors like **Hewlett Packard, Dell, Apple, etc. is usually beneficial since they generally offer discounts for businesses.

Troubleshooting and Managing Issues

While working in an organization, sysadmins have to constantly troubleshoot and fix issues on machines.

You need to prioritize the issues all the time.

In Case of Fire, Break Glass

As a sysadmin, you need to have some recovery plan for companies critical data and IT infrastructure in case of a critical failure.

Applying Changes

With Great Power Comes Great Responsibility

  • Avoid using administrator’s rights for tasks that don’t require them.
  • When using Admin rights, make sure to:
    • Respect the privacy of others.
    • Think before you type or do anything.
    • With great power comes great responsibility.
  • Documenting what you do is pretty important, for future you or someone else in the company to troubleshoot the same issues.
    • script Command used to record a group of commands as they’re being issued on Linux
    • Start-Transcript is an equivalent command on Windows
    • We can record the desktop with some GUI application.
  • Some commands are easy to rollback than others, so be careful of what you’re doing.

Script

In the case of script you can call it like this:

script session.log

This writes the contents of your session to the session.log file. When you want to stop, you can write exit or press CTRL+D.

The generated file will be in ANSI format, which includes the colors that were displayed on scree. In order to read them, you can use CLI tools like, ansi2txt or ansi2html to convert it to plain text or HTML respectively.

Start-Script

In the case of Start-Script, you can call it like this:

Start-Script -Path <drive>:\Transcript.txt # File name can be anything.

To stop recording, you need to call Stop-Transcript. The file created is a plain text file where the commands executed, and their outputs, are stored.

Rollback

Reverting to the previous state is called a rollback.

Never Test in Production

  • Before pushing any changes to Production, test them first on the Test environment to make sure, they are bug free.
  • If you’re in charge of an important service that you need to keep running during a configuration change, it’s recommended that you have a secondary or stand-by machine.
  • First apply the changes after testing them in the test environment, to the stand-by or secondary machine, then make that machine primary, and apply changes to the production machine.
  • For even bigger services, when you have lots of servers providing the service, you may want to have canaries. (canaries: small group of servers, if anything still doesn’t work, it shouldn’t take down the whole infrastructure.)

Production

The parts of the infrastructure where a certain service is executed and served to its users.

Test environment

A virtual machine running the same configuration as the production environment, but isn’t actually serving any users of the service.

Secondary or stand-by machine

This machine will be exactly the same as a production machine, but won’t receive any traffic from actual suers until you enable it to do so.

Assessing Risk

There is no point of having test/secondary servers, when nobody cares about the downtime.

So, it’s very important to assess the risk before going forward to invest in the backup plans.

In general, the more users your service reaches, the more you’ll want to ensure that changes aren’t disruptive.

The more important your service is to your company’s operations, the more you’ll work to keep the serve up

Fixing Things the Right Way

Reproduction case

Creating a roadmap to retrace the steps that led the user to an unexpected outcome.

When looking for a Reproduction case, there are three questions you need to look for:

  • What steps did you take to get to this point?
  • What is the unexpected or bad result?
  • What is the expected result?

After applying your fix, retrace the same steps that took you to the bad experience. If your fix worked, the expected experience should now take place.

Network and Infrastructure Services

Types of IT Infrastructure Services

IT Infrastructure IT Infrastructure

  • You can use Cloud Infrastructure Services or IaaS, if you don’t want to use own hardware. Some common IaaS providers are:

    • Amazon EC2
    • Linode
    • Windows Azure
    • Google Compute Engine (GCP)

    IaaS IaaS

  • Networks can be integrated into an IaaS

  • But in recent years, Network as a Service or NaaS has emerged.

    NaaS NaaS

  • Every company needs, some email service, word processor, ppt makers, CMS, etc. Software as a Service or SaaS can handle it for you.

    SaaS SaaS

  • Some companies have a product built around a software application. In this case, there are some things that software developers need to be able to code, build and shape their software.

    • First, specific applications have to be installed for their programming development environment.
    • Then, depending on the product, they might need a database to store information.
    • Finally, if they’re serving web content like a website, they might need to publish their product on the Internet.
    • For all in one solution, Platform as a Service or PaaS, is used.

    Paas Paas

  • The last IT Infrastructure service we’ll discuss is the management of users, access, and authorization. A directory service, centralizes your organization’s users and computers in one location so that you can add, update, and remove users and computers. Some popular directory services are:

    • Windows Active Directory (AD)
    • OpenLDAP
  • The directory services can be directly deployed in the cloud via Directory as a Service or DaaS.

Physical Infrastructure Services

Server Operating Systems

Regular operating systems that are optimized for server functionality.

  • Windows Server
  • Linux Servers
  • macOS Servers

Virtualization

Advantages:

  • Resource Utilization
  • Maintenance
  • Point of Failure
  • Cost
  • Connectivity

Limitations:

  • Performance

Network Services

FTP, SFTP, and TFTP

  • Network service commonly used in an organization is File transfer service.

    A Network File transfer service A Network File transfer service

PXE Boot (Preboot Execution)

It allows you to boot into software available on the network.

NTP (Network Time Protocol)

  • One of the oldest network protocols

  • You can use Public NTP server, or deploy your own if you have a fleet of hundreds and thousands of computers.

    NTP Server NTP Server

Network Support Services Revisited

  • There are a few services that are used internally in an IT enterprise environment, to improve employee productivity, privacy, and security.
    • Intranet
    • Proxy servers

Intranet

An internal network inside a company; accessible if you’re on a company network.

Proxy server

Acts as an intermediary between a company’s network and the Internet.

DNS

Maps human-understandable names to IP addresses.

DNS for Web Servers

  • First, we need a domain name.

    DNS Web Server Setup DNS Web Server Setup

  • We can also have own server, pointed to the domain name.

    DNS setup for private server DNS setup for private server

DNS for Internal Networks

  • The other reason we might want our own DNS servers is, so we can map our internal computers to IP addresses. That way, we can reference a computer by name, instead of IP address.
    • You can do this through hosts files.
    • Hosts, files allow us to map IP addresses to host name manually.
    • AD/OpenLDAP can be used to handle user and machine information in its central location. Once local DNS servers is set, it will automatically populate with machine to IP address mappings.
  • Option for Custom DNS server setup:
    • BIND1
    • PowerDNS2
    • DNSmasq3
    • Erl-DNS4

DHCP

  • When connecting to a network, you have two options for IP address assignment:
    • Static IP
    • DHCP assigned IP

Troubleshooting Network Services

Unable to Resolve a Hostname or Domain Name

  • To check if website accepts ping requests

    ping google.com
  • To verify if your DNS is giving you correct address for <google.com>

    nslookup google.com
  • Remember that when a DNS query is performed, your computer first checks the host file. To access a host file:

    sudo vim /etc/hosts

Managing System Services

What do Services Look Like in Action

  • We have looked at many services so far:
    • DHCP
    • DNS
    • NTP etc.
  • It’s important to understand how the programs that provide these services operate. So, that you can manage them and fix any problems that pop-up.
  • These programs as background processes, also known as daemons, or just services.
    • This means that the program doesn’t need to interact with a user through the graphical interface or the CLI to provide the necessary service.
  • Each service has one or more configuration file, you as Sysadmin will determine how to operate.
  • Some services offer interactive interface for configuration and changes, others may rely on the system’s infrastructure.
    • It means you need to edit the configuration file yourself.
    • You should also know how to start or stop a service.
  • Services are usually configured to start when the machine boots, so that if there’s a power outage or a similar event that causes the machine to reboot, you won’t need a system administrator to manually start the service.

Managing Services on Linux

  • To check if NTP daemon running on a system

    timedatectl
  • If there is a change of more than 120ms, the NTP daemon will not adjust for the change.

  • Stopping and starting the NTP service manually, will adjust the clock to correct settings.

  • Restart first stops and then start the service.

Managing Services on Windows

Here, for example, we will deal with Windows Update Service

To check the status of the service:

Get-Service wuauserv # Short hand for Windows Update Service

To get more information about the service:

Get-Service wuauserv | Format-List *

To stop service (Admin required):

Stop-Service wuauserv

To start a service (Admin required):

Start-Service wuauserv

To list all services running in the system:

Get-Service

**Same actions can be performed via Service Management Console in GUI.

Configuring Services on Linux

  • Most services are enabled as you install them, they are default services ship with the program itself.

  • The configuration files for the installed services are located in the /etc directory.

  • Here we will use the example of ftp client.

  • After installing ftp client vsftpd, it will start the service automatically.

  • We can start ftp client

    lftp localhost
    • It requires username and password to view contents
  • To enable anonymous ftp logins, we can edit the configuration file in /etc/vsftpd.conf

    • Then reload the ftp client
    sudo service vsftpd reload

lftp

A ftp client program that allows us to connect to a ftp server.

Reload

The service re-reads the configuration without having to stop and start.

Configuring Services on Windows

Here as an example we will use Internet Information Services, the feature offered by Windows to serve the web pages.

  • First, Turn the Feature ON and OFF in the settings to first enable it.

    To Feature ON/OFF from the CLI

    Install-WindowsFeature Web-WebServer,Web-Mgmt-Tools -IncludeAllSubFeature
  • Then we can add and remove IIS in the server manager, where IIS tab is now available after applying the above changes.

Configuring DNS with Dnsmasq

dnsmasq

A program that provides DNS, DHCP, TFTP, and PXE services in a simple package.

To install it:

sudo apt install dnsmasq

It immediately gets enabled with basic functionality, provides cache for DNS queries. This means you can make DNS request to it, and it’ll remember answers, so your machine doesn’t need to ask an external DNS server each time.

To check this functionality, we’ll use dig command, which lets us query DNS servers and see their answers:

dig www.example.com @localhost

Part after @ sign specifies which DNS server to use for query.

To see what’s happening in the background, we can run dnsmasq in the debug mode.

First stop the service:

sudo service dnsmasq stop

Now, run it in debug mode:

sudo dnsmasq -d -q

Now open a second console, and run dig command again, dnsmasq console running with flags -d (debug), q (query logging)

Configuring DHCP with Dnsmasq

  • A DHCP server is usually set up on a machine or a device that has a static IP address configured to the network interface which is being used to serve the DHCP queries. That interface is then connected to the physical network that you want to configure through DHCP, which can have any number of machines on it. In real life, the DHCP server and the DHCP client typically run on two separate machines.

  • For this example, we’ll use a single machine

  • In this machine, we have an interface called eth_srv, that’s configured to be the DHCP server’s interface.

  • We also have an interface called eth_cli, which is the interface that we’ll use to simulate a client requesting an address using DHCP. This interface doesn’t have an IP configured yet.

  • So, I’m going to type in

    ip address show eth_cli

    We can see that this interface doesn’t have an IPV4 address configured. We will change this by using our DHCP server. To do this, we need to provide additional configuration to dnsmasq. There are lots of things we can configure. We’re going to use a very basic set of options. Let’s look at the configuration file.

    cat DHCP config.

    The interface option tells dnsmasq that it should listen for DHCP queries on the eth_srv interface. The bind interfaces option tells it not to listen on any other interfaces for any kind of queries. This allows us to have more than one dnsmasq server running at the same time, each on its own interface. The domain option tells the clients, the networks’ domain name and will be used for querying host names. Then, we have two different DHCP options, which are additional information that will be transmitted to DHCP clients when the IP is assigned. In this case, we’re telling clients what to configure as a default gateway and which DNS servers should be used. There are a lot more options that we can set, but these two are the most common ones.

  • Finally, we configure the DHCP range. This is the range of IP addresses that the DHCP server can hand out. Depending on your specific setup, you may want to reserve some addresses in your network for machines that need to have a static address. If you don’t plan to do that, you can make the range larger, but make sure you don’t include the address of the DHCP server itself. The last value in the DHCP range Line is the length of the lease time for the IP address. In this case, it’s 12 hours, which means that once an address is assigned to a machine, it will be reserved for that machine for those 12 hours. If the lease expires without the client renewing it, the address can be assigned to a different machine.

    Let’s tell dnsmasq to start listening for queries using this config.

    sudo dnsmasq -d -q -c dhcp.conf

    We can see in the output that dnsmasq is listening for DHCP queries on the eth_srv interface with the options that we set in our configuration file. Now, let’s run a DHCP client on a second terminal.

    sudo dhclient -i eth_cli -v 

    We’re using dhclient which is a very common DHCP client on Linux. We’re telling it to run on the eth_cli interface, and we’re using the -v flag to see the full output of what’s happening.

    ip address show eth_cli

    Our eth_cli interface has successfully acquired an IP address.

References

Software and Platform Services

Platform services

Provide a platform for developers to code, build, and manage software applications.

Software Services

Services that employees use that allow them to do their daily job functions.

Major software services are

  • Communication services
  • Security services
  • User productivity services

Communication services

Some instant chat communication services are:

  • Internet Chat relay (IRC)

  • Paid for options: HipChat and Slack

  • IM protocols: XMPP or Extensible Messaging and Presence Protocol

Configuring Email Services

  • Domain name for company

    • Google Suite

    Some email protocols are:

    • POP3 or Post Office Protocol 3

    It first downloads the email from the server and onto your local device. It then deletes the email from the email server. If you want to retrieve your email through POP3, you can view it from one device.

    • IMAP or Internet Message Protocol

    Allows you to download emails from your email server onto multiple devices. It keeps your messages on the email server.

    • SMTP or Simple Mail Transfer Protocol

    It is an only protocol for sending emails.

    Email Services Email Services

Configuring User Productivity Services

When considering software licenses, it’s important to review the terms and agreements.

Software used has consumer won’t be the same as the software used as business.

Configuring Security Services

Different protocols for managing the security of the online services

Hyper Text Transfer Protocol Secure (HTTPS)

The secure version of HTTP, which makes sure the communication your web browser has with the website is secured through encryption.

  • Transport layer security protocol or TLS
  • Secure Socket layer or SSL (deprecated)

To enable TLS, so a website can use HTTP over TLS, you need to get an SSL certificate for Trust authority.

File Services

What are File Services?

File Services File Services

Network File Storage

  • Only few file systems are cross-compatible. Like FAT32.

  • Network File System (NFS), allows us to share files over a network, cross-compatible.

    NFS NFS

  • NFS is even through cross-compatible, but there are some compatibility issues on Windows.

  • Even your fleet is mostly Windows, you can use Samba, though Samba is also cross-platform.

    • SMB or Server Message Block is a protocol that Samba uses.
  • An affordable solution is to use Network Attached Storage or NAS. They are optimized for network storage and comes with the OS stripped down and optimized for file transfer and storage.

Configuring Print Services

  • On Windows, print feature can be enabled
  • In Linux, CUPS, or Common Unix Printing Service.

Platform Services

Web Servers Revisited

Web server

Stores and serves content to clients through the Internet.

Some server software:

  • Apache2
  • Nginx
  • Microsoft IIS

What is a database server?

Databases

Allow us to store, query, filter, and manage large amounts of data.

Common databases:

  • MySQL
  • PostgreSQL

There is a specialized field within IT that handles databases:

  • Database Administration

Troubleshooting Platform Services

Is the Website down?

HTTP status codes are of great help for troubleshooting web servers errors.

Knowing common HTTP status codes comes handy for fixing website errors.

HTTP status Codes

HTTP status Codes are codes or numbers that indicate some sort of error or info messages that occurred when trying to access a web resource.

  • HTTP status codes that start with 4xx indicate an issue on the client-side.
  • The other common HTTP status codes you might see start with 5xx. These errors indicate an issue on the server-side.

They tell us more than just errors. They can also tell us when our request is successful, which is denoted by the codes that begin with 2xx.

404 Not Found

A 404 error indicates that the URL you entered doesn’t point to anything.

Managing Cloud Resources

Cloud Concepts

  • When setting up cloud server, region is important

SaaS

The software is already pre-configured and the user isn’t deeply involved in the cloud configuration.

IaaS

You’re hosting your own services in the cloud. You need to decide how you want the infrastructure to look, depending on what you want to run on it.

Regions

A geographical location containing a number of data centers.

  • Each of these data centers are called zones.
  • If one of them fails for some reason, the others are still available and services can be migrated without visibly affecting users.

Public cloud

Cloud services provided to you by a third party.

Private cloud

When your company owns the services and the rest of your infrastructure – whether on-site or in a remote data center.

Hybrid cloud

A mixture of both private and public clouds.

Typical Cloud Infrastructure Setups

Let’s say you have a web server providing a website to a client. In a typical setup for this kind of service running in a cloud, a number of virtual machines will be serving this same website using Load balancers.

To make sure servers running properly, you can set:

  • Monitoring
  • Alerting

Load Balancer

Ensures that each VM receives a balanced number of queries.

Auto-scaling

It allows the service to increase or reduce capacity as needed, while the service owner only pays for the cost of the machines that are in use at any given time.

Directory Services

Introduction to Directory Services

What is a directory server?

“Contains a lookup service that provides mapping between network resources and their network addresses.”

A sysadmin will be responsible for directory server:

  • Setup
  • Configuration
  • Maintenance

Replication

The stored directory data can be copied and distributed across a number of physically distributed servers, but still appear as one, unified data store for querying and administrating.

Directory services

Useful for organizing data and making it searchable for an organization.

Directory Structure Management Directory Structure Management

Implementing Directory Services

Directory services became an open network standard for interoperability among different vendors.

  • Directory Access Protocol or DAP

  • Directory System Protocol or DSP

  • Directory Information Shadowing Protocol or DISP

  • Directory Operational Bindings Management Protocol or DOP The most popular of these alternatives was:

  • Lightweight Directory Access Protocol or LDAP

The popular industry implementation of these protocols are:

  • Microsoft Active Directory or AD
  • OpenLDAP

Centralized Management

What is centralized management?

“A central service that provides instructions to all the different parts of the company’s IT infrastructure.”

  • Directory services provide centralized authentication, authorization, and accounting, also known as AAA.
  • Role base access control or RBAC is super important in centralized management to restrict access to authorized users only.

Role Base Access Control Role Base Access Control

They’re super powerful configuration management, and automation software tools like:

  • Chef
  • Puppet
  • SCCM

Centralized Management Centralized Management

LDAP

What is LDAP?

“Used to access information in directory services, like over a network.”

The most famous one which use LDAP:

  • AD
  • OpenLDAP

LDIF (LDAP data Interchange Format) has the following fields

  • dn (distinguished name)

This refers to the name that uniquely identifies an entry in the directory.

  • dc (domain component)

This refers to each component of the domain.

  • ou (organizational unit)

This refers to the organizational unit (or sometimes the user group) that the user is part of.

  • cn (common name)

This refers to the individual object (person’s name; meeting room; recipe name; job title; etc.) for whom/which you are querying.

What is LDAP Authentication

There are three ways of LDAP authentication:

  • Anonymous
  • Simple
  • SASL - Simple Authentication & Security Layer

The common SASL authentication technique is Kerberos.

LDAP Authentication LDAP Authentication

Kerberos

A network authentication protocol that’s used to authenticate user identity, secure the transfer of user credentials, and more.

Active Directory

What is Active Directory?

The native directory service for Microsoft Windows.

  • Central point for managing Group Policy Objects or GPOs.

Managing Active Directory Users and Groups

Local user accounts and security groups are managed by the **Security Accounts Manager (SAM) on a local computer.

Authorization and Access Control Process Authorization and Access Control Process

There are three group scopes:

  • Universal
  • global
  • domain local

Managing Active Directory User Passwords

Passwords are stored as cryptographic hash.

If there’s more than one person who can authenticate using the same username and passwords, then auditing become difficult or even impossible.

  • If a user forgets his/her password, you as a sysadmin can reset their password for them.
  • Password reset will wipe out any encrypted files on the user’s computer.
  • Designated user accounts, called recovery agents > accounts, are issued recovery agent certificates with public keys and private keys that are used for EFS data recovery operations.

EFS EFS

Joining an Active Directory Domain

A computer not part of the AD is called a WorkGroup computer.

Settings > System and Security > System > Computer name, domain, and workgroup settings

From CLI:

Add-Computer -DomainName 'example.com' -Server 'dc1'

To get domain functional level:

Get-AdForest
Get-AdDomain

Forest and Domain Functional Levels

Functional levels determine the available AD Domain Service (AD DS) domain or forest capabilities. They also determine which Windows Server OS you can run on domain controllers in the domain or forest.

What is Group Policy?

Group Policy Object (GPO)

A set of policies and preferences that can be applied to a group of objects in the directory.

  • When you link a GPO, all the computers or users under that domain, site, or OU will have that policy applied.
  • A GPO can contain computer configuration, user configuration, or both.

A GPO A GPO

  • Group Policy Management tool, or gpms.msc, to change GPOs.

Policies

Settings that are reapplied every few minutes, and aren’t meant to be changed even by the local administrators.

  • By default, a GPO, will be applied every 90 mins, so OUs don’t drift away from policies.

Group policy preferences

Settings that, in many cases, are meant to be a template for settings.

Windows Registry

A hierarchical database of settings that Windows, and many Windows applications, use for storing configuration data.

  • GPOs are applied by changing Windows Registry settings.

Group Policy Creation and Editing

Always make backup before creating new policies or editing existing ones.

Group Policy Inheritance and Precedence

When a computer is processing GPO that apply to it, all of these policies will be applied in Precedence rules.

  • The Resultant Set of Policy or RSOP report is used to review applied policies and preferences.

When GPOs collide, they’re applied:

Site → Domain → OU (Applied from least specific to the most specific)

Group Policy Troubleshooting

One of the most common issues you might encounter is when a user isn’t able to log in to their computer, or isn’t able to authenticate to the Active Directory domain.

  • Maybe user locked out due to multiple failed log-in attempts.
  • Sometimes they just forget their password.
  • Start with the simplest problem statement, like perhaps there is a network connectivity issue, not directly from AD troubleshooting.
  • Possibly there is a problem with DNS record and computer cannot find src-record.
  • The SRV records that we’re interested in are _ldap._tcp.dc_msdcs.Domain.Name, where DOMAIN.NAME is the DNS name of our domain.
Resolve-DNSName -Type SRV -Name _ldap._tcp.dc._msdcs.example.com
  • Maybe there is clock sync issue

A common issue that you might have to troubleshoot is when a GPO-defined policy or preference fails to apply to a computer.

  • Perhaps issue with application of GPOs, Fast Logon Optimization.
  • GPO update may partially apply.
gpupdate /force /sync
  • Some time of policies are only applied when computer is rebooted or user logoff and logon back.
  • Replication failure may occur.
$env:LOGONSERVER

To know why a particular isn’t applying to a computer, generate a RSOP (Resultant Set of Policy) report.

gpresult /R

To get the full report:

gpresult /H test.html

Mobile Device Management (MDM)

The mobile OS takes MDM profiles or policies that contain settings for the device. You can use MDM to do a bunch of things:

  • Automatically installing apps
  • Pre-configuring wireless networks
  • Enforcing security settings like turning on encryption of the device’s storage
  • Remote wipe, a device

MDM policy settings are specific to each OS. Those policies can be created and distributed Enterprise mobility management (EMM).

Remote wipe

A factory reset that you can trigger from your central MDM, rather than having to do it in person on the device.

OpenLDAP1

What is OpenLDAP?

OpenLDAP is an open source implementation of Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP)

  • Using LDAP Data Interchange Format (LDIF), you can authenticate, add, remove users, groups and so on in the active directory service.
  • Works on Linux, Windows, and macOS.

To install it on Debian and Debian-based distros:

sudo apt install slapd ldap-utils

Then we’ll reconfigure the slapd package:

sudo dpkg-recofigure slapd

Now you have a running ldap server.

To get Web Interface:

sudo apt install phpldapadmin

The web server is now configured to serve the application, but we need to make additional changes. We need to configure phpldapadmin to use our domain, and not to autofill the LDAP login information.

sudo vim /etc/phpldapadmin/config.php

Look for the line that start with $ servers->setValue('server','name

$server->setValue('server','name','Example LDAP')

Next, move down to the $servers->setValue('server','base' line.

$servers->setValue('server','base', array('dc=example,dc=com'));

Now find the login bind_id configuration line, and comment it out with #

#$servers->setValue('login','bind_id','cn=admin,dc=example,dc=com');

The last thing that we need to adjust is a setting that controls the visibility of some phpLDAPadmin warning messages. By default, the application will show quite a few warning messages about template files. These have no impact on our current use of the software. We can hide them by searching for the hide_template_warning parameter, uncommenting the line that contains it, and setting it to true:

$config->custom->appearance['hide_template_warning'] = true;

Now login to Web-Interface

https://example.com/phpldapadmin

Managing OpenLDAP

ldapadd

Takes the input of an LDIF file2 and adds the context of the files.

ldapmodify

Modifies an existing object.

ldapdelete

Will remove the object that the LDIF file refers to.

ldapsearch

Will search for entries in your directory database.

References

Data Recovery and Backups

Planning for Data Recovery

What is Data Recovery?

“The process of trying to restore data after an unexpected even that results in data loss or corruption.”

How you go for data recovery depends on few factors:

  • Nature of Data Loss
  • Backups already in place

When an unexpected even occurs, your main objective is to resume normal operations asap, while minimizing the disruption to business functions.

The best way to be prepared for a data-loss event is to have a well-thought-out disaster plan and procedure in place.

  • Disaster plans should involve making regular backups of any and all critical data that’s necessary for your ongoing business processes.

Postmortem

A Postmortem is a way for you to document any problems you discovered along the way, and most importantly, the ways you fixed them so, you can make sure they don’t happen again.

Backing Up Your Data

Absolutely necessary data should be backed up.

Important Backup data Important Backup data

Local Storage Local Storage

Off-site storage Off-site storage

Backed up data as well as, data in transit for backup, both should be encrypted.

Backup Solutions

Too many backup solutions are there, some of them are:

rsync

A file transfer utility that’s designed to efficiently transfer and synchronize files between locations or computers.

Time Machine

Apple’s backup solution, that can restore entire snapshot or individual files.

Microsoft Backup and Restore

Backup and restore is used to back up files as well as, system snapshots in the disk.

This tool can do following tasks:

  • Back up
  • Create a system image
  • Create a restore point

Testing Backups

Disaster recovery testing should be done every year or so.

Restoration procedure

Should be documented and accessible so that anyone with the right access can restore operations when needed.

Types of Backup

Ways to Perform Regular Backups:

  • Full backup
  • Differential backup
  • Regular incremental backups

It’s a good practice to perform infrequent full backups, while also doing more frequent differential backups.

  • While a differential backup backs up files that have been change or created since the last full backup, an incremental backup is when only the data that’s changed in files since the last incremental backup is backed up**.
  • RAID array can solve the problem of failing disks on on-site backups.

Redundant Array of Independent Disks (RAID)

A method of taking multiple physical disks and combining them into one large virtual disk.

  • RAID isn’t a replacement for backups
  • It’s data storage solution which can save you from accidental deletion, or malware.

User Backups

For user backups:

  • Dropbox
  • Apple iCloud
  • Google Drive

Disaster Recovery Plans

What’s Disaster Recovery Plan?

“A collection of documented procedures and plans on how to react and handle an emergency or disaster scenario, from the operational perspective.”

Preventive measures

Any procedures or systems in place that will proactively minimize the impact of a disaster.

Detection measures

Meant to alert you and your team that a disaster has occurred that can impact operations.

  • Environmental Sensors
  • Flood sensors
  • Temp and Humidity Sensors
  • Evacuation procedures

Corrective or recovery measures

Those enacted after a disaster has occurred.

Designing Disaster Recovery Plan

No fit for all plan, there is a lot to go into a disaster recovery plan.

Designing a Disaster Recovery Plan:

  • Perform Risk Assessment
  • Determine Backup and Recovery Systems
  • Determine Detection & Alert Measures & Test Systems
  • Determine recovery measures

Risk assessment

Allows you to prioritize certain aspects of the organizations that are more at risk if there’s an unforeseen event.

Postmortems

What’s a Postmortem?

“A Postmortem is a way for you to document any problems you discovered along the way, and most importantly, the ways you fixed them so, you can make sure they don’t happen again.”

  • We create a Postmortem after an incident, an outage, or some event when something goes wrong, or at the end of a project to analyze how it went.

Writing a Postmortem

Typical postmortem report consists of:

  • Brief Summary of the incident happened

  • Detailed Timeline of Key events

  • Root Cause

  • Resolution and Recovery Efforts

  • Actions to Avoid Same Scenario

  • What went well?

    Post-mortem Report Post-mortem Report

    Post-mortem Report Post-mortem Report

Final Project: SysAdmin and IT Infrastructure Services

System Administration for Network Funtime Company

Scenario 1

You’re doing systems administration work for Network Funtime Company. Evaluate their current IT infrastructure needs and limitations, then provide at least five process improvements and rationale behind those improvements. Write a 200-400 word process review for this consultation. Remember, there’s no right or wrong answer, but make sure to provide your reasoning.

The company overview:

Network Funtime Company is a small company, that builds open-source software.

The Company is made up of 100 employees:

  • Software engineers
  • Designers
  • A Single HR Department
  • A Small Sales Team

Problem Statement

  • There is no technical support personnel.
  • The HR, is responsible for buying hardware for new resources.
  • Due to lack of funds, company go for the cheapest hardware possible.
  • Due to lack of funds, everyone in the company has different laptops models.
  • There are no backups for hardware, which creates additional wait time for new employees to start working.
  • Due to missing standardized labeling convention, when a laptop or computer goes missing/stolen, there is no way to audit it.
  • No Inventory system.
  • HR manages System setups for engineers as well as answer their support queries through email.
  • No standard way for login management, password management and recovery.
  • The company use cloud applications like:
    • Email
    • Word Processor
    • Spreadsheets
    • Slack – Instant Communication

The Improvements

The company should hire an IT Support specialist, who will take care of:

  • Buying new hardware, and disposing off the retired machines
  • According to company budget, selecting a hardware with similar specs.
  • Keep the inventory record, and labeling each and every machine before handing over to new employees.
  • Keeping a few machines as a backup in the inventory.
  • Managing a ticking system for employees’ support question.
  • Keeping the documentation of the fixes and issues.
  • Keeping a bootable USB of the OSs used in the company.
  • When the company hires a new resource, he/she sets up their machine for them.

The company should move to OpenLDAP or Active Directory for centralized passwords and permissions management and recovery.

The HR should be responsible for his/her tasks instead of providing IT Support, Hardware management, and Employees’ software installation and setup.

The Rationale Behind Improvements

Hiring an IT support specialist:

  • Will reduce the work of an HR
  • Keep the inventory record, which will make auditing very easy.
  • Selecting a standardized hardware, will make troubleshooting and tracking issues and fixes much easier, which in turn lessen the time spent in fixing and more in doing the work.
  • Keeping backups in the inventory, reduce time wastage for the new employees, they can start working asap.
  • Having a ticketing system or some centralized way of tracking issues and fixes, will create a documentation for future reference, and if the same issue arises again, it will be solved in no time.
  • Keeping bootable USB, saves in hunting down the software and makes the setup process easy, so reduces the overhead for new employees. And They can start working immediately.

Centralized management:

  • OpenLDAP/Active Directory, will make sure to centrally manage users and permissions, so everyone has only required access to the company’s sensitive documents.
  • Password resets will become more easy, there be less time wastage.

Scenario 2

You’re doing systems administration work for W.D. Widgets. Evaluate their current IT infrastructure needs and limitations, then provide at least five process improvements and rationale behind those improvements. Please write a 200-400 word process review for this consultation. Remember, there’s no right or wrong answer, but make sure to provide your reasoning.

The Company Overview

The company is in the business of selling widgets. There are mostly sales persons in the company.

The company size is 80–100 people.

Problem Statement

  • Sole IT person
  • Manual installation of the software on new machines.
  • Direct emails for IT support related issues.
  • Almost every software is kept in house:
    • Email server
    • Local Machine Software
    • Instant messenger
  • The Single file server for customers data.
    • No centralized management of the data.
    • No backups
    • Everyone has their copy with their unique data.
  • The company growth is exponential. They expect to hire hundreds of new employees.

The Improvements

The company should hire new talent for IT Support related stuff.

The automation for the following should be done:

  • Installation of software on the new machines.
  • Automated backups should be in place for critical data.
  • Storage server should be redundant.

A centralized management of the data is required:

  • To manage customers information in a single place
  • The company should move from one server to many redundant storage solutions.
  • Permissions, and access to the data, should be limited to the role of the person. To answer IT Support questions:
  • There should be a ticketing system in place.
  • There should be documentation of the common issues.

The company should move some of their services to the cloud, like:

  • Email
  • Instant Chats

The Rationale

Hiring new tech talent:

  • Will make sure you’re ready for next big step of your expansion
  • Will distribute the work load, so fewer burnouts.

The automation will make sure:

  • There is no manual input, so fewer chances of errors.
  • No hours wasted on installing software, and configuring the new machines.

The cloud will make the company:

  • Less reliant on local servers, which require more maintenance, and security related complex configuration.
  • It will reduce the number of the people required for managing those servers.
  • There will be almost zero maintenance overhead for the cloud.
  • The data will be centrally available and backed up.
  • Email and chat servers are pretty complex to manage, and require a lot of security knowledge.

The centralized management:

  • Will make sure the right person has access to the right information
  • Removing the access of Ex-employees will become easy.
  • Role based access control, will make sure sensitive internal documents are exposed to wrong persons.

Scenario 3

You’re doing systems administration work for Dewgood. Evaluate their current IT infrastructure needs and limitations, then provide at least five process improvements and rationale behind those improvements. Please write a 200-400 word process review for this consultation. Remember, there’s no right or wrong answer, but make sure to provide your reasoning.

The Company Overview

A small local non-profit of 50 employees.

  • Sole IT person

Problem Statement

  • Computers are bought directly in a physical store on the day new talent is hired.
  • Due to budget issue, they can’t keep extra stock.
  • The company has a single server with multiple services:
    • Email
    • File server
  • Don’t have an internal chat system.
  • AD is used, but Ex-employees are not disabled.
  • Ticketing system is confusing and difficult to use, so:
    • Many employees reach out to IT person, to know how to use it.
    • Employees are always asking around the questions of how to use it.
  • IT person, takes backups on a personal Drive and takes it home.
  • A website with single HTML page is hosted on internal server, and remain down many times, no one know why.

The Improvements and Rationale

The computer should be purchased directly from vendors:

  • Vendors offer special discounts to businesses and non-profits, so it will save cost.
  • There should some standardization to which hardware to buy to avoid fix issues every time for new hardware type.

The company should move their email sever to the cloud:

  • The cloud solutions are cheap.
  • There’s virtually no maintenance is involved.
  • Maintaining own email servers, requires a lot of complex configuration to make sure the security and redundancy, which isn’t possible with Single IT Person.

Should use some cloud-based solution for internal instant chats:

  • The teams can keep track of each other progress.
  • The teams can discuss issues, plans, and procedure without any hiccups.

To improve the customer ticketing system:

  • There should be proper documentation of to use it, so every time an employee doesn’t have to go to the IT person for help.
  • The common issues and fixes should properly document and stored on the server, so employees can access them, and fix the common issues themselves to reduce time wastage.

For the backups:

  • There should be on-site and off-site backups for sensitive data for redundancy purposes.
  • The cloud backup solutions can also be used for a small company.
  • Self-hosted backups should be automatic, and redundant.
  • Backups tests and recovery should be done once every year or so, to make sure in the case of an emergency, your backups will prove reliable.

Subsections of IT Security

Understanding the Security Threats

The CIA Triad

The CIA Triad consists of:

  • Confidentiality

Keeping things hidden.

  • Integrity

Keeping our data accurate and untampered with.

  • Availability

The Information we have is readily accessible to those people that should have it.

Essential Security Terms

Risk

The possibility of suffering a loss in the event of an attack on the system.

Vulnerability

A flaw in a system that could be exploited to compromise the system.

0-day vulnerability (zero day)

A vulnerability that is not known to the software developer or vendor, but is known to an attacker.

Exploit

Software that is used to take advantage of a security bug or vulnerability.

Threat

The possibility of danger that could exploit a vulnerability.

Hacker

Someone who attempts to break into or exploit a system.

  • White-hat hackers
  • Black-hat hackers

Hacker Hacker

Attack

An actual attempt at causing harm to a system.

Malicious Software

Malware

A type of malicious software that can be used to obtain your sensitive information, or delete or modify files.

Malware Malware

Adware

Software that displays advertisements and collects data.

Trojan

Malware that disguises itself as one thing but does something else.

Trojan Trojan

Spyware

A type of malware that’s meant to spy on you.

Keylogger

A common type of spyware that’s used to record every keystroke you make.

Ransomeware

“A type of attack that holds your data or system hostage until you pay some sort of ransom.”

If the computer has one or more of the following symptoms, it may be infected with malware:

  • Running slower than normal
  • Restarts on its own multiple times
  • Uses all or a higher than normal amount of memory

After you’ve gathered information, verify that the issues are still occurring by monitoring the computer for a period of time. One way to monitor and verify is to review the activity on the computer’s resource manager, where you can see open processes running on a system.

When looking at the resource manager, you might see a program with a name you do not recognize, a program that is using a lot of memory, or both. If you see a suspicious program, you should investigate this application by asking the user if it is familiar to them.

Quarantine malware

Some malware communicates with bad actors or sends out sensitive information. Other malware is designed to take part in a distributed botnet. A botnet is a number of Internet-connected devices, each of which runs one or more bots. Because of malware’s potential ability to communicate with other bad actors, you should quarantine the infected device.

To quarantine, or separate, the infected device from the rest of the network, you should disconnect from the internet by turning off Wi-Fi and unplugging the Ethernet cable. Once the computer is disconnected, the malware can no longer spread to other computers on the network.

You should also disable any automatic system backup. Some malware can reinfect a computer by using automatic backup, because you can restore the system with files infected by the malware.

Remove malware

Once you have confirmed and isolated the malware on a device, you should attempt to remove the malware from the device. First, run an offline malware scan. This scan helps find and remove the malware while the computer is still disconnected from the local network and internet.

All antivirus/anti-malware programs rely on threat definition files to identify a virus or malware. These files are often updated automatically, but in the case of an infected computer they may be incomplete or unable to update. In this case, you may need to briefly connect to the internet to confirm that your malware program is fully updated.

The scan should successfully identify, quarantine, and remove the malware on the computer. Once the process is complete, monitor the computer again to confirm that there are no further issues.

To help ensure that a malware infection doesn’t happen again, threat definitions should be set to update automatically, and to automatically scan for and quarantine suspected malware.

After the malware has been removed from the computer, you should turn back on the automatic backup tool and manually create a safe restore point. If the computer needs attention in the future, this new restore point is confirmed safe and clean.

Malware education

One of the most important things an IT professional can do to protect a company and its employees is to educate users about malware. The goal of education is to stop malware from ever gaining access to company systems. Here are a few ways users and IT professionals can protect their computer and the company from malware:

  • Keep the computer and software updated
  • Use a non-administrator account whenever possible
  • Think twice before clicking links or downloading anything
  • Be careful about opening email attachments or images
  • Don’t trust pop-up windows that ask to download software
  • Limit your file-sharing
  • Use antivirus software

When all employees are on the lookout for suspicious files, it’s much easier to prevent malware and viruses from taking hold.

Botnets

Designed to utilize the power of the internet-connected machines to perform some distributed function.

Botnets Botnets

Backdoor

A way to get into a system if the other methods to get in the system aren’t allowed.

Rootkit

A collection of software or tools that an Admin would use.

Rootkit Rootkit

Logic bomb

A type of malware that’s intentionally installed.

Disgruntled worker ’tried to cripple UBS in protest over $32,000 bonus’

Network Attacks

A network attack that is simple in concept, but can cause a lot of damage is:

  • DNS Cache Poisoning attack

It works by tricking the DNS server to serve, fake DNS request.

Major DNS Cache Poisoning Attack Hits Brazilian ISPs

Man-in-the-middle attack is an attack that places the attacker in the middle of two hosts that think they’re communicating directly with each other.

Network Attacks Network Attacks

The methods of Man-in-the-middle attack are:

  • Session or Cookie hijacking
  • Rogue AP
  • Evil twin

Rogue AP

An access point that is installed on the network without the network administrator’s knowledge.

Rogue AP Rogue AP

Evil Twin

The premise of an evil twin attack is for you to connect to a network that is identical to yours. This identical network is our network’s evil twin and is controlled by our attacker.

Evil Twin Evil Twin

Denial-of-service (DoS) attack

An attack that tries to prevent access to a service for legitimate users by overwhelming the network or server.

DoS DoS

  1. The ping of death or POD is an example of DoS attack, where the attacker sends the large number of pings to take down the server.

POD POD

  1. Another example is a ping flood, sends tons of ping packets to a system. More specifically, it sends ICMP echo requests.

ICMP ICMP

  1. Similar is a SYN flood, to make a TCP connection a client needs to send a SYN packet to a server it wants to connect to. Next, the server sends back a SYN-ACK message, then the client sends in ACK message.

In a SYN flood, the server is being bombarded with SYN packets.

SYN Flood SYN Flood

During SYN flood, the TCP connection remains open, so it is also called a Half-open attack.

Distributed denial-of-service attack (DDoS)

A DoS attack using multiple systems.

How to prevent DDoS Attacks

How to Stop DDoS Attacks: Prevention & Response

What is a DDOS Attack & How to Protect Your Site Against One

DDoS Protection, Mitigation, and Defense: 8 Essential Tips

Other Attacks

Client-Side Attacks

  • Injection attack
    • Cross-site scripting (XSS) attacks
    • SQL injection attack

Cross-site scripting (XSS) attacks

A type of injection attack where the attacker can insert malicious code and target the user of the service.

SQL injection attack

SQL Injection Attack SQL Injection Attack

Password Attacks

Utilize software like password-crackers that try and guess your password.

Brute Force Attack

A Catchpa, can save your website from brute force attack.

Brute Force Attack Brute Force Attack

Dictionary Attack

Dictionary Attack Dictionary Attack

Deceptive Attacks

Social Engineering

An attack method that relies heavily on interactions with humans instead of computers.

Social Engineering Social Engineering

The popular types of social engineering attacks:

  • Phishing attack – Use of email or text messaging

Phishing attack Phishing attack

  • Spear phishing — Attack individuals

Spear phishing Spear phishing

  • Email Spoofing

Email Spoofing Email Spoofing

  • Baiting – Entice a victim to do something
  • Tailgating

Baiting Baiting

  • Whaling – Spear phishing a high value target
  • Vishing - Use of Voice over IP (VoIP)

Spoofing

A source masquerading around as something else.

Tailgating

Gaining access into a restricted area or building by following a real employee in.

Pelcgbybtl (Cryptology)

Symmetric Encryption

Cryptography

The cryptography has two main fields:

  • Cryptology: The study of cryptographic methods.
  • Cryptanalysis: The study of breaking the cryptography.

Encryption

The act of taking a message, called plaintext, and applying an operation to it, called a cipher, so that you receive a garbled, unreadable message as the output, called ciphertext.

The reverse is Decryption.

The Cipher is made up of two components:

  • Encryption algorithm
  • Key

Encryption algorithm

The underlying logic of the process that’s used to convert the plaintext into ciphertext.

These algorithms are usually very complex. But there are also simple algorithms as well.

Encryption Algorithm Encryption Algorithm

Security through obscurity is a principle where underlying encryption algorithm is also kept hidden for security purposes. But you shouldn’t rely on it, as once the underlying mechanism is discovered, your whole security will wash away.

The underlying principle of cryptography is called Kirchhoff’s principle.

Cryptosystem

A collection of algorithms for key generation and encryption and decryption operations that comprise a cryptographic service should remain secure – even if everything about the system is known, except the key.

  • The system should remain secure even if your adversary knows exactly what kind of encryption systems you’re employing, as long as your keys remain secure.

Frequency analysis

The practice of studying the frequency with which letters appear in a ciphertext.

An Arab mathematician of 9th century, used this first cryptographic method

Steganography

The practice of hiding the information from observers, but not encoding it.

  • The writing of messages with invisible ink.
  • The modern steganographic techniques involves, hiding the code/scripts in the PDF or image files etc.

Types of cryptanalysis attack

Known-Plaintext Analysis (KPA)

Requires access to some or all the of the plaintext of the encrypted information. The plaintext is not computationally tagged, specially formatted, or written in code. The analyst’s goal is to examine the known plaintext to determine the key used to encrypt the message. Then they use the key to decrypt the encoded information.

Chose-Plaintext Analysis (CPA)

Requires that the attacker knows the encryption algorithm or has access to the device used to do the encryption. The analyst can encrypt one block of chosen plaintext with the targeted algorithm to get information about the key. Once the analyst obtains the key, they can decrypt and use sensitive information.

Ciphertext-Only Analysis (COA)

Requires access to one or more encrypted messages. No information is needed about the plaintext data, the algorithm, or data about the cryptographic key. Intelligence agencies face this challenge when intercepting encrypted communications with no key.

Adaptive Chosen-Plaintext attack (ACPA)

ACPA is similar to a chosen-plaintext attack. Unlike a CPA, it can use smaller lines of plaintext to receive its encrypted ciphertext and then crack the encryption code using the ciphertext.

Meddler-in-the-Middle (MITM)

MITM uses cryptanalysts to insert a meddler between two communication devices or applications to exchange their keys for secure communication. The meddler replies as the user, and then performs a key exchange with each party. The users or systems think they communicate with each other, not the meddler. These attacks allow the meddler to obtain login credentials and other sensitive information.

Wikipedia article on Cryptanalysis Integer Factorization Cryptanalysis explained

Symmetric Cryptography

These types of algorithms use the same key for encryption and decryption.

Substitution cipher

An encryption mechanism that replaces parts of your plaintext with ciphertext.

  • E.g., Caesar cipher, ROT13 etc.

Substitution Cipher Substitution Cipher

Stream cipher

Takes a stream of input and encrypts the stream one character or one digit at a time, outputting one encrypted character or digit at a time.

  • Initialization vector (IV) is used, to add a random string of characters to the key.

Block ciphers

The cipher takes data in, places it into a bucket or block of data that’s a fixed size, then encodes that entire block as one unit.

Block Ciphers Block Ciphers

Symmetric Encryption Algorithms

Data Encryption Standard (DES)

One of the earliest standard is Data Encryption Standard (DES).

  • With input from NSA, IBM developed it in the 1970s.
  • It was used as a FIPS.
  • Used 64-bits key sizes.

FIPS

Federal Information Processing Standard.

Standard Encryption Standard (AES)

NIST (National Institute of Standards and Technology), adopted Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) in 2001.

  • 128-blocks, twice the size of DES blocks, and supports key length of 128-bits, 192-bits, or 256-bits.
  • Because of the large key size, brute-force attacks on AES are only theoretical right now, because the computing power required (or time required using modern technology) exceeds anything feasible today.

An important thing to keep in mind when considering various encryption algorithms is speed, and ease of implementation.

RC4 (Rivest Cipher 4)

A symmetric stream cipher that gained widespread adoption because of its simplicity and speed.

  • Abandoned due to inheritance weaknesses.

RC4 RC4

RC4 Exists No More

Public Key or Asymmetric Encryption

Asymmetric Cryptography

Asymmetric or Public Key ciphers.

Two different keys are used for encryption and decryption.

The three concepts that an asymmetric cryptosystem grants us are:

  • Confidentiality
  • Authenticity
  • Non-repudiation

Symmetric encryption is used for key exchange.

Message Authentication Codes or MACs

A bit of information that allows authentication of a received message, ensuring that the message came from the alleged sender and not a third party.

HMAC

Keyed-hash messaged authentication code.

CMACs

Cipher-Based Message Authentication Codes.

CBC-MAC

Cipher block chaining message authentication codes.

Asymmetric Encryption Algorithms

RSA

The first practical asymmetric cryptography systems to be developed is RSA.

Pretty complex math is involved in generating key pair for RSAs.

This crypto system was patented in 1983 and was released to the public domain by RSA Security in the year 2000.

Digital Signature Algorithm or DSA

It was patented in 1991, and is part of the US government’s Federal Information Processing Standard.

Similar to RSA, the specification covers the key generation process along with the signing and verifying data using the key pairs. It’s important to call out that the security of this system is dependent on choosing a random seed value that’s incorporated into the signing process. If this value was leaked or if it can be inferred if the prime number isn’t truly random, then it’s possible for an attacker to recover the private key.

Diffie-Hellman

Named after coworkers, invented it. It is solely used for key exchange.

Let’s assume we have two people who would like to communicate over an unsecured channel, and let’s call them Suzanne and Daryll. First, Suzanne and Daryl agree on the starting number that would be random and will be a very large integer. This number should be different for every session and doesn’t need to be secret. Next, each person decides another randomized large number, but this one is kept secret. Then, they combine their shared number with their respective secret number and send the resulting mix to each other. Next, each person combines their secret number with the combined value they received from the previous step. The result is a new value that’s the same on both sides, without disclosing enough information to any potential eavesdroppers to figure out the shared secret. This algorithm was designed solely for key exchange, though there have been efforts to adapt it for encryption purposes.

Elliptic curve cryptography (ECC)

A public-key encryption system that uses the algebraic structure of elliptic curves over finite fields to generate secure keys.

ECC ECC

  • The benefit of elliptic curve based encryption systems is that they are able to achieve security similar to traditional public key systems with smaller key sizes. So, for example, a 256 bit elliptic curve key, would be comparable to a 3,072 bit RSA key. This is really beneficial since it reduces the amount of data needed to be stored and transmitted when dealing with keys.
  • Both Diffie-Hellman and DSA have elliptic curve variants, referred to as ECDH and ECDSA, respectively.
  • The US NEST recommends the use of EC encryption, and the NSA allows its use to protect up to top secret data with 384 bit EC keys
  • But, the NSA has expressed concern about EC encryption being potentially vulnerable to quantum computing attacks, as quantum computing technology continues to evolve and mature.

Sony PlayStation 3: An asymmetric encryption attack in 2010

Hashing

A type of function or operation that takes in an arbitrary data input and maps it to an output of fixed size, called a hash or digest.

Hashing Hashing

  • You feed in any amount of data into a hash function, and the resulting output will always be the same size. But the output should be unique to the input, such that two different inputs should never yield the same output.
  • Hashing can also be used to identify duplicate data sets in databases or archives to speed up searching tables, or to remove duplicate data to save space.
  • Cryptographic hashing is distinctly different from encryption because cryptographic hash functions should be one directional.
  • The ideal cryptographic has function should be deterministic, meaning that the same input value should always return the same hash value.
  • The function should not allow Hash collisions.

Hash collisions

Two different inputs mapping to the same output.

Hash collision Hash collision

Hashing Algorithms

MD5

Designed in early 1990s. Operates on 512-bits block and generates 128-bits hash digest.

  • While MD5 was designed in 1992, a design flaw was discovered in 1996, and cryptographers recommended using the SHA-1 hash.
  • In 2004, it was discovered that is MD5 is susceptible to hash collisions.
  • In 2008, security researchers create a fake SSL certificate that was validated due to MD5 hash collision.
  • Due to these very serious vulnerabilities in the hash function, it was recommended to stop using MD5 by 2010.
  • In 2012, this hash collision was used for nefarious purposes in the flame malware, which used to forge a Microsoft digital certificate to sign their malware, which resulted in the malware appearing to be from legitimate software that came from Microsoft.

Create a text file

echo 'This is some text in a file' > file.txt

To create an MD5 hash:

md5sum file.txt > file.txt.md5

To verify the hash

md5sum -c file.txt.md5

SHA-1

SHA-1 is part of the Secure Hash Algorithm suite of functions, designed by the NSA, published in 1995.

During the 2000s, a bunch of theoretical attacks against SHA1 were formulated, and some partial collisions were demonstrated.

  • Operated at 512-bits blocks and use 160-bits hash digest.
  • It is used in popular protocols like:
    • TLS/SSL
    • PGP SSH
    • IPsec
    • VCS like git
  • NIST recommended stopping the use of SHA-1, and relying on SHA-2 in 2010.
  • Major browsers vendor dropped support for SSL certificates that use SHA-1 in 2017.
  • In early 2017, full collision of SHA-1 was published. Two PDFs were created with same SHA-1 hashes.
  • MIC or Message Integrity Check to make sure there is no data corruption in transit to the hash digest.

To create a hash

shasum file.txt > file.txt.sha1

To verify sha1

shasum -c file.txt.sha1

To create SHA256 hash

shasum -a 256 file.txt > file.txt.sha256

For verification, use the same command as above.

Defense against hash attacks

The passwords should not be stored in plaintext, instead they should be hashed and, store a hash.

  • Brute-force attack against a password hash can be pretty computationally expensive, depending upon the hash system used.
  • A successful brute force attack, against even the most secure system imaginable, is a function of attacker time and resources.
  • Another common methods to help raise the computational bar and protect against brute force attacks is to run the password through the hashing function multiple times, sometimes through thousands of iterations.
  • A rainbow table is ta table of precalculated hashes.

Defense against hash attacks Defense against hash attacks

  • To protect against these precalculated rainbow tables, password salt come into play.

Password salt

Additional randomized data that’s added into the hashing function to generate a hash that’s unique to the password and salt combination.

  • Modern systems use 128-bits salt.
  • It means there are 2^128 possible salt combination.

Password salt Password salt

Cryptographic Applications

Public Key Infrastructure (PKI)

PKI is a system that defines the creation, storage, and distribution of digital certificates. A digital certificate is a file that proves that an entity owns a certain public key.

  • The entity responsible for storing, issuing, and signing digital certificates is call Certificate authority or CA.
  • There’s also a Registration authority, or RA, that’s responsible for verifying the identities of any entities requesting certificates to be signed and stored with the CA.
  • A central repository is needed to securely store and index keys, and a certificate management system of some sort makes managing access to stored certificates and issuance of certificates easier.

PKI signing process

Start from the Root Certificate authority, which signs the certificate itself, as no one above it.

PKI signing process PKI signing process

This Root certificate authority can now use the self-signed certificate and the associated private key to begin signing other public keys and issuing certificates.

RCA RCA

A certificate that has no authority as a CA is referred to as an end-entity or leaf certificate.

  • The X.509 standard is what defines the format of digital certificates.

The fields defined in X.509 are:

Version

What version of the X.509 standard the certificate adheres to.

Serial number

A unique identifier for the certificate assigned by the CA, which allows the CA to manage and identify individual certificates.

Certificate Signature Algorithm

This field indicates what public key algorithm is used for the public key and what hashing algorithm is used to sign the certificate.

Issuer Name

This field contains information about the authority that signed the certificate.

Validity

This contains two subfields – “Not Before” and “Not After” – which define the dates when the certificate is valid for.

Subject

This field contains identifying information about the entity the certificate was issued to.

Subject Public Key Info

These two subfields define the algorithm of the public key, along with the public key itself.

Certificate Signature Algorithm

Same as the Subject Public Key Info field; These two fields must match.

Certificate Signature Value

The digital signature data itself.

SSL/TLS server certificate

This is a certificate that a web server presents to a client as part of the initial secure setup of an SSL, TLS connection.

SSL-TLS SSL-TLS

Self-signed certificate

Signed by the same entity that issued the certificate. Signing your own public key using your own with private key.

SSL/TLS client certificate

As the names implies, these are certificates that are bound to clients and are used to authenticate the client to the server, allowing access control to an SSL/TLS service.

Code Signing Certificates

This allows users of these signed applications to verify the signatures and ensure that the application was not tampered with.

Webs of Trust

Individuals are signing each other certificates, after verifying the identity of the persons with agreed upon methods.

Webs of Trust Webs of Trust

Cryptography in Action

HTTPS

The secure version of HTTP, the Hyper Text Transport Protocol.

  • It can also be called HTTP over the TLS.
  • Even though, TLS is a completely independent protocol from HTTPS.

TLS

It grants us three things

  1. A secure communication line, which means data being transmitted, is protected from potential eavesdroppers.
  2. The ability to authenticate both parties communicating, though typically only the server is authenticated by the client.
  3. The integrity of communications, meaning there are checks to ensure that messages aren’t lost or altered in transit.

To establish a TLS channel, there is a TLS handshake in place.

TLS TLS

The session key is the shared symmetric encryption key used in TLS sessions to encrypt data being sent back and forth.

Secure Shell (SSH)

A secure network protocol that uses encryption to allow access to a network service over unsecured networks.

  • SSH uses public key cryptography.

Pretty Good Privacy (PGP)

An encryption application that allows authentication of data, along with privacy from third parties, relying upon asymmetric encryption to achieve this.

Securing Network Traffic

Virtual Private Network (VPN)

A mechanism that allows you to remotely connect a host or network to an internal, private network, passing the data over a public channel, like the internet.

VPN VPN

There are different VPN protocols:

  • IPsec

IPsec support two modes:

  1. When transport mode is used, only the payload of the IP packet is encrypted, leaving the IP headers untouched.
  2. In tunnel mode, the entire IP packet, header payload and all, is encrypted and encapsulated inside a new IP packet with new headers.
  • Layer 2 tunneling protocol or L2TP

It is not an all alone protocol, it is used in conjunction with IPsec protocol.

The tunnel is provided by L2TP, which permits the passing of unmodified packets from one network to another. The secure channel, on the other hand, is provided by IPsec, which provides confidentiality, integrity, and authentication of data being passed.

The combination of L2TP and IPsec is referred to as L2TP/IPsec and was officially standardized in IETF RFC 3193

  • OpenVPN

OpenVPN is an example of LT2p/IPsec.

It uses OpenSSL library to handle key exchange and encryption of data, along with control channels.

OpenVPN can operate over either TCP or UDP, typically over port 1194.

It can either rely on a Layer 3 IP tunnel or a Layer 2 Ethernet tap. The Ethernet tap is more flexible, allowing it to carry a wider range of traffic.

OpenVPN supports up to 256-bits encryption through OpenSSL library. It runs in user space, so avoid the underlying vulnerabilities of the system.

Cryptographic Hardware

TPM or Trusted Platform Module

Another interesting application of cryptography concepts, is the Trusted Platform Module or TPM. This is a hardware device that’s typically integrated into the hardware of a computer, that’s a dedicated crypto processor.

TPM offers:

  • Secure generation of keys
  • Random number generation
  • Remote attestation
  • Data binding and sealing

There’s been a report of a physical attack on a TPM which allowed a security researcher to view and access the entire contents of a TPM.

For Full disk encryption or FDE, we have the number of options:

  • PGP
  • BitLocker
  • Filevault 2
  • dm-crypt

FDE FDE

Generating OpenSSL Public-Private Key pairs

To generate a 2048-bits RSA private key

openssl genrsa -out private_key.pem 2048

To generate a public key from the private_key.pem file

openssl rsa -in private_key.pem -outform PEM -pubout -out public_key.pem

To encrypt a secret.txt using public key

openssl rsautl -encrypt -pubin -inkey public_key.pem -in secret.txt -out secret.enc

As we have used our own public key for encryption, we can decrypt the file using our private key

openssl rsautl -decrypt -inkey private_key.pem -in secre.enc

This will print the contents of the dcrypted file to the screen, which should match the contents of secret.txt

Creating a hash digest

To create the hash digest of the message

openssl dgst -sha256 -sign private_key.pem -out secret.txt.sha256 secret.txt

To verify the digest

openssl dgst -sha256 -verify public_key.pem -signature secret.txt.sha256 secret.txt

The 3As of Cybersecurity - 3A Authentication, Authorization, Accounting

Authentication

Three types of authentication methods:

  • Something you know – password or pin
  • Something you have – bank card, USB device, key fob, or OTP
  • Something you are – biometric data, like a fingerprint, voice signature, facial recognition, or retinal scan

Some additional categories of authentication methods:

  • Somewhere you are – geofencing, GPS, Indoor Positioning Systems (IPS)
  • Something you do – gestures, swipe patterns, CAPTCHA, or patterns of behavior

Authentication Best Practices

Incorporating good password policies into an organization is key to ensuring that employees are securing their accounts with strong passwords.

A good password practice makes sure of:

  • Length requirements
  • Character complexity
  • Dictionary words

Identification

The idea of describing an entity uniquely.

Multifactor Authentication

A system where users are authenticated by presenting multiple pieces of information or objects.

  • OTP with physical token

The 3As of Cybersecurity The 3As of Cybersecurity

  • Counter-based token

The 3As of Cybersecurity The 3As of Cybersecurity

  • Biometrics
  • U2F – Universal 2nd Factor

The 3As of Cybersecurity The 3As of Cybersecurity

Biometric authentication

The process of using unique physiological characteristics of an individual to identify them.

They’re creating fake fingerprints using things like glue, allowing friends to mark each other as present if they’re late or skip school.

Certificates

In order to issue client certificates, an organization must set up and maintain CA infrastructure to issue and sign certificates.

The certificates are checked against CRL.

Certificate revocation list (CRL)

A signed list published by the CA which defines certificates that have been explicitly revoked.

LDAP

Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is an open, industry-standard protocol for accessing and maintaining directory services.

  • Bind: How clients authenticate to the server.
  • StartTLS: It permits a client to communicate using LDAP v3 over TLS
  • Search: For performing look-ups and retrieval of records.
  • Unbind: It closes the connection to the LDAP server.

RADIUS

Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) is a protocol that provides AAA services for users on a network.

The 3As of Cybersecurity The 3As of Cybersecurity

Kerberos

A network authentication protocol that uses “tickets” to allow entities to prove their identity over potentially insecure channels to provide mutual authentication.

The 3As of Cybersecurity The 3As of Cybersecurity

TACACS+

Terminal Access Controller Access-Control System Plus

  • TACACS+ is primarily used for device administration, authentication, authorization, and accounting.

Single Sign-On

An authentication concept that allows users to authenticate once to be granted access to a lot of different services and applications.

The 3As of Cybersecurity The 3As of Cybersecurity

OpenID

The 3As of Cybersecurity The 3As of Cybersecurity

Authorization

Pertains to describing what the user account has access to, or doesn’t have access to.

Authorization and Access Control Methods

One popular and open standard for authorization is:

  • OAuth

Access Control

OAuth

An open standard that allows users to grant third-party websites and applications access to their information without sharing account credentials.

The 3As of Cybersecurity The 3As of Cybersecurity

  • OAuth’s permissions can be used in phishing-style attacks to again access to accounts, without requiring credentials to be compromised.

This was used in an OAuth-based worm-like attack in early 2017, with a rash of phishing emails that appeared to be from a friend or colleague who wants to share a Google Document.

The 3As of Cybersecurity The 3As of Cybersecurity

Access Control List (ACL)

A way of defining permissions or authorization for objects.

The 3As of Cybersecurity The 3As of Cybersecurity

Accounting

Keeping records of what resources and services your users accessed, or what they did when they were using your systems.

  • Auditing

Tracking Usage and Access

What exactly accounting tracks, depends on the purpose and intent of the system.

  • A TACACS+ server would be more concerned with keeping track of user authentication, what systems they authenticated to, and what commands they ran during their session.

TACACS+ is a devices access AAA system that manages who has access to your network devices and what they do on them.

  • CISCO’s AAA system supports accounting of individual commands executed, connection to and from network devices, commands executed in privileged mode, and network services and system details like configuration reloads or reboots.
  • RADIUS will track details like session duration, client location and bandwidth, or other resources used during the session.

The 3As of Cybersecurity The 3As of Cybersecurity

RADIUS accounting can be used by ISPs to charge for their services.

Securing Your Networks

Secure Network Architecture

Network Hardening Best Practices

  • Disable the network services that are not needed.
  • Monitoring network traffic
  • Analyze the network logs
  • Network separation

Network hardening

The process of securing a network by reducing its potential vulnerabilities through configuration changes and taking specific steps.

Implicit deny

A network security concept where anything not explicitly permitted or allowed should be denied.

Analyzing logs

The practice of collecting logs from different network and sometimes client devices on your network, then performing an automated analysis on them.

  • Log analysis systems are configured using user-defined rules to match interesting or atypical log entries.
  • Normalizing log data is an important step, since logs from different devices and systems may not be formatted in a common way.
  • This makes correlation analysis easier.

Correlation analysis

The process of taking logs data from different systems and matching events across the systems.

Flood guards

Provide protection against DoS or Denial of Service attacks.

  • fail2ban

Flood Guards Flood Guards

Network Hardware Hardening

To protect against Rogue DHCP server attack, enterprise switches offer a feature called DHCP snooping.

Network Hardware Hardening Network Hardware Hardening

Another form of network hardening is Dynamic ARP inspection.

Dynamic ARP inspection is also a feature of enterprise switches.

Network Hardware Hardening Network Hardware Hardening

IP Source Guard is used to protect against IP spoofing attacks in enterprise switches.

To really hardened your network, you should apply IEEE 802.1X recommendation.

IEEE 802.1x is a protocol developed to let clients connect to port based networks using modern authentication methods.

  • There are three nodes in the authentication process: supplicant, authenticator, and authentication server.
  • The authentication server uses either a shared key system or open access system to control who is able to connect to the network.
  • Based on the criteria of the authentication server, the supplicator will grant the authentication request and begin the connection process, or it will be sent an Access Reject message and terminate the connection.

Network Hardware Hardening Network Hardware Hardening

EAP-TLS

An authentication type supported by EAP that uses TLS to provide mutual authentication of both the client and the authenticating server.

EAP-TLS EAP-TLS

Network Software Hardening

  • Firewalls
  • Proxies
  • VPNs

Reverse proxies:

Wireless Security

WEP Encryption and Why You Shouldn’t Use It

WEP supported two types of authentications:

  • Open System authentication
  • Shared Key authentication

WEP WEP

Why WEP is for everyone:

WEP WEP

Let’s Get Rid of WEP! WPA/WPA2

The replacement for WEP from the Wi-Fi Alliance:

  • WPA – Wi-Fi Protected Access
  • WPA2 – Introduced in 2004

WPA

Designed as a short-term replacement that would be compatible with older WEP-enabled hardware with a simple firmware update.

Under WPA, the pre-shared key is the Wi-Fi password you share with people when they come over and want to use your wireless network.

WPA WPA

WPA2

For security, it uses:

  • Uses AES.
  • CCMP (Counter Mode CBC-MAC Protocol)

WPA2 WPA2

Four-way handshake

WPA2 WPA2

PMTK is generated through:

  • PMK
  • AP nonce
  • Client nonce
  • AP MAC address
  • Client MAC address

WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Access) support:

  • PIN entry authentication
  • NFC or USB
  • Push-button authentication

Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) PIN brute force vulnerability

Wireless Hardening

In the ideal world, we all should protect our wireless networks with 802.1X with EAP-TLS.

  • If 802.1X is too complicated for a company, the next best alternative would be WPA2 with AES/CCMP mode.
  • But to protect against Rainbow tables attack, we need some extra measures.
  • A long and complex passphrase that wouldn’t find in a dictionary would increase the amount of time and resources an attacker would need to break the passphrase.
  • If your company values security over convenience, you should make sure that WPS isn’t enabled on your APs.

Network Monitoring

Sniffing the Network

There are number of network sniffing open source tools like:

  • Aircrack-ng
  • Kismet

Packet sniffing (packet capture)

The process of intercepting network packets in their entirety for analysis.

Promiscuous Mode

A type of computer networking operational mode in which all network data packets can be accessed and viewed by all network adapters operating in this mode.

Port mirroring

Allows the switch to take all packets from a specified port, port range, or entire VLAN and mirror the packets to a specified switch port.

Monitor mode

Allows us to scan across channels to see all wireless traffic being sent by APs and clients.

Wireshark and tcpdump

Tcpdump

A super popular, lightweight, command-line based utility that you can use to capture and analyze packets.

Wireshark

A graphical tool for traffic monitoring, that is more powerful and easier to use than tcpdump.

Intrusion Detection/Prevention System

IDS or IPS systems operate by monitoring network traffic and analyzing it.

  • They look for matching behavior for malicious packets.
  • IDS on logs the packets, while IPS can change firewall rules on the fly to drop malicious packets.
  • IDS/IPS may be host-based or network-based.

Network Intrusion Detection System (NIDS)

The detection system would be deployed somewhere on a network, where it can monitor traffic for a network segment or subnet.

Some popular NIDS system are:

NIDS NIDS

NIDS NIDS

Unified Threat Management (UTM)

UTM solutions stretch beyond the traditional firewall to include an array of network security tools with a single management interface. UTM simplifies the configuration and enforcement of security controls and policies, saving time and resources. Security event logs and reporting are also centralized and simplified to provide a holistic view of network security events.

UTM options and configurations

UTM solutions are available with a variety of options and configurations to meet the network security needs of an organization:

UTM hardware and software options:

  • Stand-alone UTM network appliance
  • Set of UTM networked appliances or devices
  • UTM server software application(s)

Extent of UTM protection options:

  • Single host
  • Entire network

UTM security service and tool options can include:

  • Firewalls
  • IDS
  • IPS
  • Antivirus software
  • Anti-malware software
  • Spam gateway
  • Web and content filters
  • Data leak/loss prevention (DLP)
  • VPN

Stream-based vs. proxy-based UTM inspections

UTM solutions offer two methods for inspecting packets in UTM firewalls, IPS, IDS, and VPNs:

  • Stream-based inspection, also called flow-based inspection: UTM ddevices,inspects data samples from packets for malicious content and threats as the packets flow through the device in a stream of data. This process minimizes the duration of the security inspection, which keeps network data flowing at a faster rate than a proxy-based inspection.
  • Proxy-based inspection: A UTM network appliance works as a proxy server for the flow of network traffic. The UTM appliance intercepts packets and uses them to reconstruct files. Then the UTM device will analyze the file for threats before allowing the file to continue on to its intended destination. Although this security screening process is more thorough than the stream-based inspection technique, proxy-based inspections are slower in the transmission of data.

Benefits of using UTM

  • UTM can be cost-effective
  • UTM is flexible and adaptable
  • UTM offers integrated and centralized management

Risk of using UTM

  • UTM can become a single point of failure in a network security attack
  • UTM might be a waste of resources for small businesses

Home Network Security

Employees, who work from home, use home networks to access company files and programs. Using home networks creates security challenges for companies. Companies can provide employees guidance for protecting their home networks from attacks. This reading will cover common attacks on home networks and steps to make home networks more secure.

Common security vulnerabilities

  • Meddler in the middle attacks allows a meddler to get between two communication devices or applications. The meddler then replies as the sender and receiver without either one knowing they are not communicating with the correct person, device, or application. These attacks allow the meddler to obtain login credentials and other sensitive information.

    Common Security Vuln Common Security Vuln

  • Data Theft is when data within the network is stolen, copied, sent, or viewed by someone who should not have access.

  • Ransomware uses malware to keep users from accessing important files on their network. Hackers grant access to the files after receiving a ransom payment.

Keeping home networks secure

  • Change the default name and password
  • Limit access to the home network
  • Create a guest network
  • Turn on Wi-Fi network encryption
  • Turn on the router’s firewall
  • Update to the newer Wi-Fi standard

Defense in Depth

System Hardening

Intro to Defense in Depth

The concept of having multiple, overlapping systems of defense to protect IT systems.

Disabling Unnecessary Components

Two important security risk mitigation components:

  • Attack Vectors
  • Attack surfaces

The less complex something is, the less likely there will be undetected flaws.

Another way to keep things simple is to reduce your software deployments.

  • Telnet access for a managed switch has no business being enabled in a real-world environment.

Attack vector

The method or mechanism by which an attacker or malware gains access to a network or system.

Attack surface

The sum of all the different attack vectors in a given system.

Host-Based Firewall

Protect individuals hosts from being compromised when they’re used in untrusted, potentially malicious environments.

A host-based firewall plays a big part in reducing what’s accessible to an outside attacker.

If the users of the systems have administrator rights, then they have the ability to change firewall rules and configuration.

Bastion Hosts

Bastion hosts are specially hardened and minimized in terms of what is permitted to run on them. Typically, bastion hosts are expected to be exposed to the internet, so special attention is paid to hardening and locking them down to minimize the chances of compromise.

  • These are servers that are specifically hardened and minimized to reduce what’s permitted to run on them.

Logging and Auditing

Security Information and Event Management (SIEM) system is a centralized log management system.

Once logs are centralized and standardized, you can write an automated alerting based on rules.

Some open source logging servers SIEM solutions:

Defense in Depth Defense in Depth

Antimalware Protection

Lots of unprotected systems would be compromised in a matter of minutes if directly connected to the internet without any safeguards or protections in place.

  • Antivirus software will monitor and analyze things, like new files being created or being modified on the system, in order to watch for any behavior that matches a known malware signature.
  • Antivirus software is just one piece of our anti-malware defenses.
  • There are binary whitelisting defense software, that only allow white listed programs on the system.

Is antivirus really that useful? Sophos antivirus was maliciously compromised. How hackers bypassed the binary whitelisting defenses?

Defense in Depth Defense in Depth

Disk Encryption

Home directory or file-based encryption only guarantees confidentiality and integrity of files protected by encryption.

Full-disk encryption (FDE)

Works by automatically converting data on a hard drive into a form that cannot be understood by anyone who doesn’t have the key to “undo” the conversation.

  • When you implement a full disk encryption solution at scale, it’s super important to think how to handle cases where passwords are forgotten.

Defense in Depth Defense in Depth

Key Escrow

Allows the encryption key to be securely stored for later retrieval by an authorized party.

Application Hardening

Software Patch Management

As an IT Support Specialist, it’s critical that you make sure that you install software updates and security patches in a timely way, in order to defend your company’s systems and networks.

The best protection is to have a good system and policy in place for your company.

Critical infrastructure devices should be approached carefully when you apply updates. There’s always the risk that a software update will introduce a new bug that might affect the functionality of the device.

Browser Hardening

The methods include evaluating sources for trustworthiness, SSL certificates, password managers, and browser security best practices. Techniques for browser hardening are significant components in enterprise-level IT security policies. These techniques can also be used to improve internet security for organizations of any size and for individual users.

Identifying trusted versus untrusted sources

  • Use antivirus and anti-malware software and browser extensions
  • Check for SSL certificates
  • Ensure the URL displayed in the address bar shows the correct domain name.
  • Search for negative reviews of the website from trusted sources.
  • Don’t automatically trust website links provided by people or organizations you trust.
  • Use hashing algorithms for downloaded files.

Secure connections and sites

Secure Socket Layer (SSL) certificates are issued by trusted certificate authorities (CA), such as DigiCert. An SSL certificate indicates that any data submitted through a website will be encrypted. A website with a valid SSL certificate has been inspected and verified by the CA. You can find SSL certificates by performing the following steps:

  1. Check the URL in the address bar. The URL should begin with the https:// protocol. If you see http:// without the “s”, then the website is not secure.
  2. Click on the closed padlock icon in the address bar to the left of the URL. An open lock indicates that the website is not secure.
  3. A pop-up menu should open. Websites with SSL certificates will have a menu option labeled “Connection is secure.” Click on this menu item.
  4. A new pop-up menu will appear with a link to check the certificate information. The layout and wording of this pop-up will vary depending on which browser you are using. When you review the certificate, look for the following items:
    • The name of this suer – Make sure it is a trusted certificate authority.
    • The domain it was issue to – This is name should match the website domain name.
    • The expiration date – The certificate should not have passed its expiration date.

Note that cybercriminals can obtain SSL certificates too. So, this is not a guarantee that the site is safe. CAs also vary in how thorough they are in their inspections.

Application Policies

A common recommendation, or even a requirement, is to only support or require the latest version of a piece of software.

It’s generally a good idea to disallow risky classes of software by policy. Things like file sharing software and piracy-related software tend to be closely associated with malware infections.

Understanding what your users need to do their jobs will help shape your approach to software policies and guidelines.

Helping your users accomplish tasks by recommending or supporting specific software makes for a more secure environment.

Extensions that require full access to websites visited can be risky, since the extension developer has the power to modify pages visited.

Creating a Company Culture for Security

Risk in the Workplace

Security Goals

If your company handles credit card payments, then you have to follow the PCI DSS, or Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard.

PCI DSS is subdivided into 6 broad objectives:

  1. Build and maintain a secure network and systems.
  2. Protect cardholder data.
  3. Maintain a vulnerability management program.
  4. Implement strong access control measures.
  5. Regularly monitor and test networks.
  6. Maintain an information security policy.

Measuring and Assessing Risk

Security is all about determining risks or exposure; understanding the likelihood of attacks; and designing defenses around these risks to minimize the impact of an attack.

  • Security risk assessment starts with threat modeling.
  • High-value data usually includes account information, like usernames and passwords. Typically, any kind of user data is considered high value, especially if payment processing is involved.
  • Another way to assess risk is through vulnerability scanning.
  • Conducting regular penetration testing to check your defenses.

Vulnerability Scanner

A computer program designed to assess computers, computer systems, networks, or applications for weaknesses.

Some examples are:

Creating a Company Culture for Security Creating a Company Culture for Security

Penetration testing

The practice of attempting to break into a system or network to verify the systems in place.

Privacy Policy

Privacy policies oversee the access and use of sensitive data.

  • Periodic audits of access logs.
  • It’s a good practice to apply the principle of least privilege here, by not allowing access to this type of data by default.
  • Any access that doesn’t have a corresponding request should be flagged as a high-priority potential breach that need to be investigated as soon as possible.
  • Data-handling policies should cover the details of how different data is classified.
  • Once different data classes are defined, you should create guidelines around how to handle these different types of data.

Data Destruction

Data destruction makes data unreadable to an operating system or application. You should destroy data on devices no longer used by a company, unused or duplicated copies of data, or data that’s required to destroy. Data destruction methods include:

  • Recycling: erasing the data from a device for reuse
  • Physical destruction: destroying the device itself to prevent access to data
  • Outsourcing: using an external company specializing in data destruction to handle the process

For more information about disposing of electronics, please visit Proper Disposal of Electronic Devices, a resource from CISA.

Users

User Habits

You can build the world’s best security systems, but they won’t protect you if the users are going to be practicing unsafe security.

  • You should never upload confidential information onto a third-party service that hasn’t been evaluated by your company.
  • It’s important to make sure employees use new and unique passwords, and don’t reuse them from other services.
  • A much greater risk in the workplace that users should be educated on is credential theft from phishing emails.
  • If someone entered their password into a phishing site, or even suspects they did, it’s important to change their password asap.

Creating a Company Culture for Security Creating a Company Culture for Security

Third-Party Security

If they have subpar security, you’re undermining your security defenses by potentially opening a new avenue of attack.

Google Vendor Security Assessment Questionnaire

  • If you can, ask for a third-party security assessment report.

Security Training

Helping others keep security in mind will help decrease the security burdens you’ll have as an IT Support Specialist.

Incident Handling

Incident Reporting and Analysis

The very first step of handling an incident is to detect it in the first place.

The next step is to analyze it and determine the effects and scope of damage.

Once the scope of the incident is determined, the next step is containment.

  • If an account was compromised, change the password immediately. If the owner is unable to change the password right away, then lock the account.

Creating a Company Culture for Security Creating a Company Culture for Security

Another part of incident analysis is determining severity, impact, and recoverability of the incident.

  • Severity includes factors like what and how many systems were compromised, and how the breach affects business functions.
  • The impact of an incident is also an important issue to consider.

Data exfiltration

The unauthorized transfer of data from a computer.

Recoverability

How complicated and time-consuming the recovery effort will be.

Incident Response

Incident handling requires careful attention and documentation during an incident investigation’s analysis and response phases.

  • Be familiar with what types of regulated data may be on your systems, and ensure proper procedures are in place to ensure your organization’s compliance.
  • DRM technologies can be beneficial for safeguarding business-critical documents or sensitive information and helping organizations comply with data protection regulations.
  • When incident analysis involves the collection of forensic evidence, you must thoroughly document the chain of custody.

Incident Response and Recovery

Update firewall rules and ACLs if an exposure was discovered in the course of the investigation.

Create new definitions and rules for intrusion detection systems that can watch for the signs of the same attack again.

Mobile Security and Privacy

  • Screen lock
  • Storage encryption
  • Apps permissions

Bring Your Own Device (BYOD)

Organizations are taking advantage of the cost savings created by adopting “bring your own device” (BYOD) policies for employees. However, permitting employees to connect personal mobile devices to company networks introduces multiple security threats. There are a variety of security measures that IT departments can implement to protect organizations’ information systems:

  • Develop BYOD policies
  • Enforce BYOD policies with MDM software
  • Distribute MDS settings to multiple OSes through Enterprise Mobile Management (EMM) systems
  • Require MFA
  • Create acceptable use policies for company data and resources
  • Require employees to sign NDAs
  • Limit who can access data
  • Train employees on data security
  • Back up data regularly

BYOD policy: An in-depth guide from an IT leader

Final Project: Creating a Company Culture for Security Design Document

Assignment

In this project, you’ll create a security infrastructure design document for a fictional organization. The security services and tools you describe in the document must be able to meet the needs of the organization. Your work will be evaluated according to how well you met the organization’s requirements.

About the Organization

This fictional organization has a small, but growing, employee base, with 50 employees in one small office. The company is an online retailer of the world’s finest artisanal, hand-crafted widgets. They’ve hired you on as a security consultant to help bring their operations into better shape.

Organization Requirements

As the security consultant, the company needs you to add security measures to the following systems:

  • An external website permitting users to browse and purchase widgets
  • An internal intranet website for employees to use
  • Secure remote access for engineering employees
  • Reasonable, basic firewall rules
  • Wireless coverage in the office
  • Reasonably secure configurations for laptops

Since this is a retail company that will be handling customer payment data, the organization would like to be extra cautious about privacy. They don’t want customer information falling into the hands of an attacker due to malware infections or lost devices.

Engineers will require access to internal websites, along with remote, command line access to their workstations.

Security Plan

This plan will explain the steps required for improving the security of the organization’s existing infrastructure, depending upon their needs and requirements.

Centralized Access Management System

The company should deploy some directory services like OpenLDAP or Windows Active Directory service so:

  • Centralized management of permissions to company infrastructure
  • Group based permissions: Only software engineers should have access to the source code, only sales people should have access to the sales data etc.
  • To better manage passwords, and ability to centrally reset and change them when required.
  • Revoke Ex-employee’s access to the company infrastructure.
  • Company network should be divided into Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANS), to containerize every department to their premise.

External Website Security

To make the company’s website secure from external threats:

  • Make sure admin pages are not exposed on the clearnet. You can robo.txt to tell Google Website Crawler to don’t crawl them.
  • When a user, signs up for the website or enter any query in the website console, the standards, and methods for query sanitization and validation should be in place.
  • Make sure the website uses HTTPS to ensure encrypted communication across the servers.
  • Place firewall rules and IPS/IDS systems for threat detection and prevention.

As the company is involved in the online retail, make sure:

  • PCI DSS standards are met for secure debit and credit cards transactions.
  • Only those employees should have access to stored data, that explicitly need it.

Internal Intranet Website

To make the company’s internal website is secure:

  • Configure the website as such that it should only be accessible through the company’s internal network.
  • To make sure the employees working away from the office have access to the internal website and other resources, use Virtual Private Networks (VPNs), or Reverse Proxy for secure tunnel.

Remote Connections

To give remote access:

  • Use Secure Shell (SSH), Virtual Private Networks, or Reverse Proxies.

Firewalls and IPS/IDS Solutions

  • Host based firewalls should be used on employees’ laptops.
  • Network-based firewalls should be used to protect the company’s network.
  • Intrusion Detection and Intrusion Prevention Systems (IDS/IPS) should in-place.
  • There should be some kind of monitoring and alerting system, to tell you of the suspicious activity on your network.
  • Firewalls should only allow traffic explicitly mentioned in the rules list, instead of allowing every packet to enter the network.

Wireless Security

To protect wireless traffic:

  • Use WPA2 security protocol which uses modern cipher technology AES for encryption which is a lot harder to crack than old WEP or WPA.
  • Install protection against IP Spoofing attacks and Rogue AP attacks.
  • Divide your network into vLANs, one for guests and one for employees.
  • Employees AP should use whitelisting MAC address to allow connection to the network.

Employees Laptop Configuration

The laptops should equip with:

  • Full-disk encryption
  • Host-based firewalls with whitelisting rules for better security
  • Managing the accounts and passwords for laptop through AD.
  • The employees should not leave their laptops logged in and unlocked on their desks or café.

The Company Security Culture

The humans are always the first line of defense for any system or organization, so educating them about the security is more necessary than anything else.

  • Organize seminar, record short videos, have small sessions occasionally to educate your employees about imminent security threats, and latest security techniques.
  • Educate them about phishing attacks to avoid any stolen data or credentials.
  • There should be small exercise including quizzes and real life examples of what not to do in security realm, how to react if you get phished or hacked after every possible cautionary step.

IBM IT Support Professional Certificate

1. Introduction to Technical Support

This is the IBM version of introduction to IT Support. But it also gives information about different ticketing systems and service level agreements. It provides details about job opportunities and different skill levels in the field.

It has following sub-modules…

2. Introduction to Hardware and Operating Systems

This course is all about building computers and installing different operating systems on them. It also explains about computer connectors and their types, and peripheral devices. In the end, it gives details about how to troubleshoot a system step by step.

It has been divided into following modules…

3. Introduction to Software, Programming, and Databases

It goes into details about different computing platforms and types of software applications. It also lists down the available web-browsers, types of cloud computing, basics of programming and types of database queries.

It has following 4 sub-modules…

4. Introduction to Networking and Storage

It teaches about the types of networks, like LAN, WAN etc. It lists down the storage types and also goes into the details of troubleshooting common networking problems like DNS issues etc.

This course has following sub-topics…

5. Introduction to Cybersecurity Essentials

This courses teaches about:

  • Everyday digital threats like viruses, malware, social engineering etc.
  • How to remain safe online and how to use password management techniques to remain protected.
  • While surfing the web, how to avoid phishing and other threats.

and more…

It has 4 sub-modules…

6. Introduction to Cloud Computing

Learning opportunities are:

  • PaaS, IaaS, SaaS
  • Private, public and hybrid cloud models
  • Types virtual machines, hypervisors etc

and more…

This course talks about these topics…

Subsections of IBM IT Support

Subsections of Introduction

Industry Professional's Guide to Technical Support

Becoming a Technical Support Professional

Customer Service vs. Technical Support

Industry Professional’s Guide to Technical Support Industry Professional’s Guide to Technical Support

Why do companies use technical support?

  • Troubleshooting technical issues
  • Setting up accounts
  • Repairing and replacing
  • Assisting with network security
  • Training on hardware and software
  • Logging and tracking
  • Fostering positive relationships

Who uses technical support?

Industry Professional’s Guide to Technical Support Industry Professional’s Guide to Technical Support

Why is technical support important?

  • Companies provide solutions to customers
  • Positive experiences = increase in business
  • More trustworthy
  • Customer retention
  • Troubleshooting help
  • Product improvement
  • More desirable products

Why choose technical support?

Industry Professional’s Guide to Technical Support Industry Professional’s Guide to Technical Support

Why should you pick technical support?

  • Learn more about technology
  • Learn techniques for solving
  • Develop your professional skills
  • Build transferrable skills
  • Learn how to network to seek out
  • Open the door to many more careers

Career Opportunities in Technical Support

Technical support work environment

  • On-site at offices or call centers
  • Business offices and professional spaces
  • Remote working
  • Supporting clients and customers
  • Answering questions
  • Resolving technical issues

Technical support paths

  • Entry-level jobs
  • On-the-job training
  • Experience
  • Tiered approaches
    • Lower-tier
    • Mid-tier
    • Upper-tier

Industry Professional’s Guide to Technical Support Industry Professional’s Guide to Technical Support

Current jobs in technical support

Industry Professional’s Guide to Technical Support Industry Professional’s Guide to Technical Support

Industry Professional’s Guide to Technical Support Industry Professional’s Guide to Technical Support

Technical support career advantages:

Industry Professional’s Guide to Technical Support Industry Professional’s Guide to Technical Support

Technical Support Roles and Responsibilities

Many names of technical support

  • Technical Support Representative
  • Computer Support Representative
  • Technical/IT Support Technician
  • Desktop Support Technician
  • IT Help Desk Support Specialist
  • Desktop/IT Support Analyst

Roles of technical support

Industry Professional’s Guide to Technical Support Industry Professional’s Guide to Technical Support

Help Desk & Support Technicians

Industry Professional’s Guide to Technical Support Industry Professional’s Guide to Technical Support

Technical Support Specialists & Engineers

Industry Professional’s Guide to Technical Support Industry Professional’s Guide to Technical Support

IT Support Analysts & Specialists

Industry Professional’s Guide to Technical Support Industry Professional’s Guide to Technical Support

Service Desk Technicians & Analysts

Industry Professional’s Guide to Technical Support Industry Professional’s Guide to Technical Support

A day of Technical Support

Industry Professional’s Guide to Technical Support Industry Professional’s Guide to Technical Support

Introduction to IT Infrastructure

  • Hardware
    • PCs
    • Mobile devices
    • Servers
    • Data centers
    • Hubs
    • Routers
    • Switches
  • Software
    • CMS
    • CRM
    • ERP
    • Collaboration, productivity, and business-specific apps
    • Web servers
    • Operating systems
  • Network
    • Routers
    • Data centers
    • Hubs
    • Switches
    • Security Software

Types of IT infrastructure

  • Traditional IT infrastructure
  • Cloud IT infrastructure

Troubleshooting IT Infrastructure

  • Troubleshooting within the IT infrastructure
  • A customer’s computer isn’t working
  • The client needs password reset
  • Customers are unable to access
  • A cyber threat is identified and neutralized
  • Communication allows working quickly to identify issues and implement solutions

Technical Support Skills and Opportunities

Technical Support Soft Skills

What are soft skills?

  • Positive behaviors and attitudes
  • Effectively communicate, collaborate, and manage
  • Actively listen to clients
  • Work with others to resolve problems
  • Diffuse stressful situations

Soft skills

  • Customer service mindset
  • Communication
  • Organization
  • Leadership
  • Problem-solving
  • Flexible and adaptable

Positive behaviors and attitudes

  • Knowledge of technology is one part
  • Work with others and manage social situations
  • Positive behaviors and attitudes
  • Effectively communicate, collaborate, and manage conflict

Set yourself up for success

  • Use your soft skills
  • Ask questions
  • Take good notes
  • Stay organized
  • Say “I don’t know” and “I’ll find out”

Customer Support mindset

  • Empathetic
  • Customer-centered
  • Patient

Learn to improve

  • Document your notes as you work
  • Read suggestions and notes from supervisors
  • Learn techniques to help you withstand pressure and reduce stress

Experienced background

  • Lack of work experience does not mean that you lack interest in technology
  • Use your passion for technology to boost your self-confidence
  • Positive behaviors and attitudes
  • Be willing to level-up your soft skills

Soft-skills tune-up

  • Additional online courses
  • Podcasts, audiobooks
  • Peers and social groups

Basics of Technical Skills

The job interview

Technical Support Skills and Opportunities Technical Support Skills and Opportunities

Basic programming and coding

  • Machine code and source code
  • Compiled programming and interpreted programming languages
  • Programming languages like C, Java, HTML, Python, and JavaScript
  • Basic-level coding

Computers and operating systems

  • Basic knowledge of android, iOS, Windows, Linux, macOS is necessary.

SQL and NoSQL basics

  • Basic knowledge of both
  • Differences of SQL and NoSQL
  • SQL queries retrieve information
  • NoSQL databases are nonrelational databases with unstructured data
  • Technical support services for databases
  • Database application services, management, security, backups, updates, and optimization

Analyze application logs

  • View information about events that have occurred in an application
  • Read and analyze application logs
  • Track information about the application
  • Includes timestamps for tracking issues
  • Logs levels of issues with labels

Server knowledge

  • Understand servers
  • Settings up and configuring servers
  • Updating server software
  • Monitoring and maintaining servers
  • Maximizing uptime
  • Managing virtual servers

Support ticket workflow

  • Track and manage client questions and issues
  • Zendesk, Jira, and LiveAgent
  • Similar workflow for most ticketing systems

Using knowledge base

  • Knowledge base skills
  • A collection of a group’s knowledge
    • Search
    • Read
    • Understand

New hardware and applications

  • Trying new hardware and applications
  • Interest in emerging technology

Additional technical tools

  • VMs
  • VPNs
  • Network security
  • IT infrastructure monitoring software
  • Enterprise hardware

Performance Evaluation of Technical Support Professionals

Performance evaluations

What is the purpose of a performance evaluation?

Technical Support Skills and Opportunities Technical Support Skills and Opportunities

What you should expect?

  • Accomplishing responsibilities
    • Possess technical knowledge and skills necessary to perform your job
    • Understand company policies and procedures
    • Complete required records, documents, and tickets
  • Decision-making
    • Evaluate issues
    • Work on your own
    • Recognize problems
    • Make decisions
  • Productivity
    • Complete tasks in a timely and efficient manner
    • Work according to instructions
    • Ask for help, when needed
  • Customer service
    • Strong commitment to customers
    • Work towards a solution
    • Call recordings
    • Customer ratings
    • Time-to-resolve measurements
    • First-contact resolution and contacts per customer
    • Average number of tickets handled
  • Work attitude
    • Positive attitude for work and responsibilities
    • Effective working relationships with others
    • Positive attitude toward suggestions
  • Communication skills
    • You write clearly, and effectively
    • You understand written and spoken communication
  • Goal achievements
    • Your new certifications and skills
    • Achievement of professional goals
    • How you have improved

Benefits to performance evaluations

  • Your role performance
  • Recognition for your accomplishments
  • Share your “good job” moments
  • Discuss goals and ways to meet goals
  • Provide opportunities for advancement

Career Paths and Progression in Technical Support

Technical Support entry-level roles

  • IT support specialist
  • IT technician
  • Help Desk technician
  • Desktop Support Specialist
  • Field Service Technician

Skills for entry-level roles

  • Access data and share with those who need it
  • Actively listen to clients and their description of computer-related issues
  • Ask questions to determine the problem
  • Guide customers through steps to resolve problems
  • Train users on new computers and software
  • Note changes, updates, and issues
  • Share information with other team members and managers

Experience for entry-level roles

  • IT experience or a degree not required
  • Customer service experience is beneficial
  • Knowledge of technology is a plus
  • Increase your chances of getting a better job
  • Professional certificates
  • A computer science or related degree

Technical support mid-level roles

  • Help desk analyst
  • Technical support specialist
  • Tier II Support

Skills for mid-level roles

  • Test and maintain equipment and software
  • Try out new systems and programs
  • Communicate with clients about technology use
  • Train users on how to use new hardware and applications
  • Communicate on proper use of technology
  • Train new technical support team

Experience for mid-level roles

  • Technical support specialist level 2
  • 1 to 3 years of experience
  • With on-the-job training
  • Certifications, Cisco, Microsoft, and CompTIA, like A+, Network+, Security+
  • Technical support specialist level 3
    • 3 to 5 years of experience
    • Advanced on-the-job training
    • Certifications similar to level 2

Technical support upper-level roles

  • Technical support lead or manager
  • IT support team lead
  • Field engineer supervisor

Skills for upper-level roles

  • Manage systems and capabilities
  • Research and explore new systems, software, and processes
  • Train users on standard usage practices for hardware and software
  • Manage ongoing issues in projects
  • Communicate changes in policies to organization management
  • Manage and train teams

Experience for upper-level roles

  • On-the-job training in leadership
  • 5 or more years of experience
  • ITIL, SixSigma, and relevant certifications

Technical Support Paths

  • Use technical support experience to switch to other IT roles
  • Develop cross-skills you can apply to other roles
  • Consider tasks and responsibilities you enjoy
  • Interview for roles that want to know more about

Cross-skills and up-skill paths

  • Use cross-skills you learn on the job to move to better roles
  • Level-up skills to promote to more roles

Cross-skill and up-skill roles

  • Network Administrator
  • Network Security Analyst
  • Database Administrator
  • Cloud Developer
  • QA Engineer
  • Software Developer

Industry Certifications for Technical Support

What are industry certifications?

  • Certify skills meet industry standards
  • Confirm understanding of strategies and concepts
  • Validate knowledge about information technology (IT)
  • Certify that starting skill requirements are met
  • Show specialization in the field

Certifications

  • Certifications for starting a career in technical support
    • CompTIA, Microsoft, Apple, ITIL Foundation, and Cisco

CompTIA IT Fundamentals (ITF+)

  • For starting in IT
  • Demonstrates basic IT knowledge and skills

CompTIA A+ for progressing in technical support

Demonstrates mastery of:

  • Hardware
  • Software troubleshooting
  • Networking
  • Operating systems
  • Device and network troubleshooting
  • Security for devices and networks
  • Mobile devices Virtualization and Cloud computing
  • Operational procedures

CompTIA Network+

  • Networking path
  • Demonstrating skills for troubleshooting, configuring, and managing networks

Microsoft 365 Certified: Fundamentals

  • Microsoft role-based and specialty-based certifications

Apple Certified Support Professional (ACSP)

  • For technical support for Mac users
  • macOS, troubleshooting, and support

ITIL Foundation certifications

  • Start at support center courses
  • Develop skills in supporting customers, IT role functions, and troubleshooting methods

Cisco Certified Network Associate (CCNA)

  • Demonstrate knowledge of networking
  • Highlights skills in administering network maintenance, creating secure network access, and improving network connectivity
  • Certification are not required
  • Begin by studying for certifications
  • Some employers offer assistance
  • Ask about certification opportunities

Support Tools, Support Tiers, and Service-Level Agreements

Overview of Support Channels

  • Self-support channels
    • Self-help
    • Wikis
    • FAQs
    • Knowledge base
    • Documentation
    • Discussion Forums
  • Email support
    • Asynchronous support
    • Not a real-time exchange
  • Social media support
    • Asynchronous support
  • Phone support
    • Synchronous support
    • Urgent issues
    • Sensitive information
    • Real-time support
  • Live-chat support
  • Video chat support
    • Virtual hands on support
  • Remote support
    • Host device to customer device
  • In-person support
    • Hands-on troubleshooting
    • Preventive maintenance services
    • Hardware support

Ticketing systems

  • Create ticket
  • Document, track, and manage customer issues to resolution
  • Convert emails to tickets
  • Log phone sessions
  • Users submit tickets

Remote Support Tools

Two types of remote support

  • Attended
    • Customer is at a device
    • Immediate resolution
    • Hands-on support
    • Faster resolution times
    • Customer satisfaction
  • Unattended
    • Maintenance of groups of users and servers
    • Doesn’t require permission from users to access their computers
    • Users don’t need to be at their computers
    • Installing updates
    • Managing the IT infrastructure
    • Troubleshooting issues on many devices

Tools

  • ConnecWise
  • TeamViewer
  • Dameware
  • BeyondTrust
  • ZoHo Assist
  • Windows Remote Assistance

Common Features

  • Remote control and screen sharing
  • File sharing
  • Secure devices
  • Transfer support sessions
  • Multiple monitors
  • Virtual agent and chatbots
  • Training and education in IT
  • Pre-installed support
    • ML/AI embedded solutions
  • Proactive technical support
  • Cloud-connected support
  • Video chats
  • Technical support i virtual spaces
  • All-in-one support platforms

Levels of Technical Support

Need for tiered support

  • Route technical support issues
  • Handle a large volume of issues
  • Increase customer satisfaction
  • Improve technical support

Levels of technical support

Support Tools, Support Tiers, and Service-Level Agreements Support Tools, Support Tiers, and Service-Level Agreements

Technical support skills required

Support Tools, Support Tiers, and Service-Level Agreements Support Tools, Support Tiers, and Service-Level Agreements

Service-Level Agreements (SLAs)

SLAs in technical support

  • Legal agreements

    Ensure:

  • Quality

  • Timeliness

  • Availability

  • Expectations

SLA contracts

  • Support available
  • Free or paid version
  • Accepted contract

SLA details

  • Agreement summary
  • Goals of business and users
  • Consequences of violations
  • Points of contact

Types of SLAs:

  • Customer-based
  • Service-based
  • Multiple

SLA priority levels

Support Tools, Support Tiers, and Service-Level Agreements Support Tools, Support Tiers, and Service-Level Agreements

Response SLAs vs Resolution SLAs

Support Tools, Support Tiers, and Service-Level Agreements Support Tools, Support Tiers, and Service-Level Agreements

SLA management

  • Track
  • Monitor
  • Prioritize
  • Automate
  • Report

The Escalation Matrix

Escalation management

  • Builds trust and support
  • Improves business
  • Improves communication
  • Boosts satisfaction

Escalation Process

  • Escalation paths
    1. Functional
    2. Hierarchical
    3. Automatic

1) Functional escalation

Support Tools, Support Tiers, and Service-Level Agreements Support Tools, Support Tiers, and Service-Level Agreements

2) Hierarchical escalation

Support Tools, Support Tiers, and Service-Level Agreements Support Tools, Support Tiers, and Service-Level Agreements

3) Automatic escalation

Support Tools, Support Tiers, and Service-Level Agreements Support Tools, Support Tiers, and Service-Level Agreements

Escalation matrix

Support Tools, Support Tiers, and Service-Level agreements Support Tools, Support Tiers, and Service-Level agreements

Handoffs in technical support

  • Help to resolve an issue
  • Encourage information sharing
  • Prevent incomplete documentation
  • Lead to faster resolution

Ticketing Systems

What are ticketing systems?

  • A support ticket records the interaction between a customer and a service representative
  • Documents issues and their progress/resolution
  • Ticket also called Issue, Case, Incident, etc.
  • Support tickets are managed by a ticketing system
  • These systems may also be called:
    • Helpdesk software
    • Customer support software
    • Ticketing software/app
    • Case Management System or Customer Care Management System

What is a ticketing system?

  • Software used to systematically document, track, manage, and resolve customer issues.
  • Creation of tickets
  • Central data hub

What a ticketing system provides

  • Automation
  • Collaboration
  • Integration
  • Channels
  • Reporting

Lifecycle of a ticket

  • Create a ticket
  • Assign and Start ticket issue
  • Resolve issue
  • Close ticket

Features and Benefits of Ticketing Systems

Common features

  • Omnichannel support
    • Email
    • Social media
    • Live chat
    • Phone
  • Ticket routing
  • Ticket categorization and tagging
    • Categorization
    • Tagging
    • Routing
    • Ticket status
  • Tracking and measurement
    • Tracking
    • Analytics
  • Knowledge base management
  • Automation
    • Helps get to the right person at the right time
    • Automation:
      • Assigning tickets
      • Sending responses
      • Escalate issues
      • Pulling customer data
    • Reduce time spent on repetitive tasks
    • Help make agents more engaged and productive

What to look for

  • Agent productivity
  • Customer interactions
  • Metrics
  • Continuous improvement
  • Collaboration

Types of ticketing systems

  • Cloud based
  • Self hosted
  • Open source
  • Enterprise

Cloud based systems

Benefits

  • Easier to set up and maintain
  • Scalable
  • Availability

Concerns

  • Vendor must resolve issues
  • Internet connection always required
  • Limited customization

Self-hosted systems

Benefits

  • Complete control of data and security
  • More customizable

Concerns

  • Initial investment
  • Server maintenance
  • Updates and fixes
  • Backups

Open-source systems

Benefits

  • Free or mostly free
  • Highly customizable
  • Developer community

Concerns

  • Knowledgeable developers
  • Long installation timeline
  • In house updating and maintenance

Enterprise systems

Benefits

  • Asset management and reporting
  • Support 24 hours a day
  • Highly customizable

Concerns

  • Expensive
  • Higher level of training
  • Zendesk
  • Jira Service Desk
  • Freshdesk
  • LiveAgent
  • ServiceNow

Common features

  • Omnichannel support
  • Automation
  • Collaboration
  • Knowledge Base
  • Subscription Based
  • Free trials

Zendesk

  • Cloud based
  • Pre-built Integrations
  • Collaboration
  • Knowledge base
  • Live chat/chatbots
  • Macros
  • Expensive

Jira Service Desk

  • Cloud or self-hosted
  • Built on Jira
  • Expandable
  • External knowledge base
  • Limited chat
  • Automation

Freshdesk

  • Cloud based
  • Custom ticket views
  • AI powered chatbots
  • Freshworks academy
  • Moderate pricing

LiveAgent

  • Cloud based
  • Emphasized live chat
  • Advanced integration
  • Chat widget
  • Unlimited email addresses
  • Moderate pricing

ServiceNow

  • Cloud based
  • ITSM Approach
  • Repeatable workflow
  • Advanced integration
  • Integrated mobile
  • Request quote

Troubleshooting

CompTIA troubleshooting model steps

  1. Identify the problem
  • Gather information
  • Question users
  • Identify symptoms
  • Determine if anything has changed
  • Duplicate the problem
  • Approach multiple problems individually
  1. Research the knowledge base/Internet
  • Knowledge base
  • Internet
  1. Establish a theory of probable cause
  • Question the obvious (Is the printer turned on?)
  • Consider more than one approach
  1. Test the theory to determine the cause
  • Are you successful?
  • More research and testing may be required
  1. Establish a plan of action
  • Some fixes may require reboots or downtime
  • May require downloading software or patches
  • Test in staging environment if available
  • Back up data
  • May require approval
  1. Implement the solution or escalate
  • Run scripts
  • Update systems or software
  • Update configuration files
  • Change firewall settings
  1. Verify full system functionality and implement preventive measures
  • Ask users to test functionality
  • Consider other servers or devices
  1. Document findings/lessons, actions, and outcomes
  • Full document your research, theories, changes, and updates
  • Add information to knowledge base
  • Useful if unintended consequences appear

Tech Support Methodologies and Frameworks

What is ITSM?

  • IT Service Management

  • Processes, activities, technologies, and people

  • Strategy for IT services

    Ticketing Systems Ticketing Systems

Implementing ITSM

  • Predefined frameworks
  • Guides with formalized structure
  • Standards, processes, and best practices

Popular ITSM frameworks have these features:

  • Strategy
  • Design
  • Management
  • Operation
  • Improvement

ITSM Frameworks

  • ITIL
  • COBIT
  • Lean IT
    • MOF
    • ISO/IEC 20000

ITIL

  • Information technology infrastructure library
  • Standardized set of detailed practices and processes
    • Service strategy
    • Service Design
    • Service Transition
    • Service Operation
    • Continual Service Improvement

COBIT and Lean IT frameworks

COBIT

  • For governance and management of IT
  • Uses processes contained in ITIL

Lean IT

  • Framework for applying lean principles to the delivery of IT services
  • Designed to cut out waste that doesn’t add value

MOF and ISO/IEC 20000 frameworks

Microsoft Operations Framework

  • Guidance for IT lifecycle
    • Plan phase
    • Deliver phase
    • Operate phase
    • Manage phase

ISO/IEC 20000

  • International standard for ITSM
  • Guidelines to establish, implement, operate and maintain

ITSM metrics

  • Customer Satisfaction (CSAT) scores
  • First-contact resolution
  • First-level resolution
  • Cost per ticket
  • Mean time to resolution

Benefits of ITSM processes

  • Consistency
  • Efficiency
  • Management
  • Risk and downtime
  • Operational costs
  • Standardization and accountability
  • Higher quality of service
  • Improved customer satisfaction
  • More agility

ITSM frameworks and technical support

  • People are part of ITSM
  • Processes based on service
  • Standards for managing IT services
  • IT solutions and knowledge
  • Technical support feedback

Effective Documentation and Communication

Communicating in technical support

  • Interest in technology
  • Ability to write clearly
  • Skills to Communicate

Effective communication

  • Informative communication
  • Clear explanations
  • Faster resolutions

Notes and communication

  • Notes
  • Word processing
  • Spreadsheets

Keep your audience in mind while taking notes or writing documentation and technical abilities and knowledge.

Order of steps

  • List what you have tried
  • State them chronologically
  • State them from most to least important
  • Use a clear order

Analysis of the problem

  • State what is or is not the problem
  • Show how you have worked through the problem
  • Include what led to the issue
  • Describe what worked in the past but did not this time

Communication tools

  • Keep it simple
  • Ask clear questions
  • Model others

Cheat sheet for Logging a Ticket

  • You noted the customer’s name and contact information.
  • You included the ticket or issue number and the date the ticket was created.
  • You documented the complete details of the problem or issue.
  • You noted the priority and urgency of the customer and the issue.
  • You logged the issue category, the department, and agent the issue is assigned to.
  • You included closing notes.

Subsections of Hardware and OS

Introduction to Computing Fundamentals

Introduction to Computing Fundamentals

  • The global IT spending on devices, including PCs, tablets, mobile phones, printers, as well as data center systems, enterprise software, and communication services came to 4.24 trillion USD in 2021.

  • It expected to increase by approximately 5.1 percent to around 4.45 trillion USD in 2022.

    A computer is a device or system that includes:

    Introduction to Computing Fundamentals Introduction to Computing Fundamentals

    Introduction to Computing Fundamentals Introduction to Computing Fundamentals

    Introduction to Computing Fundamentals Introduction to Computing Fundamentals

    Introduction to Computing Fundamentals Introduction to Computing Fundamentals

Functions of computing

Introduction to Computing Fundamentals Introduction to Computing Fundamentals

Benefits of computing

Introduction to Computing Fundamentals Introduction to Computing Fundamentals

Introduction to Computing Fundamentals Introduction to Computing Fundamentals

Common Computing Devices and Platforms

Introduction to Computing Fundamentals Introduction to Computing Fundamentals

Stationary computing devices

  • Remain on a desk, rack, or other stationary location.
  • Consist of a box or chassis.
  • Includes processors, storage, memory, input, and output connections.
  • Memory and storage, often updatable.

Workstations

  • Used at the office and at home.
  • Typically, in a hard box containing processors, memory, storage, slots.
  • Include connections for external devices and wireless connectivity.
  • Enable memory, storage, and graphic card upgrades.
  • Use Microsoft Windows, macOS, and Linux OSes.

Servers: functions

  • Installed on networks
  • Enabling shared access
    • Media storage – movies videos, sound
    • Web servers – websites
    • Print servers – print documents
    • File servers – files and documents
    • Email servers – email storage
  • Provide fault tolerance for businesses to keep working

Servers: hardware support

  • Motherboard providers hardware support for multiple:
    • Processors
    • Memory (RAM)
    • Graphic cards
    • Storage
    • Port connections

Servers: operating systems

Use operating systems that support distributed workloads:

  • Microsoft Windows Server
  • Linux
  • UNIX
  • Mac OS X
  • FreeBSD

Stationary devices: gaming consoles

  • Contain processors, memory, graphic processors (GPU), input ports, and output ports
  • Console include Microsoft Xbox, Sony PlayStation, and Nintendo
  • Hardware features enhanced memory caching and graphics processing
  • Required additional hardware devices such as wired or cabled handheld devices
  • Usually not upgradable

Mobile devices

  • Laptop processing power matches desktop performance
  • Tablets have both business and personal uses
  • Smartphones are a hub for life management
  • Portable and Wi-Fi enabled gaming systems abound
  • Transforming both business and personal life

IoT devices

  • Contain chips, sensors, input and output capabilities, and onboard software.

  • Enable the exchange of data with other devices and systems.

  • Communicate via Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, NFC, Zigbee, and other protocols.

  • Software updatable, but generally no hardware upgrades.

    Introduction to Computing Fundamentals Introduction to Computing Fundamentals

IoT devices: categorized

Introduction to Computing Fundamentals Introduction to Computing Fundamentals

Understanding How Computers Talk

Notational systems defined

A system of symbols that represent types of numbers.

Introduction to Computing Fundamentals Introduction to Computing Fundamentals

Notational systems – decimal

Introduction to Computing Fundamentals Introduction to Computing Fundamentals

Notational systems – binary

Introduction to Computing Fundamentals Introduction to Computing Fundamentals

Introduction to Computing Fundamentals Introduction to Computing Fundamentals

Convert to decimal to binary

Introduction to Computing Fundamentals Introduction to Computing Fundamentals

Convert binary to decimal

Introduction to Computing Fundamentals Introduction to Computing Fundamentals

Notational Systems – hexadecimal

  • Uses 16 digits, referred to as base 16, including the numbers 0 through 9, and the letters A through F.

  • Enables compact notation for large numbers

  • Used for MAC addresses, colors, IP addresses, and memory addresses

    Introduction to Computing Fundamentals Introduction to Computing Fundamentals

Convert hex to binary

  1. Note the hex number, and represent each hex digit by its binary equivalent number.
  2. Add insignificant zeros if the binary number has less than 4 digits. For example, write the decimal 10 as 0010.
  3. String (concatenate) all the binary digits together from left to right.
  4. Discard any leading zeros at the left of the concatenated number.

Introduction to Computing Fundamentals Introduction to Computing Fundamentals

The result is 100100011010.

Data Types

Introduction to Computing Fundamentals Introduction to Computing Fundamentals

Character Types

ASCII

American Standard Code for Information Interchange:

  • Developed from telegraph code and first published in 1963.
  • Translates computer text to human text.
  • Originally a 7-byte system (to save on transmission costs) representing 128 binary character.
  • Expanded to 8-bytes representing another 256 characters.
  • Full charts are available online.

Introduction to Computing Fundamentals Introduction to Computing Fundamentals

Unicode

Unicode includes ASCII and other characters from languages around the world, as well as emojis.

  • Web pages use UTF-8.
  • Popular programming languages use Unicode 16-bit encoding and a few use 32-bit.
  • Commonly formatted as U+hhhh, known as “code points”, where hhhh is character hexadecimal value.
  • Conversion services are available online.

Introduction to Computing Fundamentals Introduction to Computing Fundamentals

An Introduction to Operating Systems

Operating system basics

Operating systems consist of standardized code for:

Input>Output>Processing>Storage

  • CLI
  • GUI

Operating system history

Introduction to Computing Fundamentals Introduction to Computing Fundamentals

The first generation (1945-1955)

  • Operating systems that worked for multiple computers didn’t yet exist.
  • All input, output, processing, and storage instructions were coded every time, for every task.
  • This repetitive code became the basis for future operating systems.

The second generation (1955-1965)

  • Mainframe computers became available for commercial and scientific use.
  • Tape drives provided input and output storage.
  • In 1956, GM Research produced the first single-stream batch operating system for its IBM 704 computing system.
  • IBM became the first company to create OSes to accompany computers.
  • Embedded operating systems were developed in the early 1960s and are still in use.
    • Focus on a single task.
    • Provide split-second response times.
    • Real-time operating systems are a type of embedded operating system used in airplanes and air traffic control, space exploration.
    • As the time passed, real-time OSes started being used in satellite systems, Robotics, Cars/automobiles.

The third generation (1965-1980)

  • Additional companies began creating their own batch file operating systems for their large computing needs.
  • Network operating systems were developed during this time.
    • Provide scalable, fast, accurate, and secure network communications.
    • Enables workstations to operate independently.
  • In 1969, the UNIX operating system, operable on multiple computer systems, featured processor time-sharing.

The fourth generation (1980 to now)

  • Multitasking operating systems enable computers to perform multiple tasks at the same time.
    • Linux
      • 1991: Linus Torvalds created a small, open source PC operating system.
      • 1994: Version 1.0 released.
      • 1996: Version 2.0 released, included support for network-based SMP benefitting commercial and scientific data processing.
      • 2013: Google’s Linux-based mobile operating system, Android, took 75% of the mobile operating system market share.
      • 2018: IBM acquired Red Hat for $34 billion.
    • macOS
      • 1999: OS X and macOS, based on UNIX, offered with PowerPC with PowerPC-based Macs.
      • 2006: Apple began selling Macs using Intel Core processors.
      • 2020: Apple began the Apple Silicon chip transition, using self-designed 64-bit, ARM-based Apple M1 processors on new Mac computers.
    • Windows
      • 1981: MS-DOS launched
      • 1985: Launched a graphical user interface version of the Windows operating system.
      • 1995: Windows 95 catapulted Microsoft’s dominance in the consumer operating system software market.
      • Today, Microsoft holds about 70% of consumer desktop operating system market share.
      • Microsoft also offers network, server management, mobile, and phone operating systems.
    • ChromeOS
      • 2011: Launched ChromeOS, built atop Linux.
      • Offers a lightweight operating system built for mobile devices.
      • Requires less local storage and costs less.
      • Currently composes about 10% of the laptop market.
  • Mobile operating systems also fit the definition of multitasking operating systems.
    • Android
    • iOS
    • Windows
    • ChromeOS

Getting Started with Microsoft Windows

Logging into Windows

Four methods of logging into Windows

  • PIN
  • Password
  • Photo
  • Fingerprint

Using Keyboard Shortcuts

Introduction to Computing Fundamentals Introduction to Computing Fundamentals

Computing Devices and Peripherals

Identifying Hardware Components and Peripherals

What is a computer component?

  • A physical part needed for computer functioning, also called “hardware”.
  • Each component performs a specific task.
  • Components can be internal or external.
  • External components connect via ports and connectors.
  • Without a given component, such as a CPU, a computer system cannot function as desired.

Common internal components

A part inside a computing device:

  • RAM
  • Hard Drive
  • CPU

Peripherals

  • Connect to the computer to transfer data.
  • External devices easily removed and connected to a computer.
  • Connections vary
  • Examples: Mouse, Printer, and a Keyboard etc.

Categories of peripherals

  • Input – send commands to the computer
  • Output – receive commands from the computer
  • Storage – save files indefinitely

Connectors for Components

  • A connector is the unique end of a plug, jack, or the edge of a card that connects to a port.
  • For example, all desktop computer expansion cards have an internal connector that allows them to connect to a slot on the motherboard.
  • A Universal Serial Bus (USB) connector at the end of a cable is an example of an external connector.

Ports

  • A connector plugs into an opening on a computer called a port.
  • A port is the jack or receptacle for a peripheral device to plug into.
  • Ports are standardized for each purpose.
  • Common ports include USB ports and HDMI ports.

Input and Pointing Devices

Input Devices

  • Keyboards
  • Mouse
  • Camera
  • Joystick
  • Trackball

Pointing Devices

  • The stylus (Pen)
    • Input tool
    • Moves the cursor and sends commands
    • Generally used on tablets
    • Uses capacitive technology
    • Detects heat and pressure

Hard Drives

Hard drives:

  • are a repository for images, video, audio, and text.
  • RAM
  • ROM
  • HDD/SSD/NVMe

Hard drive performance

Measurement benchmarks

  • Spin speed: how fast the platter spins.
  • Access time: how fast the data is retrieved.
  • Transfer/media rate: how fast the data is written to the drive.

Connecting an internal hard drive

  • Back up data
  • transfer the enclosure
  • Secure with screws
  • prevent movement
  • attach to motherboard via SATA/PATA cables
  • plug into power supply
  • finally, it can be configured in the disk management utility of windows

Optical Drives and External Storage

Optical drives

Reading and writing data

  • Laser pressing or “burning”

  • Burning pits on lands

  • Reflective disk surface

    Storage disks

  • Single-sided

  • Double-side

Types of optical drive

Several types

  • CD-ROM
  • CD-RW
  • DVD-ROM
  • DVD-RW
  • Blu-ray

Solid state drives

Solid state drive → (SSD)

  • Integrated circuit assemblies store data
  • Flash memory
  • Permanent, secondary storage
  • AKA “solid state drive” or “solid state disk”
  • No moving parts
    • Unlike hard disk drives and floppy drives

External hard drive

  • File backup and transfer
  • Capacity: 250 GB to 20 TB
    • Several file types
    • USB or eSATA connection
      • eSATA – signal, not power

Expansion devices

  • Additional file storage
  • Usually, USB
  • Frees hard drive space
  • Automatically recognized
  • Known as a “Thumb drive”
  • Holds up to 2 TB of data

Flash Drives

  • Combines a USB interface and Flash memory
  • Highly portable
  • Weighs less than an ounce
  • Storage has risen as prices have dropped
  • Available capacity up to 2 TB

Memory card

  • Uses Flash memory to store data
  • Found in portable devices such as portable media players and smartphones
  • Contained inside a device
    • Unlike USB drives
  • Available in both Secure Digital (SD) and Micro Secure Digital (MSD) formats

Display Devices

Defining display devices:

  • Hardware component for the output of information in visual form
  • Tactile monitors present information in a fingertip-readable format
  • Often seen as television sets and computer monitors

Cathode ray tube (CRT) monitors

  • Create an image by directing electrons beams over phosphor dots
  • Used in monitors throughout the mid to late 1990s
  • By 1990, they boasted 800 × 600 pixel resolution

Flat-screen monitors

  • Also known as liquid crystal display (LCD)/ Think film transistor (TFT)
  • Digital signal drives color value of each picture element (Pixel)
  • Replaced CRT monitors

Touchscreens

  • Use a touch panel on an electronic display
  • Capacitive technology measures heat and pressure
  • Often found on smartphones, laptops, and tablets

Projectors

  • Take images from a computer and display them
  • the surface projected onto is large, flat, and lightly colored
  • Projected images can be still or animated

Printers and Scanners

Output devices

“Hardware that shows data in readable form.”

That data can take many forms:

  • Scanner and speech synthesizer
  • Unnecessary (though highly useful) for computer function

Printers

  • Laser/LED
  • Inkjet
  • Thermal

Shared printers

  • IP-based
  • Web-based

Scanners

  • Converts images from analog to digital
  • Flatbed (stand alone) or multifunction device

Faxes and multifunction devices

  • Facsimile (fax) machines send documents using landlines
  • Multifunction devices often include fax capabilities

Audio Visual Devices

Defining audio devices

  • Digital data is converted into an audible format
  • Components are used to reproduce, record, or process sound
  • Examples include microphones, CD players amplifiers, mixing consoles, effects units, and speakers

Defining visual devices

  • Present images electronically on-screen
  • Typically, greater than 4" diagonally
  • Examples include smartphones, monitors, and laptop computers

Interfaces and Connectors

Identifying Ports and Connectors

  • Ports enable devices to connect to computers

  • Connectors plug into ports

  • Each port has a unique function and accepts only specific connectors

    Interfaces and Connectors Interfaces and Connectors

Interfaces

  • Point of communication between two or more entities

  • Can be hardware or software based

    Interfaces and Connectors Interfaces and Connectors

    Common Interfaces are:

    • USB

    Interfaces and Connectors Interfaces and Connectors

    • USB connectors

    Interfaces and Connectors Interfaces and Connectors

Thunderbolt

  • Combines data transfer, display, and power

  • Initial versions reused Mini DisplayPort

  • New versions reuse USB-C connectors

  • Identified with a thunderbolt symbol

    Interfaces and Connectors Interfaces and Connectors

FireWire

  • Predecessor to Thunderbolt

    • FireWire 400 = 400 mBits/second
    • FireWire 800 = 800 mBits/second
    • Uses a serial bus to transfer data on e bit at a time
    • Still used for audio/video connections on older computers (before 2011), and in the automobile and aerospace industries

    Interfaces and Connectors Interfaces and Connectors

PS/2

  • Developed for IBM PS/2

  • Connects keyboard and mice

  • Ports are device specific

    • Green for mice
    • Purple for keyboard
  • Considered a legacy port

    Interfaces and Connectors Interfaces and Connectors

eSATA

  • Standard port for connecting external storage devices
  • Allows hot swapping of devices
  • Since 2008, Upgraded eSATAp that supports both eSATA and USB on the same port
  • eSATA revisions:
    • Revision 1: Speeds of 1.5 Gbps

    • Revision 2: Speeds of 3 Gbps

    • Revision 3: Speeds of 6 Gbps

      Interfaces and Connectors Interfaces and Connectors

Identifying Graphic Devices

Display Unit

  • Display unit (GPU) connected to the computer via a display card or adapter
  • Low-end generic graphic cards come built into the computer
  • Require specialized adapters for high-end functions
  • ATI/AMD, nVIDIA, SiS, Intel, and Via are leading manufacturers

Display System

Interfaces and Connectors Interfaces and Connectors

VGA Display System

Interfaces and Connectors Interfaces and Connectors

LED Display System

Interfaces and Connectors Interfaces and Connectors

Display Connectors

  • Different cables and connectors for different display adapters

  • Each connector has specific function and benefits

    Interfaces and Connectors Interfaces and Connectors

HDMI Interface

  • Most widely used digital audio and video interface
  • Also offers remote control and content protection
  • Uses a proprietary 19-pin connector
  • Offers up to 8K UHD resolutions

DisplayPort

  • Royalty-free complement to HDMI
  • First interface to use packetized data transmission
  • Uses a 20-pin connector
  • Can support even different transmission modes of increasing bandwidth

Thunderbolt

  • Developed by Intel and Apple, primarily for Apple laptops and computers
  • Can be used as either a display or peripheral interface
  • Initial versions used the MiniDP interface
  • Version 3 and now version 4 use the USB-C interface
  • Thunderbolt features don’t work with a standard USB-C cable and port

Digital Visual Interface (DVI)

  • Designed as a high-quality interface for flat-paneled devices

  • Support both analog and digital devices

    • DVI-I supports both analog and digital
    • DVI-A supports only analog
    • DVI-D supports only digital
  • Single-link for lower resolutions and Dual-link for HDTV

  • Superseded by HDMI and Thunderbolt

    Interfaces and Connectors Interfaces and Connectors

Video Graphics Array (VGA)

  • A legacy interface, used for analog video on PC
  • Has a 15-pin connector that can be secured with screws

Identifying Audio Connectors

The audio connection

  • Onboard or internal expansion

  • Has multiple ports to connect a variety of devices

  • Used for multimedia application, education and entertainment, presentation, and teleconferencing

    Interfaces and Connectors Interfaces and Connectors

Audio connectors

  • Sound cards
  • Bluetooth
  • Game ports/USB ports
  • External audio interfaces

External audio interfaces

  • Single device for multiple input and output ports
  • Mostly used in professional studies
  • Use USB, FireWire, Thunderbolt, or similar connectors

Wired and Wireless Connections

Data packets

  • Communication technology allows components to communicate over a network
  • Data packets are sent from one smart object to another
    • Information about the sending and receiving device, along with the message
  • Devices built to talk over a network can communicate with each other

Network types

  • Closed (limited number of devices can connect)
  • Open (unlimited number of devices can connect)
  • Either could be wired or wireless

Wired connectors

Interfaces and Connectors Interfaces and Connectors

Wire connection benefits

  • Faster data transmission
    • Up to 5 Gbps
  • More reliable than wireless
    • Immune to signal drops and dead zones
  • Less prone to radio interference
  • More secure
    • Less likely to be hacked

Wireless connections

  • Use different technologies based on connection requirements
  • Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi)
    • Connects a router to a modem for network access
  • Bluetooth
    • 1998
    • Pairing
  • Radio-frequency identification (RFID)
    • Identification and tracks objects using tags
    • Range up to several hundred meters
    • Collection of road tolls
    • Other uses of RFID tags
      • Livestock tracking, tacking pharmaceuticals through warehouses, preventing theft, and expediting checkout in stores
  • NFC (Near Field Communication)
    • Based on RFID
    • Extremely short range
    • Transmits data through electromagnetic radio fields

Wireless connection advantages

  • Increased mobility
  • Reduced time to set up
  • Flexibility and scalability
  • Wider reach
  • Lower cost of ownership

Peripherals and Printer Connections

Common installation steps

Computers require software that enables peripheral or printer device recognition and communication using:

  • Onboard Plug and Play software
  • Device driver software
  • Device application software Initial stand-alone, peripheral installation often still requires a wired connection or network connection
  1. Connect the printer to the computer using a cable
  2. Turn on the printer Frequently used stand-alone peripherals are:
  • USB
  • Bluetooth
  • Wi-Fi
  • NFC Three other connection methods are:
  • Serial port
  • Parallel port
  • Network

Serial cable connections

  • Are less common

  • Transmit data more slowly

  • RS232 protocol remains in use

    • Data can travel longer distances
    • Better noise immunity
    • Compatibility among manufacturers
  • Cables commonly feature 9-pin connections and two screws to secure the cable

    Interfaces and Connectors Interfaces and Connectors

Parallel port cable connection

  • Are less common

  • Send and receive multiple bits of data simultaneously

  • Feature 25-pin connections

  • Include two screws to keep the cable connected

    Interfaces and Connectors Interfaces and Connectors

Network connections

  • Generally, are Wi-Fi or wired Ethernet connections
  • Before you begin, verify that your computer has a network connection

Connecting to local printers

Interfaces and Connectors Interfaces and Connectors

Installation Types

  1. Plug and Play
  2. Driver Installation

PnP vs. driver installation

  • PnP devices work as soon as they’re connected to a computer
  • Examples include mice and keyboards
  • A malfunctioning device should be investigated in Device Manager.
    • Possible cause of malfunction is an outdated driver

IP-based peripherals

  • Hardware connected to a TCP/IP network
  • Examples of such devices include wireless routers and security cameras
  • These devices must be connected to a local area network (LAN) or the Internet to function

Web-based configuration

  • Different from installation
  • Used for networking devices such as routers
  • Is an easier process to set up a device
  • Completed on a web page
    • Often on the manufacturer’s site

Internal Computer Components

Internal Computer Components

Motherboard

  • Main printed circuit board (PCB) in computers
  • Contains significant subsystems
  • Allows communication among many of the crucial internal electronic components
  • Enables communications and power distribution for peripherals and other components

Chip sets

  • A set of electronic components in an integrated circuit
  • Manage data flow
  • Have two distinct parts: the northbridge and the southbridge
  • Manage communications between the CPU and other parts of the motherboard

Chip sets: Northbridge and southbridge

  • Northbridge – the first half of the core logic chip set on a motherboard
    • Directly connected to the CPU
    • Responsible for tasks that require the highest performance
  • Southbridge – the second half of the core logic chip set
    • Implements slower-performance tasks
    • Not directly connected to the CPU

What is a bus?

  • A high-speed internal connection on a motherboard
  • Used to send control signals and data internally
  • The front-side bus carries data between the CPU and the memory controller hub (northbridge)

Sockets

“Components not directly attached to a motherboard connect via sockets”

  • Array of pins holding a processor and connecting the processor to the motherboard

  • Differ based on the motherboard

    Internal Computer Components Internal Computer Components

Power connectors

  • Found on a motherboard
  • Allow an electrical current to provide power to a device
  • ATX-style power connectors are larger than most
  • Join the power supply to the motherboard

Data Processing and Storage

Central Processing Unit (CPU)

  • Silicon chip in a special socket on the motherboard
    • Billions of microscopic transistors
    • Makes calculations to run programs
    • 32-bit is like a two-lane information highway
    • 64-bit is like a four-lane information highway

Memory (RAM)

  • Typically used to store working data
  • Volatile: Data existing in RAM is lost when power is terminated
  • Is cold pluggable (cold swappable)
  • Speed measured in Megahertz (MHz)
  • Available in varying speeds
  • Available in varying storage capacities

Types of Memory

  • Choice depends on the motherboard
    • Dynamic Random-Access Memory (DRAM)
    • Synchronous Dynamic Random-Access Memory (SDRAM)
    • Double Data Rate Synchronous Dynamic Random-Access Memory (DDR-SDRAM)
    • Double Data Rate 3 Synchronous Dynamic Access Memory (DDR3 and DDR4)
    • Small outline Dual Input Memory Module (SO-DIMM)

Memory Slots

  • Hold RAM chips on the motherboard
  • Allow the system to use RAM by enabling the motherboard to communicate with memory
  • Most motherboards include two to four memory slots
  • Type determines which RAM is compatible

Expansion Slots

  • Use PCI or PCIe slots

  • Add additional capabilities

    • Peripherals (such as sound cards)
    • Memory
    • High-end graphics
    • Network interfaces
  • Availability depends on the motherboard configuration

    Internal Computer Components Internal Computer Components

Disk Controllers

  • Circuit that enables the CPU to communicate with hard disk drive
  • Interface between the hard disk drive and the bus
  • Integrated Drive Electronics is a standard
  • IDE controller-circuit board guides how the hard disk drive manages data
  • Have memory that boosts hard drive performance

BIOS (Basic Input Output System)

  • Manages your computer’s exchange of inputs and outputs
  • Preprogrammed into the motherboard
  • Needs to always operate
  • Update in a flash
  • Use the System Summary window

CMOS: Battery and chip

  • Uses a coin-sized battery
  • Is attached to the motherboard
  • Powers the memory chip that stores hardware settings
  • Replace the computer’s system data, time, and hardware settings

Internal Storage

Hard drive characteristics

Introduced by IBM in 1956, internal hard drives provide: - Stable, long-term data storage - Fast access time - Fast data transfer rates

Traditional hard drive technology

Internal Computer Components Internal Computer Components

Internal Computer Components Internal Computer Components

IDE and PATA drives

1980s to 2003:

  • Integrated Drive Electronics (IDE) hard drives and Parallel Advanced Technology Attachment (PATA) drives were popular industry standard storage options
    • Early ATA drives: 33 Mbps

    • Later ATA drives: 133 Mbps

      Internal Computer Components Internal Computer Components

SATA drives

2003 to today:

  • Serial advanced technology attachment drives (SATA) became an industry standard technology

  • Communicate using a serial cable and bus

  • Initial data processing of 1.5 Gbps

  • Current processing of 6 Gbps

    Internal Computer Components Internal Computer Components

  • Available in multiple sizes

  • Spin at 5400 or 7200 rpm

  • Capacity: 250 GB to over 30 TB

  • Still dominate today’s desktop and laptop market

  • Each SATA port supports a single drive

  • Most desktop motherboards have at least four SATA ports

SCSI drives

1986:

  • Small computer system interface, pronounced “scuzzy” (SCSI) drives

  • Historical speeds: 10,000 or 15,000 rpm

    1994:

  • Discontinued usage

    Internal Computer Components Internal Computer Components

Solid-state drives

1989:

  • Solid-state drives (SSDs) came to market

  • Consist of nonvolatile flash memory

  • Provide faster speeds: 10 to 12 Gbps

  • Capacity: 120 GB to 2 TB

  • Cost: More expensive than SATA or SCSI drives but also more reliable

    Internal Computer Components Internal Computer Components

  • Available as internal, external, and hybrid hard drives

  • As part of an internal hybrid configuration:

    • SSD serves as a cache
    • SATA drive functions as storage
    • Hybrid drives tend to operate slower than SSD drives

    Internal Computer Components Internal Computer Components

Optical Drives

1992:

  • Invented in the 1960s, but came to the market in 1992.
  • CDs and DVDs provide nonvolatile storage.
  • Optical drives use low-power laser beams to retrieve and write data.
  • Data is stored in tiny pits arranged in a spiral track on the disc’s surface.

CDs and DVDs compared

Internal Computer Components Internal Computer Components

Blu-ray discs

  • Media specific for movies and video games

  • Provide high resolution

  • Single-sided, but with up to four layers

  • Store 25 GB per layer

  • Writable Blu-ray discs exist in 100 GB and quad-layer 128 GB formats

  • Writable Blu-ray discs require BD-XL-compatible drives

    Internal Computer Components Internal Computer Components

Expansion Slots

  • Locations on the motherboard where you can add additional capabilities, including hard drive storage

Display Cards and Sound Cards

Video card

  • An expansion card installed in an empty slot on the motherboard
  • Or a chip built into a system’s motherboard
  • Allows the computer to send graphical information to a video display device
  • Also known as a display adapter, graphics card, video adapter, video board, or video controller

Graphics processing unit (GPU)

  • Specialized processor originally designed to accelerate graphics rendering
  • Process many pieces of data simultaneously
  • Machine learning, video editing, and gaming applications
  • Several industries rely on their power processing capabilities

Audio card

  • Also known as a sound card
  • Integrated circuit that generates an audio signal and send it to a computer’s speakers
  • Can accept an analog sound and convert it to digital data
  • Usually built into PC motherboard
  • Users desiring higher-quality audio can buy a dedicated circuit board

MIDI controller

  • A simple way to sequence music and play virtual instruments and play virtual instruments on your PC
  • Works by sending musical instrument digital interface (MIDI) data to a computer or synthesizer
  • Interprets the signal and produces a sound
  • Frequently used by musicians

Network Interface Cards

  • A hardware component without which a computer cannot connect to a network
  • A circuit board that provides a dedicated network connection to the computer
  • Receives network signals and translates network signals and translates them into data that the computer displays

Types of NIC

  • Provides a connection to a network
    • Usually, the Internet
  • Onboard: built into motherboard
  • Add-on: fit into expansion slot
  • No significant difference in speed or quality

Wired and wireless network cards

  • Wireless – use an antenna to communicate through radio frequency waves on a Wi-Fi connection
  • Wired-use an input jack and a wired LAN technology, such as fast Ethernet

Modems

  • Connects your system to the Internet.
  • Translates ISP signals into a digital format.
  • Then feeds those digitized signals to your router, so you can connect to a network.

Cooling and Fans

System cooling

  • Computers generate heat
  • Excessive heat can damage internal components
  • Never operate a computer w/out proper cooling
  • Designed to dissipate heat produced by the processor
  • Allow the accumulated heat energy to flow away from vital internal parts

Cooling methods

  • Passive
  • Active
    • Fans draw cool air through front vents and expel warm air through the back
  • Forced convection
  • Using thermal paste and a baseplate

Cooling methods – heat sink

  • Heat sink

  • Use heat sink compound to fill gaps

  • Place the heat sink over the CPU

  • Excess heat is drawn away

  • Before warm air can damage the internal components

    Internal Computer Components Internal Computer Components

Liquid-based cooling

  • Quieter and more efficient than fans
  • Water blocks rest atop the chip
    • Cool liquid in the blocks cool the chip
  • Heated fluid is pumped to a radiator-cooled by fans.
    • That fluid goes back to the water block to repeat the cycle.

Workstation Setup Evaluation and Troubleshooting

Managing File and Folders

Rules for naming files and folders

  • Name so the file or folder you want is easy to find
  • Make names short but descriptive
  • Use 25 characters or fewer
  • Avoid using special characters
  • Use capitals and underscores
  • Consider using a date format

Introduction to Workstation Evaluation, Setup, and Troubleshooting

Screen Capture and Tools

Screen capture on macOS

Saves screenshots on the desktop.

  • Command + shift +3
    • Capture entire screen
  • Command + shift +4
    • Capture part of the screen
  • Command + shift +5
    • Capture as photo/video

Screen captures on Windows

Saves screenshots to the screenshot folder.

  • Windows + PrintSc
    • Capture entire screen
  • Alt + PrintSc
    • Capture active window
  • Windows + Shift + S (Opens up snip and sketch tool)
    • Entire screen
    • Part of the screen
    • Active window

Screen captures on a Chromebook

Saves screenshots to Downlaods or Google Drive.

  • Ctrl + Show Windows
    • Capture entire screen
  • CTRL + shift + show windows
    • Capture part of the screen

Evaluating Computing Performance and Storage

Assessing processor performance

  • The processor’s speed
  • The number of cores
  • The bus types and speeds
    • Located on the processor’s perimeter
    • The data highway wiring from the processor to other board components
  • The presence of cache or other onboard memory

Bus types

Historically, three bus types:

Workstation Setup and Evaluation and Troubleshooting Workstation Setup and Evaluation and Troubleshooting

Bus alternatives

Replacement technologies include:

Workstation Setup and Evaluation and Troubleshooting Workstation Setup and Evaluation and Troubleshooting

And others.

Cache

  • Consist of processor platform memory that buffers information and speeds tasks
  • Can help offset slower processor speeds

Storage

Workstation Setup and Evaluation and Troubleshooting Workstation Setup and Evaluation and Troubleshooting

RAM error symptoms

  • Screen or computer freezes or stops working
  • Computer runs more slowly
  • Browser tabs error or other error messages display
  • Out-of-memory or other error messages display
  • Files become corrupt
  • Computer beeps
  • A “blue screen” with an error message displays

Workstation Evaluation and Setup

Identifying user needs

Environment: Where does the use work?

Workstation Setup and Evaluation and Troubleshooting Workstation Setup and Evaluation and Troubleshooting

What are the user’s workspace conditions?

Workstation Setup and Evaluation and Troubleshooting Workstation Setup and Evaluation and Troubleshooting

Network access: What are the user’s options?

Workstation Setup and Evaluation and Troubleshooting Workstation Setup and Evaluation and Troubleshooting

Data storage requirements:

Workstation Setup and Evaluation and Troubleshooting Workstation Setup and Evaluation and Troubleshooting

Application requirements:

Workstation Setup and Evaluation and Troubleshooting Workstation Setup and Evaluation and Troubleshooting

Evaluating peripheral needs

Workstation Setup and Evaluation and Troubleshooting Workstation Setup and Evaluation and Troubleshooting

Suggested computing solutions

Workstation Setup and Evaluation and Troubleshooting Workstation Setup and Evaluation and Troubleshooting

Evaluating computing options

Workstation Setup and Evaluation and Troubleshooting Workstation Setup and Evaluation and Troubleshooting

Purchasing decisions

Four important considerations:

Workstation Setup and Evaluation and Troubleshooting Workstation Setup and Evaluation and Troubleshooting

Workstation setup

Workstation Setup and Evaluation and Troubleshooting Workstation Setup and Evaluation and Troubleshooting

Environment

  • Is a desk present or needed? If so, is the desk safe and sturdy?
  • Is a chair present? If so, is the chair safe and sturdy?
  • Is lighting present?
  • Are electrical outlets present, of appropriate amperage and grounded?
  • Can the use physically secure the computer?

Unboxing

  • Read and follow the manufacturer’s practices for workstation setup
  • Move boxes and packing materials into a safe location, out of the user’s workspace

Cable management

Reduce service calls with three practices

  • Install shorter cable lengths where possible
  • Securely attach and identify each cable
  • Collect and tie the cables together

Electrical

Safety for you and your user:

  • Label each electric cable.
  • Verify that electrical connections are away from the user and are accessible.
  • Connect power supplies to their assigned wall or power strip location. Note the wall outlet number.

Ergonomics

Can the user work comfortably?

  • Feet are on the floor.
  • Monitor at or just below eye height.
  • Arms are parallel with the keyboard, table, and chair.
  • Shoulders are relaxed and not hunched.
  • The environment provides enough light to see the display and keyboard.
  • Cords and cables are out of the way.

Workstation setup

  • Power on the workstation and peripherals
  • Setup the operating system and options for the user:
    • User logon credentials
    • Keyboard options
    • Monitor resolution
    • Printer connections
    • Sound options
    • Security options
    • Network connections
  • Select the user’s default browser
  • Uninstall bloatware or unnecessary software
  • Install and configure additional productivity software
  • Modify the desktop Productivity pane
  • Setup backup options

Introduction to Troubleshooting

3 Basic Computer Support Concepts

  • Determining the problem
    • Ask questions
    • Reproduce the problem
    • Address individual problems separately
    • Collect information
  • Examining the problem
    • Consider simple explanations
    • Consider all possible causes
    • Test your theory
    • Escalate if needed
  • Solving the problem
    • Create your plan
    • Document the process beforehand
    • Carry out the solution
    • Record each step
    • Confirm the system is operational
    • Update your documentation

Troubleshooting

“Troubleshooting is a systematic approach to problem-solving that is often used to find and correct issues with computers.”

Troubleshooting steps

  1. Gathering information
  2. Duplicating the problem
  3. Triaging the problem
  4. Identifying symptoms
  5. Researching an online knowledge base
  6. Establishing a plan of action
  7. Evaluating a theory and solutions
  8. Implementing the solution
  9. Verifying system functionality

Restoring Functionality

Workstation Setup and Evaluation and Troubleshooting Workstation Setup and Evaluation and Troubleshooting

Common PC issues

Workstation Setup and Evaluation and Troubleshooting Workstation Setup and Evaluation and Troubleshooting

Internet Support

Workstation Setup and Evaluation and Troubleshooting Workstation Setup and Evaluation and Troubleshooting

Manufacturer Technical Support

  • Before contacting support:
    • Have all documentation
    • Be prepared to provide:
      • Name of the hardware/software
      • Device model and serial number
      • Date of purchase
      • Explanation of the problem

CompTIA troubleshooting model

The industry standard troubleshooting model comes from The Computing Technology Industry Association (CompTIA)

CompTIA model steps

  1. Identify the problem
  2. Gather information
  3. Duplicate the problem
  4. Question users
  5. Identify symptoms
  6. Determine if anything has changed
  7. Approach multiple problems individually
  8. Research knowledge base/Internet
  9. Establish a theory of probable cause
  10. Question the obvious
  11. Consider multiple approaches
  12. Divide and conquer
  13. Test the theory to determine the cause
  14. Establish a plan of action
  15. Implement the solution or escalate
  16. Verify fully system functionality and implement preventive measures
  17. Document findings/lessons, actions, and outcomes

Advanced Microsoft Windows 10 Management and Utilities

Policy management

  • Applies rules for passwords, retries, allowed programs, and other settings
  • Type “group policy” in the taskbar search box
  • View Edit group policy and click open
  • Select the User Configuration settings to view its details and edit policy settings

Process management

  • Schedules processes and allocates resources
  • Task manager

Memory management

Windows uses:

  • RAM for frequent memory tasks

  • Virtual memory for less-frequent tasks

    When you notice that:

  • Performance is slow

  • You see errors that report “low on virtual memory”

Service management

  • Automatically manages background tasks and enables advanced troubleshooting of performance issues.
  • Capabilities include:
    • Stopping services
    • Restarting services
    • Running a program
    • Taking no action
    • Restarting the computer

Driver configuration

Drivers are the software components that enable communications between the operating system and the device

Workstation Setup and Evaluation and Troubleshooting Workstation Setup and Evaluation and Troubleshooting

Utilities

Utilities help you administer and manage the operating system:

Workstation Setup and Evaluation and Troubleshooting Workstation Setup and Evaluation and Troubleshooting

Introduction to Business Continuity Principles

Business continuity

  • Risk management strategies minimize productivity issues
  • Business continuity is having a plan to deal with disruptions
  • Necessary for all businesses to remain operational under any circumstances

Fault tolerance

  • Ability of a system to continue operating when one or more components fail
  • Anticipates disruptions and develops contingency plans
  • Design systems without single points of failure

Redundancy

  • Minimizes the effects of system outages
  • System redundancy strengthens existing fault tolerance levels
  • Network redundancy seeks to prevent system outages
  • Hardware redundancy serves as a solution to a server outage
  • Additional capacity of a computer network above what is needed
  • Safety net for the almost inevitable system or component failure
  • Backup system at the ready
  • 5 types of redundancy

Data redundancy

  • First type of redundancy
  • When the same piece of data exists in multiple places
  • Might cause data inconsistency
  • Multiple versions of the same file on a network
  • Real-time syncing of data across all backups to ensure consistency

RAID redundancy

  • Redundant array of independent disks (RAID)
  • RAID 0: Allows a storage system to tolerate individual disk unit failures
  • RAID 1: Exact copy (mirror) of a set of data on two or more disks
  • RAID 5: Minimum of three hard disk drives (HDDs) and no maximum

Network redundancy

  • Process of adding additional network devices and lines of communication
  • Features include:
    • Multiple adapter cards and/or ports for individual hosts
    • Load balancing to distribute traffic across multiple servers
    • Multiple network paths
    • Routers can detect issues and reroute data

Site redundancy

  • Ability to lose an entire site without losing signaling or application state data
  • Guards against total loss of operations
  • Employs the process of replication to synchronize data among multiple sites
  • Ensures data access

Power redundancy

  • Two independent power sources
  • Eliminates potential downtime from the loss of the primary power source
  • An uninterruptible power supply (UPS) adds another layer of protection against system downtime
  • UPS is less expensive than a backup power generator

Backup requirements

  • Create a copy of data from which a business can restore when the primary copy is damaged or unavailable
  • Have a specific and sequential strategy for backups
  • Identify key backup concerns
  • Select appropriate backup types

Backup methods

  • Full – Copies all files
  • Incremental – Copies only those files that have been altered since the last full backup
  • Differential – Saves only the difference in the data since the last full backup
  • Daily – keeps a backup of just those files that have been modified the same day the backup is done

Backup storage devices

  • Used to make copies of data that is actively in use
  • Provide redundancy of data residing on primary storage (usually a hard disk drive)
  • Examples: USB drive, external hard drive, LAN, and tape

Backup considerations

  • Costs:
    • Can include hardware, software, maintenance agreement, and training
  • Location:
    • Backup to the cloud
    • Consider keeping a data copy in an additional location
  • Requirements of each backup approach

Disaster recovery plan

  • Organization’s strategy for restoring functionality to its IT infrastructure
  • Explains the actions to be taken before, during, and after a disaster
  • Strategies for specific scenarios
  • Method depends on needs and resources

Subsections of Software, Programming, and Databases

Computing Platforms and Software Application

A computing platform is the environment where the hardware and the software work together to run applications.

  • Hardware is the type of computer or device, such as a desktop computer, a laptop, or a smartphone.
  • Software refers to the type of operating system (OS), such as Windows, macOS, iOS, Android and Linux, and the programs and applications that run on the OS.

Types of computing platforms

Desktop platform

Includes personal computers and laptops that run operating system like Windows, macOS, and Linux.

Web-based platform

Includes modern browsers like Firefox, and Chrome that function the same in various operating system, regardless of the hardware.

Mobile platform

Includes devices like Pixel and the iPhone that run operating systems like Android OS and iOS.

Single-platform vs. cross-platform

Computing Platforms and Software Application Computing Platforms and Software Application

Compatibility concerns

  • Cross-platform software acts differently or may have limited usability across devices and platforms.
  • Software is created by different developers, and programs may interpret the code differently in each application.
  • Functionality and results differ across platforms, which might mean undesired results or a difference in appearance.

Commercial and Open Source Software

Commercial Software

  • Commercial Proprietary Closed source
    • Copyrighted software, which is identified in the End User License Agreement (EULA).
    • Private source code, which users are not allowed to copy, modify, or redistribute.
    • Developed for commercial profit and can include open source code bundled with private source code.
    • Commercial software usually requires a product key or serial number to certify that software is original.
    • Some commercial software is free, but upgrades and updates may cost extra, or the software contains ads.
    • Examples: Microsoft Office, Adobe Photoshop, and Intuit QuickBooks.

Open source software

  • Open source: Free and open source (FOSS)
    • Free software, which can be downloaded, installed, and used without limits or restrictions
    • Free source code, which can be freely copied, modified, and redistributed.
    • Open access to the software functions and software code without cost or restrictions.
    • Developers and users can contribute to the source code to improve the software.
    • Open source software requires users to agree to an End User License Agreement (EULA) to use the software.
    • Examples: Linux, Mozilla Firefox, and Apache OpenOffice.

Software Licenses

What is a software license?

A software license states the terms and conditions for software providers and users.

  • It is a contract between the developer of the source code and the user of the software.
  • It specifies who owns the software, outlines copyrights for the software, and specifies the terms and duration of the license.
  • Likewise, it states where the software can be installed, how many copies can be installed, and how it can be used.
  • Not only that, but it can be lengthy and full of definitions, restrictions, and penalties for misuse.

Agreeing to licensing terms

  • If you want to use software, you must agree to the licensing terms and requirements, called an End-User License Agreement (EULA).
  • Agreeing means you accept the terms of the license, such as how many computers the software can be installed on, how it can be used, and what the limitations on developer liability are.
  • Different software programs and applications have various ways of presenting their EULAs.

Types of software licenses

Single-use license

  • Allows single installation.
  • Allows installation on only one computer or device.
  • Ideal for a single user to install on computers or devices owned only by the user.

Group use, corporate, campus, or site license

  • Allows multiple installation for specified number of multiple users.
  • Allows installation on many computers or devices.
  • Idea for use with computers and devices that are required and owned by organizations.

Concurrent license

  • Allows installation on many computers, but can only use concurrently by a lower number.
  • Allows many users to have access, but is not used often by a lot of people at once.
  • Ideal for companies that do not have all workers using the software at the same time.

Software licensing cost

  • Costs vary, depending on the type of software, how it will be used, and how much was spent to develop the software.
  • The cost is for the license to use the software.
  • Several options are available, such trial subscription, and one-time purchase.
  • Trial licenses are usually free for a limited time, for a user to decide if they want to purchase the software.

Subscription or one-time licenses

Computing Platforms and Software Application Computing Platforms and Software Application

Software Installation Management

Before installing software

  • Read application details and be selective.
  • Avoid ads or other unwanted software.
  • Avoid downloading software that contains malware.
  • Review permissions requests to access other apps and hardware on your device.
  • Be selective when allowing application privileges.

Installing software

Consider minimum system requirements, such as:

  • Minimum processor speed

  • Minimum amount of RAM

  • Minimum amount of hard disk space available

  • Compatible OS versions

    Additional requirements may be:

  • Specific display adapter

  • Amount display adapter RAM

  • Internet connection to use the software.

Software versions

  • Software versions are identified by version number.
  • Version numbers indicate:
    • When the software was released.
    • When it was updated.
    • If any minor changes or fixes were made to the software.
  • Software developers use versioning to keep track of new software, updates, and patches.

Version numbers

  • Version numbers can be short or long, with 2,3, or 4 sets.
  • Each number set is divided by a period.
  • An application with a 1.0 version number indicated the first release.
  • Software with many releases and updates will have a larger number.
  • Some use dates for versioning, such as Ubuntu Linux version 18.04.2 released in 2018 April, with a change shown in the third number set.

What do version numbers mean?

Some version numbers follow the semantic numbering system and have 4 parts separated by a period.

  • The first number indicates major changes to the software, such as a new release.

  • The second number indicated that minor changes were made to a piece of software.

  • The third number in the version number indicates patches or minor bug fixes.

  • The fourth number indicates build numbers, build dates, and less significant changes.

    Computing Platforms and Software Application Computing Platforms and Software Application

Version compatibility

  • Older versions may not work as well in newer versions.
  • Compatibility with old and new versions of software is a common problem.
  • Troubleshooting compatibility issues by viewing the software version.
  • Update software to a newer version that is compatible.
  • Backwards-compatible software functions properly with older versions of files, programs, and systems.

Productivity, Business, and Collaboration Software

Types of software

  • Productivity software enables users to be productive in their daily activities.

  • Business software is related to work tasks and business-specific processes.

  • Collaboration software enables people to work together and communicate with each other.

  • Utility software helps manage, maintain, and optimize a computer.

    Note: A program or application can be categorized as multiple types of software.

What is productivity software?

“Productivity software is made up of programs and application that we use every day.”

Computing Platforms and Software Application Computing Platforms and Software Application

Types of productivity software

Computing Platforms and Software Application Computing Platforms and Software Application

What is business software?

  • Programs and applications that help businesses complete tasks and function more efficiently are considered business software.
  • Some business software is uniquely designed to meet an industry-specific need.

Types of business software

Computing Platforms and Software Application Computing Platforms and Software Application

What is collaboration software?

  • Collaboration software helps people and companies communicate and work together.
  • Collaboration software can also be business software, but they are not interchangeable.
  • The primary purpose is to help users create, develop, and share information collaboratively.

Types of collaboration software

Computing Platforms and Software Application Computing Platforms and Software Application

What is utility software?

  • Utility software runs continuously on a computer without requiring direct interaction with the user.
  • These programs keep computers and networks functioning properly.

Utility software

Computing Platforms and Software Application Computing Platforms and Software Application

Types of File Formats

Executable files

Executable files run programs and applications.

Some executable file format extensions are:

  • EXE or .exe for Windows applications
  • BAT or .bat for running a list of commands
  • SH or .sh for shell commands on Linux/Unix
  • CMD or .cmd for running command in order
  • APP or .app for Mac application bundles
  • MSI or .msi for installer package on Windows

Common compression formats

Computing Platforms and Software Application Computing Platforms and Software Application

Common audio and video formats

Audio and video formats often share the same extensions and the same properties.

Some audio formats:

  • WAV

  • MPEG, including MP3 and MP4

  • AAC

  • MIDI

    Some video formats:

  • AVI

  • FLV

  • MPEG, including MP4 and MPG

  • WMV

Images formats

Some common image formats are:

Computing Platforms and Software Application Computing Platforms and Software Application

Document formats

Some examples of document formats and extensions:

  • TXT / .txt for text files
  • RTF / .rtf for rich text format
  • DOCX and DOC / .docx and .doc for Microsoft Word
  • XLSX and XLS / .xlsx and .xls Microsoft Excel
  • PDF / .pdf for Adobe Acrobat and Adobe Reader
  • PPTX and PPT / .pptx and .ppt for PowerPoint

Fundamentals of Web Browsers, Applications, and Cloud Computing

Common Web Browsers

Fundamentals of Web Browsers, Applications, and Cloud Computing Fundamentals of Web Browsers, Applications, and Cloud Computing

Web Browser components

Fundamentals of Web Browsers, Applications, and Cloud Computing Fundamentals of Web Browsers, Applications, and Cloud Computing

Browser installs and updates

Importance of browser updates

  • Compatibility with websites
  • Security
  • New features

Frequency of browser updates

Most web browsers update at the same frequency:

  • Major updates every four weeks
  • Minor updates as needed within the four-week period
    • Security fixes, crash fixes, policy updates
  • Some vendors offer an extended release:
    • Major updates are much less frequent
    • Better for structured environments

Malicious plug-ins and extensions

  • Malicious plug-ins and extensions typically not displayed in list of installed apps and features.
  • Use an anti-malware program to remove them.
  • Use trusted sources for plug-ins and extensions to avoid malware.

Basic Browser Security Settings

What is a proxy server?

  • Acts as go-between when browsing the web.
  • The website thinks the proxy is the site visitor.
  • Protects privacy or bypass content restrictions.
  • Allows organizations to maintain web security, web monitoring, and content filtering.
  • Controls what, when, and who.
  • Reduces bandwidth consumption and improves speed.

How does a proxy server work?

  • Proxy servers perform network address translation to request and retrieve web content on behalf of requesting computers on the network.

    Fundamentals of Web Browsers, Applications, and Cloud Computing Fundamentals of Web Browsers, Applications, and Cloud Computing

Managing cookies

  • Cookies:
    • Small text-based data stores information about your computer when browsing
    • Save session information
    • More customized browsing experience
    • Example: Online shopping basket
  • Cookies can be useful but could be malicious too:
    • Tracking browsing activity
    • Falsifying your identity

What is cache?

  • Cache is temporary storage area
  • Stores web data, so it can be quickly retrieved and reused without going to original source
  • Cache is stored on local disk
  • Improves speed, performance, and bandwidth usage
  • Cache can be cleared when no longer needed

Browser Security Certificates and Pop-ups Settings

Security certificates

  • Good security practice to check websites’ authenticity
  • Look for HTTPS in URL and padlock icon
    • ‘Connection is secure’
  • If it says ‘not secure’ be wary
    • Certificate expired
    • Issuing CA not trusted

Script and pop-ups blockers

Pop-ups:

  • Typically are targeted online ads

  • Can be annoying and distracting

  • Can be malicious

    • Associated with ‘innocent’ actions
  • Take care when interacting with pop-ups

    Popular third-party pop-up blockers:

  • Adlock

  • AdGuard

  • AdBlock

  • Ghostery

  • Adblock Plus May provide additional features such as ad filtering.

Private Browsing and Client-side Scripting Settings

Private browsing mode that doesn’t save:

  • History

  • Passwords

  • Form data

  • Cookies

  • Cache

    Only hidden locally

  • ISPs, websites, workplace can view data

Client-side scripting

  • Web pages were static in early days of WWW
  • Dynamic web pages adapt to situation/user
  • Server-side scripting performed by server hosting dynamic pages
  • Client-side scripting performed by client’s web browser
  • Code is embedded in web page
    • JavaScript

Pros

  • Client-side scripts are visible to user
  • No reliance on web server resources

Cons

  • Client-side scripts have security implications
  • Malware developers constantly trying to find security flaws
  • You may need to disable client-side scripts

Should you disable JavaScript?

Pros of disabling

  • Security

  • Browsing speed

  • Browser support

  • Disabled cookies

    Cons of disabling

  • Lack of dynamic content

  • Less user-friendly browsing experience

  • Website navigation

Introduction to cloud computing and cloud deployment and service models

What is cloud computing?

Delivery of on-demand computing resources:

  • Networks

  • Servers

  • Storage

  • Applications

  • Services

  • Data centers Over the Internet on a pay-for-use basis.

    Applications and data users access over the Internet rather than locally:

  • Online web apps

  • Secure online business applications

  • Storing personal files

    • Google Drive
    • OneDrive
    • Dropbox

Cloud computing user benefits

  • No need to purchase applications and install them on local computer
  • Use online versions of applications and pay a monthly subscription
  • More cost-effective
  • Access most current software versions
  • Save local storage space
  • Work collaboratively in real time

Cloud computing

  • Five characteristics
  • Three deployment models
  • Three service models

Cloud computing characteristics

  • ON-demand self-service
  • Broad network access
  • Resource pooling
  • Rapid elasticity
  • Measured service

Cloud deployment models

  • Public Cloud
  • Private Cloud
  • Hybrid cloud

Cloud service models

  • IaaS
  • PaaS
  • SaaS

Application Architecture and Delivery Methods

Application Architecture models

  • How will an application be use?

  • How will it be accessed?

    Fundamentals of Web Browsers, Applications, and Cloud Computing Fundamentals of Web Browsers, Applications, and Cloud Computing

One-tier model

  • Single-tier model
  • Also called monolithic model
  • Applications run on a local computer

Two-tier model

  • Workspace-based client – Personal computer
  • Web server – Database server

Three-tier model

  • Workspace-based client

  • Application server or web server

  • Additional server (Database)

    Each tier can be:

  • Individually developed and updated by a separate team

  • Modified and upgraded without affecting the other tiers

N-tier model

  • A number of tiers

  • Multi-tier model

    • Workspace-based client
    • Web server or database server
    • Security
    • Additional servers
  • Preferred for the microservices pattern and Agile model

    Pros

  • Changes can be made to specific tiers

  • Each tier can have its own security settings

  • Different tiers can be load balanced

  • Tiers can be individually backed up by IT administrators

    Cons

  • Changes to all tiers may take longer

Application Delivery methods

  • Local installation
  • Hosted on a local network
  • Cloud hosted

Software Development Life Cycle

Introduction to the SDLC

  • Structured methodology that defines creating and developing software

  • Detailed plan to develop maintain, or enhance software

  • Methodology for consistent development that ensures quality production

  • Six major steps

    Fundamentals of Web Browsers, Applications, and Cloud Computing Fundamentals of Web Browsers, Applications, and Cloud Computing

Requirement analysis and planning

Fundamentals of Web Browsers, Applications, and Cloud Computing Fundamentals of Web Browsers, Applications, and Cloud Computing

Design

Fundamentals of Web Browsers, Applications, and Cloud Computing Fundamentals of Web Browsers, Applications, and Cloud Computing

Coding or implementation

Fundamentals of Web Browsers, Applications, and Cloud Computing Fundamentals of Web Browsers, Applications, and Cloud Computing

Testing

Fundamentals of Web Browsers, Applications, and Cloud Computing Fundamentals of Web Browsers, Applications, and Cloud Computing

Deployment

Fundamentals of Web Browsers, Applications, and Cloud Computing Fundamentals of Web Browsers, Applications, and Cloud Computing

Maintenance

Fundamentals of Web Browsers, Applications, and Cloud Computing Fundamentals of Web Browsers, Applications, and Cloud Computing

SDLC models

Waterfall

  • Linear sequential model

  • Output of one phase is input for the next phase

  • Next doesn’t start until work is completed on the previous phase

    Iterative

  • Iterative incremental model

  • Product features developed iteratively

  • Once complete, final product build contains all features

    Spiral

  • Uses waterfall and prototype models

  • Good for large projects

  • Largely reduces risk

  • Planning, risk analysis, engineering, and evaluation

  • Follows an iterative process

    V-shaped

  • Verification and validation model

  • Coding and testing are concurrent, implemented at development stage

    Agile

  • Joint development process over several short cycles

  • Teams work in cycles, typically two to four weeks

  • Testing happens in each sprint, minimizes risk

  • Iterative approach to development

  • At the end sprint, basic product developed for user feedback

  • Process is repeated every sprint cycle

    Four core values of agile model

  • Individuals and interactions over process and tools

  • Working software over comprehensive documentation

  • Customer collaboration over contract negotiation

  • Responding to change over following plan

    Lean

  • Application of lean principles

  • Focuses on delivery speed

  • Continuous improvement

  • Reducing waste each phase

    Seven rules of Lean Model

  • Build in quality

  • Create knowledge

  • Defer commitment

  • Deliver fast

  • Respect people

  • Optimize the whole

  • DevOps evolved from Agile and Lean principles

  • Development and Operations teams work collaboratively

  • Accelerate software deployment

    Fundamentals of Web Browsers, Applications, and Cloud Computing Fundamentals of Web Browsers, Applications, and Cloud Computing

Traditional SDLC vs. Agile

Fundamentals of Web Browsers, Applications, and Cloud Computing Fundamentals of Web Browsers, Applications, and Cloud Computing

Basics of Programming

Interpreted and Compiled Programming Languages

Programming Languages

  • Common programming languages categories:
    • Interpreted
    • Compiled
  • Many programming languages are compiled and interpreted
  • The developer determines which languages is best suited for the project

Interpreted programming

Basics of Programming Basics of Programming

  • Some interpreted programming languages are outdated
  • Some are more versatile and easier to learn languages
  • Interpreted programming languages need an interpreter to translate the source code
  • Translators are built into the browser or require a program on your computer to interpret the code

Interpreted programming examples

Basics of Programming Basics of Programming

Compiled programming

  • Programs that you run on your computer

  • Packaged or compiled into one file

  • Usually larger programs

  • Used to help solve more challenging problems, like interpreting source code

    Basics of Programming Basics of Programming

Examples

Examples of compiled programming languages are:

  • C, C++ and C# are used in many operating systems, like Microsoft. Windows, Apple macOS, and Linux
  • Java works well across platforms, like the Android OS

Compiled programming

Basics of Programming Basics of Programming

Comparing Compiled and Interpreted Programming Languages

Choosing a programming language

Developers determine what programming language is best to use depending on:

  • What they are most experienced with and trust
  • What is best for their users
  • What is the most efficient to use

Programming Languages

Basics of Programming Basics of Programming

Interpreted Programming Languages

  • Also called script code or scripting, used to automate tasks
  • Interpreter programs read and execute the source code line by line
  • The source code need to be executed each time
  • Runs on almost any OS with the right interpreter

Compiled programming languages

  • Also called programming languages
  • Used for more complex programs that complete larger tasks
  • Larger programs installed on the computer or device
  • Longer time to write the code but runs faster
  • Grouped into one downloadable file
Interpreted vs. compiled

Basics of Programming Basics of Programming

Programming Language examples

C, C++, C#:

  • Compiled programming language

  • C is the original language, C++ and C# are variations

  • Case sensitive

  • Basis for Windows and many operating systems

  • Takes more time to learn and use for coding but requires less memory and code runs faster

    Java:

  • Compiled programming language

  • Case-sensitive, object-oriented programming language

  • Requires Java Virtual Machine (JVM) to run the code

  • Programming language for Android OS

  • Cross-platform language that runs the same code on macOS, Windows and Linux

    Python:

  • Interpreted programming language

  • Scripting language

  • General-use, case-sensitive

  • Used with Windows, macOS, and Linux OSes and with server-side web app code

  • Requires Python engine to interpret code

    JavaScript:

  • Interpreted

  • Scripting language that runs on client side web browsers

  • Case insensitive

  • Simple scripts are run with HTML

  • Complex scripts are run in separate files

  • Not to be confused with Java, the compiled programming language

    HTML:

  • Interpreted

  • HyperText Markup Language

  • Mostly case-insensitive

  • Uses tags to format web pages on client-side web browsers

Query and Assembly Programming Languages

Programming language levels

  • High-level programming languages
    • More sophisticated
    • Use common English
    • SQL, Pascal, Python
  • Low-level programming languages
    • Use simple symbols to represent machine code
    • ARM, MIPS, X86

Query languages

  • A query is a request for information from a database
  • The database searches its tables for information requested and returns results
  • Important that both the user application making the query and the database handling the query are speaking the same language
  • Writing a query means using predefined and understandable instructions to make the request to a database
  • Achieved using programmatic code (query language/database query language)
  • Most prevalent database query language is SQL
  • Other query languages available:
    • AQL, CQL, Datalog, and DMX

SQL vs. NoSQL

  • NoSQL (not only SQL)
  • Key difference is data structures
  • SQL databases:
    • Relational
    • Use structured, predefined schemas
  • NoSQL databases:
    • Non-relational
    • Dynamic schemas for unstructured data

How does a query language work?

Query language is predominantly used to:

  • Request data from a database

  • Create, read, update, and delete data in a database (CRUD)

  • Database consists of structured tables with multiple rows and columns of data

    When a user performs a query, the database:

    1. Retrieves data from the table
    2. Arranges data into some sort of order
    3. Returns and prevents query results

Query statements

  • Database queries are either:
    • Select commands
    • Action commands (CREATE, INSERT, UPDATE)
  • More common to use the term “statement”
  • Select queries request data from a database
  • Action queries manipulate data in a database

Common query statements

Basics of Programming Basics of Programming

Query statement examples

  • SELECT * FROM suppliers;
  • SELECT name FROM suppliers, WHERE name = ‘Mike’;
  • CREATE DATABASE products;
  • DROP TABLE suppliers;
  • ALTER TABLE suppliers;
  • DROP COLUMN firstname;
  • SELECT AVG(purchases);
  • FROM suppliers;

Assembly languages

  • Less sophisticated than query languages, structured programming languages, and OOP languages
  • Uses simple symbols to represent 0s and 1s
  • Closely tied to CPU architecture
  • Each CPU type has its own assembly language

Assembly language syntax

  • Simple readable format
  • Entered one line at a time
  • One statement per line
{label} mnemonic {operand list} {;comment}
mov TOTAL, 212 ;Transfer the value 212 in the memory variable TOTAL

Assemblers

  • Assembly languages are translated using an assembler instead of a compiler or interpreter

  • One statement translates into just one machine code instruction

  • Opposite to high-level languages where one statement can be translated into multiple machine code instructions

    Translate using mnemonics:

  • Input (INP), Output (OUT), Load (LDA), Store (STA), Add (ADD)

    Statements consist of:

  • Opcodes that tell the CPU what to do with data

  • Operands that tell the CPU where to find the data

Understanding Code Organization Methods

Code organization is important

Basics of Programming Basics of Programming

Planning and organizing software design:

  • Enables writing cleaner, more reliable code
  • Helps improve code base
  • Reduce bugs and errors
  • Has a positive impact on program quality
  • Provides consistent and logical format while coding

Pseudocode vs. flowcharts

Pseudocode Flowcharts
Informal, high-level algorithm description Pictorial representation of algorithm, displays steps as boxes and arrows
Step-by-step sequence of solving a problem Used in designing or documenting a process or program
Bridge to project code; follows logic Good for smaller concepts and problems
Helps programmers share ideas without extraneous waste of a creating code Provide easy method of communication about logic behind concept
Provides structure that is not dependent on a programming language Offer good starting point for project

Flowcharts

  • Graphical or pictorial representation of an algorithm

  • Symbols, shapes, and arrows in different colors to demo a process of program

  • Analyze different methods of solving a problem or completing a process

  • Standard symbols to highlight elements and relationships

    Basics of Programming Basics of Programming

    Basics of Programming Basics of Programming

Flowchart software

  • Provides ability to create flowcharts

  • Drag functionality

  • Easy-to-use interface

  • Team collaboration creating flowcharts

    Examples:

  • Microsoft Visio

  • Lucidchart

  • Draw.io

  • DrawAnywhere

Pseudocode advantages

  • Simply explains each line of code
  • Focuses more on logic
  • Code development stage is easier
  • Words/phrases represent lines of computer operations
  • Simplifies translation
  • Code in different computer languages
  • Easier review by development groups
  • Translates quickly and easily to any computer language
  • More concise, easier to modify
  • Easier than developing a flowchart
  • Usually less than one page

Branching and Looping Programming Logic

Introduction to programming logic

Basics of Programming Basics of Programming

Boolean expressions and variables

Basics of Programming Basics of Programming

Branching programming logic

Basics of Programming Basics of Programming

Branching statements allow program execution flow:

  • if

    Basics of Programming Basics of Programming

  • if-then-else

    Basics of Programming Basics of Programming

  • Switch

    Basics of Programming Basics of Programming

  • GoTo

Looping programming logic

Basics of Programming Basics of Programming

There are three basic loop statements:

  • While loop: Condition is evaluated before processing, if true, then loop is executed
  • For loop: Initial value performed once, condition tests and compares, if false is returned, loop is stopped
  • Do-While loop:Condition always executed after the body of a loop

Introduction to Programming Concepts, Part 1

What are identifiers?

  • Software developers use identifiers to reference program components
    • Stored values
    • Methods
    • Interfaces
    • Classes
  • Identifiers store two types of data values:
    • Constants
    • Variables

What are containers?

  • Special type of identifier to reference multiple program elements
    • No need to create a variable for every element
    • Faster and more efficient
  • Examples:
    • To store six numerical integers – create six variables
    • To store 1,000+ integers – use a container

Arrays

  • Simplest type of container

  • Fixed number of elements stored in sequential order, starting at zero

  • Declare an array

    • Specify data type (Int, bool, str)
    • Specify max number of elements it can contain
  • Syntax

    • Data type > array name > max array size [ ]
    int my_array[50]

Vectors

  • Dynamic size
  • Automatically resize as elements are added or removed
    • a.k.a. ‘Dynamic arrays’
  • Take up more memory space
  • Take longer to access as not stored in sequential memory
  • Syntax
    • Container type/data type in <>/name of array

      vector <int> my_vector;

Introduction to Programming Concepts, Part 2

What are functions?

  • Consequence of modular programming software development methodology
    • Multiple modular components
  • Structured, stand-alone, reusable code that performs a single specific action
  • Some languages refer to them as subroutines, procedures, methods, or modules

How functions work

  1. Functions take in data as input
  2. Then process the data
  3. Then return the result as output

Types of functions

  • Standard library functions – built-in functions
    • if, else, while, print
  • User-defined functions – you write yourself
    • Once a function is written, you can use it over and over
  • Blocks of code in a function are identified in different ways
    • Use {}
    • Use begin-end statements
    • Use indentations

Using function

  1. Define a function (create)
  • Function keyword, unique name, statements
  1. Call a function (invoke)
  • Specified actions are performed using supplied parameters
  1. Declare a function (some programming languages)
  • C, C++

What are objects?

  • Objects are key to understanding object-oriented programming (OOP)

  • OOP is a programming methodology focused on objects rather than functions

  • Objects contain data in the form of properties (attributes) and code in the form of procedures (methods)

  • OOP packages methods with data structures

    • Objects operate on their own data structure

    Basics of Programming Basics of Programming

Objects in programming

  • Consist of states (properties) and behaviors (methods)

    Basics of Programming Basics of Programming

  • Store properties in field (variables)

  • Expose their behaviors through methods (functions)

Database Fundamentals

Types of Data, Sources, and Uses

What is data?

A set of characters gathered and translated for some purpose, usually analysis

Database Fundamentals Database Fundamentals

Common types:

  • Single character

  • Boolean (true or false)

  • Text (string)

  • Number (integer or floating point)

  • Picture

  • Sound

  • Video

    Database Fundamentals Database Fundamentals

Forms of data

Database Fundamentals Database Fundamentals

Types of data

Categorized by level and rigidity

Structured data

  • Structured in rows and columns

  • Well-defined with rigid structure

  • Relational databases

  • Microsoft SQL server

  • IBM Db2

  • Oracle database

    Semi-structured data

  • Some organizational properties

  • Not in rows or columns

  • Organized in hierarchy using tags and metadata

  • Non-relational database

    Unstructured data

  • No identifiable structure, specific format, sequence, or rules

  • Most common include text, email

  • Also images, audio files, and log files

    Examples of Semi and Unstructured data

  • MonoDB

  • Hbase

  • Cassandra DB

  • Oracle NoSQL DB

Data Sources

Database Fundamentals Database Fundamentals

Using data

Data sources may be internal or external

Internal

  • Collects data from reports or records from organization

  • Known as internal sourcing

  • Accounting

  • Order processing

  • Payroll

  • Order shipping

    External

  • Collects data from outside the organization

  • Known as external sourcing

  • Social media feeds

  • Weather reports

  • Government

  • Database and research

Database Fundamentals and Constructs

What is a database?

Database Fundamentals Database Fundamentals

Components of a database

Schema

  • Collection of tables of data

  • A database can have more than one schema

    Table

  • One or more columns of data

  • Two or more columns of stored data

    Column

  • A pillar of information containing one or more data or values

  • Can contain dates, numeric or integer values, alphabetic values

    Row

  • A horizontally formatted line of information like rows in Excel

  • 100s or 1000s rows of data are typically in a table

Database constructs

Queries

  • Request for data

  • Provide answers

  • Perform calculations

  • Combine data

  • Add, change, or delete data

    Constraints

  • Primary and foreign key enforce rules

  • Values in columns not repeated

  • Limit the type of data

  • Ensure data accuracy and reliability

Database query

Database Fundamentals Database Fundamentals

Database constraints

Database Fundamentals Database Fundamentals

Database characteristics

Database Fundamentals Database Fundamentals

Flat file vs. database

Flat File Database
Stores data in single table Uses multiple table structures
Set in various application types Tables are organized in rows and columns
Sorted based on column values One piece of data per column
Solution for simple tasks Faster, more efficient, more powerful

Database Fundamentals Database Fundamentals

Database Fundamentals Database Fundamentals

Database Roles and Permissions

Database permissions

Three types of permissions:

Database

  • Right to execute a specific type of SQL statement

  • Access second person’s object

  • Controls use of computing resources

  • Does not apply to DBA

    System

  • Right to perform any activity

  • Ability to add or delete columns and rows

    Object

  • Right to perform specific actions

  • Allows user to INSERT, DELETE, UPDATE, or SELECT data

  • Object’s owner has permissions for object

Permission commands

Database Fundamentals Database Fundamentals

Database roles

Database Fundamentals Database Fundamentals

Benefits of roles

Database Fundamentals Database Fundamentals

Database types

Structured data type

  • Tabular data, columns, and rows

  • These databases are called relational databases

  • Formed set of data

  • All rows have same columns

    Database Fundamentals Database Fundamentals

Semi-structured data type

  • Some structure

  • Documents in JavaScript Object Notation (JSON) format

  • Include key-value stores and graph database

    Database Fundamentals Database Fundamentals

Unstructured data type

  • Not in pre-defined structure or data model

  • Text heavy files, but may contain numbers and dates

  • Videos, audio, sensor data, and other types of information

    Database Fundamentals Database Fundamentals

Relational database

Relational Non-Relational
Structured to recognize relations among stored items of information Stores data in a non-tabular form, and tends to be more flexible than the traditional, SQL-based, relational database structures

Database Fundamentals Database Fundamentals

Non-relational database

Database Fundamentals Database Fundamentals

Permit storing, store data in a format that closely meets the original structure.

Most common types of data stores:

  • Document data stores

    • Handles

      • Objects
      • Data values
    • Named string fields in an entity referred to as a document

    • Generally store data in the form of JSON documents

      Database Fundamentals Database Fundamentals

  • Key-value stores

    Database Fundamentals Database Fundamentals

  • Column-oriented databases

    Database Fundamentals Database Fundamentals

  • Graph databases

    Database Fundamentals Database Fundamentals

Interfacing with Databases

What is a database interface?

Enable users to input queries to a database

Database Fundamentals Database Fundamentals

Principles of a database interface

Database Fundamentals Database Fundamentals

How to access a database

Types of access:

Direct

  • Enters SQL commands

  • Selects a menu

  • Accesses tables directly

  • Works well with locally stored database or local area network

    Programmatic

  • Accesses’ database using programming language

  • Enables data to be used in more ways

  • Safer than using direct access

  • Oracle databases support access from many languages

  • Might be necessary to perform a query with a supported language

    User interface

  • Microsoft Access permits access to user interface

  • Optional user interface may be needed

  • Oracle offers MySQL Workbench as a graphical user interface

  • Allows ability to input queries without the query language

  • Menu-base interface

  • Forms-based interface

  • GUI displays schema in diagrammatic form

  • Specific query by manipulating diagram

  • GUIs utilize both menus and forms

  • GUIs using point device to pick sections of displayed schema diagram

  • Natural language interfaces accepts user requests and tries to interpret it

  • These interfaces have own schema like database conception schemas

  • Search engine example of entering and retrieving information using natural language

    Query

  • Find specified data using SELECT statement

  • Query and reporting function included with software like Microsoft Access

  • Query Builder’s GUI is designed to enhance productivity and simplify query tasks

    • SQL or SQL displayed visually
    • Has pane displaying SQL text
    • Related tables determined by Query Builder that constructs join command
    • Query and update database using SELECT statement
    • Quickly view and edit query results
    • Examples:
      • Chartio Visual SQL
      • dbForge Query Builder for SQL Server
      • Active Query Builder
      • FlySpeed SQL
      • QueryDbVis Query Builder
  • Drag multiple tables, views, and columns to generate SQL statements

Database Management

Managing databases with SQL commands

  • Queries refer to request information from a database

  • Queries generate data of different formats according to function

  • Query commands perform the data retrieval and management in a database

    Database Fundamentals Database Fundamentals

SQL command Categories

DDL

  • SQL commands that define database schema

  • Create, modify, and delete database structures

  • Not set by general user

    DML

  • SQL commands that manipulate data

    DCL

  • SQL commands for rights, permissions, and other database system controls

    Database Fundamentals Database Fundamentals

Inputting and importing data

Data is input manually into a database through queries.

Database Fundamentals Database Fundamentals

Another way is through importing data from different sources.

  • SQL Server Import Export Wizard
  • SQL Server Integrated Services (or SSIS)
  • OPENROWSET function

Extracting data from a database

Database Fundamentals Database Fundamentals

Backing Up Databases

What is a database backup?

Two backup types:

  • Logical

  • Physical

    Database Fundamentals Database Fundamentals

Physical database backups

  • Needed to perform full database restoration
  • Minimal errors and loss
  • Full or incremental copies

Logical database backups

  • Copies of database information
  • Tables, schemas, procedures

Backup pros and cons

Physical backup Logical backup
Pros: Pros:
Simple and fast, despite format Only selected data is backed up
Mirror copy loaded to another device Saves time and storage
Cons: Cons:
Used only to recreate system No file system information
Cannot do full restore Complications restoring process

Database backup methods

Full

  • Stores copies of all files

  • Preset schedule

  • Files are compressed but may need large storage capacity

    Differential

  • Simplifies recovery

  • Requires last full backup

  • Last differential back up for full recovery

    Incremental

  • Saves storage

  • Back up files generated or updated since last backup

    Virtual

  • Uses’ database to track and maintain data

  • Helps avoid pitfalls of other backup methods

Backup Management

Database Fundamentals Database Fundamentals

Subsections of Introduction to Networking and Storage

Networking Fundamentals

Network Topologies, Types, and Connections

Types and Topologies

What is a computer network?

Computer networking refers to connected computing devices and an array of IoT devices that communicate with one another.

Network Types

There are multiple network types:

  • PAN (Personal Area Network)
  • LAN (Local Area Network)
  • MAN (Metropolitan Area Network)
  • WAN (Wide Area Network)
  • WLAN (Wireless LAN)
  • VPN (Virtual Private Network)

PAN (Personal Area Network)

A PAN enables communication between devices around a person. PANs can be wired or wireless.

  • USB

  • FireWire

  • Infrared

  • ZigBee

  • Bluetooth

    Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

LAN (Local Area Network)

A LAN is typically limited to a small, localized area, such as a single building or site.

Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

MAN (Metropolitan Area Network)

  • A MAN is a network that spans an entire city, a campus, or a small region.

  • MANs are sometimes referred to as CANs (Campus Area Networks).

    Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

WAN (Wide Area Network)

A WAN is a network that extends over a large geographic area.

  • Businesses

  • Schools

  • Government entities

    Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

WLAN (Wireless LAN)

A WLAN links two or more devices using wireless communication.

  • Home

  • School

  • Campus

  • Office building

  • Computer Lab

    Through a gateway device, a WLAN can also provide a connection to the wider Internet.

VPN (Virtual Private Network)

  • A private network connection across public networks.
  • Encrypt your Internet traffic.
  • Disguise your online identity
  • Safeguard your data.

Topology

  • Topology defines a network’s structure

  • A network’s topology type is chosen bases on the specific needs of the group installing that network

    1. Physical Topology: It describes how network devices are physically connected.
    2. Logical Topology: It describes how data flows across the physically connected network devices.

    Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

Star topology

Star topology networks feature a central computer that acts as a hub.

Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

Ring topology

Ring topology networks connect all devices in a circular ring pattern, where data only flows in one direction (clockwise).

Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

Bus topology

Bus topology networks connect all devices with a single cable or transmission line.

  • Small networks, LAN.

    Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

Tree topology

Tree topology networks combine the characteristics of bus topology and star topology.

  • University campus

    Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

Mesh topology

Mesh topology networks connect all devices on the network together.

  • This is called dynamic routing.

  • It is commonly used in WAN network for backup purposes.

  • It is not used in LAN implementations.

    Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

Wire Connections

Older Internet Connection Types

Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

Newer Internet Connection Types

Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

Wired Networks

Wired networking refers to the use of wire connections that allow users to communicate over a network.

  • Most computer networks still depend on cables or wires to connect devices and transfer data.

Wire Connections: Dial-Up

Requires a modem and phone line to access the internet.

Pros:

  • Widely available

  • Low cost

  • Easy Setup

    Cons:

  • Very slow speeds

  • Can’t use phone and Internet at the same time

Wire Connections: DSL

Connects to the Internet using a modem and two copper wires within the phone lines to receive and transmit data.

Pros:

  • Faster than dial-up

  • Inexpensive

  • Dedicated connection (no bandwidth sharing)

  • Can provide Wi-Fi

  • Uses existing phone lines

    Cons:

  • Slow speeds (less than 100 Mbps)

  • Not always available

Wired Connections: Cable

Cable delivers Internet via copper coaxial television cable.

Pros:

  • Lower cost than fiber

  • Fast speeds

  • Better than DSL

  • Long distances

  • Lower latency

    Cons:

  • Bandwidth congestion

  • Slower uploads

  • Electromagnetic interference

Wired Connection: Fiber Optic

Transmit data by sending pulses of light across strands of glass (up to 200 Gbps).

Pros:

  • Efficient

  • Reliable

  • Covers long distances

  • Fast speeds

  • Streaming and hosting

    Cons:

  • Expensive

  • Not available everywhere

Cables

Cables types

Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

Hard Drive Cables

Hard drive cables connect a hard drive to a motherboard or controller card. May also be used to connect optical drives or older floppy drives.

  • SATA
    • Next-generation
    • Carries high-speed data
    • Connects to storage devices
  • IDE
    • Older tech
    • 40-wire ribbon
    • Connect motherboard to one or two drives
  • SCSI
    • Supports variety of devices

    • Different cable types

    • Up to 16 connections

      Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

Network Cables

In wired networks, network cables connect devices and route information from one network device to another.

Cable need is determined by:

  • Network topology

  • Protocol

  • Size

    Types:

  • Coaxial

    • TV signals to cable boxes
    • Internet to home modems
      • Inner copper wire surrounded by shielding
      • Highly Resistant to signal interference
      • Supports greater cable lengths between devices
      • 10 Mbps capacity, uses DOCSIS standard
  • Fiber optic

    • Work over long distances without much interference
    • Handles heavy volumes of data traffic
    • Two Types
      • Single-Mode
        • Carries one light path
        • Sourced by a laser
        • Longer transmission distance
      • Multimode
        • Multiple light paths
        • Sourced by an LED
  • Ethernet

    • Consist of four pairs of twisted wires
    • Reduce interference
    • Wire a computer to LAN
    • Fast and Consistent
    • Two Types:
      • Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP)
        • Cheaper and more common
      • Shielded Twisted Pair (STP)
        • More expensive

        • Designed to reduce interference Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

          Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

Serial Cables

A serial cable follows the RS-232 standard: “Data bits must flow in a line, one after another, over the cable.” Used in:

  • Modems

  • Keyboards

  • Mice

  • Peripheral devices

    Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

Video Cables

Transmits video signals.

  • VGA
    • Older, analog
  • DisplayPort
    • Connects interface to display
  • HDMI
    • High definition
    • Different connector types
    • Type A is common
  • DVI
    • Can be digital or integrated
    • Can be single or dual link
  • Mini-HDMI
    • Type C HDMI

      Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

Multipurpose Cables

Multipurpose cables connect devices and peripherals without a network connection. They transfer both data and power.

  • USB
    • Low speed 1.5 Mbps @3 meters
    • Full speed 12 Mbps @5 meters
  • Lighting
    • Apple only
    • Connects to USB ports
  • Thunderbolt
    • Apple only
    • Copper max length 3 meters
    • Optical max length 60 meters
    • 20-40 Gbps throughput

Wireless Connections

Wireless network types

Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

WPAN networking examples

Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

WLAN networking examples

Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

WMAN networking examples

Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

WWAN networking examples

Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

Wired vs. wireless

Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

Advantages and Disadvantages of Network Types

Networks vs. devices

Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

Smaller vs. larger

Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

Wired vs. wireless

Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

Network Types

Basic network types are:

  • Wired

  • Wireless

    Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

PAN

A PAN enables communication between devices around a person. PANs are wired and WPANs are wireless.

Advantages:

  • Flexible and mobile

  • One-time, easy setup

  • Portable

    Disadvantages:

  • Limited range

  • Limited bandwidth

LAN

Advantages:

  • Reliable and versatile

  • Higher data transmission rates

  • Easier to manage

    Disadvantages:

  • Smaller network coverage area

  • Number of device affects speed

  • Security risks

MAN

A MAN is optimized for a larger geographical area, ranging from several building blocks to entire cities.

Advantages:

  • Cover multiple areas

  • Easy to use, extend, and exchange

  • Managed by an ISP, government entity, or corporation

    Disadvantages:

  • Requires special user permissions

  • Security risk

WAN

WANs and WWANs provide global coverage. Examples include the Internet and cellular networks.

Advantages:

  • Global coverage

  • More secure

    Disadvantages:

  • Expensive

  • Difficult to maintain

Hardware, Network Flow, and Protocols

Networking Hardware Devices

Network Devices

Network devices, or networking hardware, enable communication and interaction on a computer network.

This includes:

  • Cables
  • Servers
  • Desktops
  • Laptops
  • Tablets
  • Smartphones
  • IoT devices

What is a server?

  • Other computers or devices on the same network can access the server
  • The devices that access the server are known as clients
  • A user can access a server file or application from anywhere

What are nodes and clients?

A node is a network-connected device that can send and receive information.

  • All devices that can send, receive, and create information on a network are nodes.
  • The nodes that access servers to get on the network are known as clients.

Client-server

Client-server networks are common in businesses.

  • They keep files up-to-date

  • Easy-to-find

  • One shared file in one location

    Examples of services that use client-server networks:

  • FTP sites

  • Web servers

  • Web browsers

Peer-to-peer

Peer-to-peer networks are common in homes on the Internet.

Examples:

  • File sharing sites
  • Discussion forums
  • Media streaming
  • VoIP services

Hubs and Switches

A hub:

  • Connects multiple devices together

  • Broadcasts to all devices except sender

    A switch:

  • Keeps a table of MAC addresses

  • Sends directly to correct address (More efficient than hubs)

Routers and modems

Routers interconnect different networks or subnetworks.

  • Manage traffic between networks by forwarding data packets

  • Allow multiple devices to use the same Internet connection

    Routers use internal routing to direct packets effectively The router:

  • Reads a packet’s header to determine its path

  • Consults the routing table

  • Forwards the packet

    A modem converts data into a format that is easy to transmit across a network.

  • Data reaches its destination, and the modem converts it to its original form

  • Most common modems are cable and DSL modems

Bridges and gateways

A bridge joins two separate computer networks, so they can communicate with each other and work as a single network.

Wireless bridges can support:

  • Wi-Fi to Wi-F i

  • Wi-Fi to Ethernet

  • Bluetooth to Wi-Fi

    A gateway is a hardware or software that allows data to flow from one network to another, for examples, a home network to the Internet.

    Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

Repeaters and WAPs

Repeaters

  • Receive a signal and retransmits it

  • Used to extend a wireless signal

  • Connect to wireless routers

    Wireless Access Point (WAP)

  • Allows Wi-Fi devices to connect to a wired network

  • Usually connects to a wired router as a standalone device

  • Acts as a central wireless connection point for computers equipped with wireless network adapters

Network Interface Cards (NICs)

NICs connect individual devices to a network.

Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

Firewalls, proxies, IDS, and IPS

A firewall monitors and controls incoming and outgoing network traffic based on predetermined security rules.

  • Firewalls can be software or hardware

  • Routers and operating systems have built-in firewalls

    Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

    A Proxy Server:

  • Works to minimize security risks

  • Evaluates requests from clients and forwards them to the appropriate server

  • Hides an IP address

  • Saves bandwidth

    IDS and IPS:

  • IDS monitors network traffic and reports malicious activity

  • IPS inspects network traffic and removes, detains, or redirects malicious items

    Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

Packets, IP Addressing, DNS, DHCP, and NAT

What is a packet?

Everything you do on the Internet involves packets.

Packets are also called:

  • Frames
  • Blocks
  • Cells
  • Segments

Data Transmission Flow Types

Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

IP Packets Transmission Modes

Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

Data Transmission Flow

When you send an email, it is broken down into individually labeled data packets and sent across the network.

IPv4 and IPv6

  • IPv4 is one of the core protocols for the Internet.
  • IPv6 is the newest version of Internet Protocol.

What is an IP address?

An IP address is used to logically identify each device (Host) on a given network.

Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

IP Address Types

Static: Static IP addresses are manually assigned.

Dynamic: Dynamic IP addresses are automatically assigned.

Public: Public IP address is used to communicate publically.

Private: Private IP address is used to connect securely within an internal, private network.

Loopback: Loopback is the range of IP addresses reserved for the local host.

Reserved: Reserved IP addresses have been reserved by the IETF and IANA.

DNS

The DNS is the phone book of the internet.

Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)

The DHCP automates the configuring of IP network devices.

A DHCP server uses a pool of reserved IP addresses to automatically assign dynamic IP addresses or allocate a permanent IP address to a device.

Static allocation: The server uses a manually assigned “permanent” IP address for a device.

Dynamic allocation: The server chooses which IP address to assign a device each time it connects to the network.

Automatic allocation: The server assigns a “permanent” IP addresses for a device automatically.

Subnetting (and Subnet Mask)

Subnetting is the process of taking a large, single network and splitting it up into many individual smaller subnetworks or subnets.

  • Identifies the boundary between the IP network and the IP host.

  • Internal usage within a network.

  • Routers use subnet masks to route data to the right place.

    Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

Automatic Private IP Addressing (APIPA)

APIPA is a feature in operating systems like Windows that let computers self-configure an IP address and subnet mask automatically when the DHCP server isn’t reachable.

Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

Network Address Translation (NAT)

NAT is a process that maps multiple local private addresses to a public one before transferring the information.

  • Multiple devices using a single IP address

  • Home routers employ NAT

  • Conserves public IP addresses

  • Improves security

    NAT instructions send all data packets without revealing private IP addresses of the intended destination.

    Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

Media Access Control (MAC) Addresses

A MAC address is the physical address of each device on a network.

Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

Models, Standards, Protocols, and Ports

Networking Models

A networking model describes:

  • Architecture

  • Components

  • Design

    Two types:

    1. OSI Model: A conceptual framework used to describe the functions of a networking system.
    2. TCP/IP Model: A set of standards that allow computers to communicate on a network. TCP/IP is based on the OSI model.

7 Layer OSI Model

Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

5 Layer TCP/IP Model

The TCP/IP model is a set of standards that allow computers to communicate on a network. TCP/IP is based on the OSI model.

Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

Network Standards and their Importance

Networking standards define the rules for data communications that are needed for interoperability of networking technologies and processes.

There are two types of network standards:

  1. De-jure or Formal Standards: Developed by an official industry or government body.

Examples: HTTP, HTML, IP, Ethernet 802.3d

  1. De-Facto Standards: De-facto standards result from marketplace domination or practice.

Examples: Microsoft Windows, QWERTY keyboard

Noted Network Standards Organizations

Standards are usually created by government or non-profit organizations for the betterment of an entire industry.

  1. ISO: Established the well known OSI reference networking model.
  2. DARPA: Established the TCP/IP protocol suit.
  3. W3C: Established the World Wide Web (WWW) standard.
  4. ITU: Standardized international telecom, set standards for fair use of radio frequency.
  5. IEEE: Established the IEEE 802 standards.
  6. IETF: Maintains TCP/IP protocol suites. IETF also developed RFC standard.

Protocols

A network protocol is a set of rules that determines how data is transmitted between different devices in the same network.

  1. Security: - Encryption - Authentication - Transportation
  2. Communication: - Encryption - Authentication - Transportation
  3. Network Management: - Connection - Link Aggregation - Troubleshooting

Protocols – TCP vs. UDP

TCP UDP
Slower but more reliable Faster but not guaranteed
Typical applications Typical application
1) File transfer protocol 1) Online games
2) Web browsing 2) Calls over the internet
3) EMAIL

Protocols – TCP/IP

The TCP/IP suite is a collection of protocols.

Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

Protocols – Internet of Things

Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

Protocols – Crypto Classic

The Crypto Classic protocol is designed to serve as one of the most efficient, effective, and secure payment methods built on the blockchain network.

Bitcoin Protocol: A peer-to-peer network operating on a cryptographic protocol used for bitcoin transactions and transfers on the Internet.

Blockchain Protocol: An open, distributed ledger that can record transactions between two parties efficiently and in a verifiable and permanent way.

Commonly Used Ports

Ports are the first and last stop for information sent across a network.

  • A port is a communication endpoint.

  • A port always has an associated protocol and application.

  • The protocol is the path that leads to the application’s port.

  • A network device can have up to 65536 ports.

  • Port numbers do not change.

    Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

Wireless Networks and Standards

Network types

Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

WPAN

A WPAN connects devices within the range of an individual person (10 meters). WPANs use signals like infrared, Zigbee, Bluetooth, and ultra-wideband.

Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

WLAN

A WLAN connects computers and devices within homes, offices, or small businesses. WLANs use Wi-Fi signals from routers, modems, and wireless access points to wirelessly connect devices.

Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

WMAN

A WMAN spans a geographic area (size of a city). It serves ranges greater than 100 meters.

Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

WWAN

A WWAN provides regional, nationwide, and global wireless coverage. This includes private networks of multinational corporations, the Internet, and cellular networks like 4G, 5G, LTE, and LoRaWAN.

Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

Wireless ad hoc network

A WANET uses Wi-Fi signals from whatever infrastructure happens to be available to connect devices instantly, anywhere. WANETs are similar in size to WLANs, but use technology that is closer to WWANs and cellular network.

Advantages:

  • Flexible

  • No required infrastructure

  • Can be set up anywhere instantly

    Disadvantages:

  • Limited bandwidth quality

  • Not robust

  • Security risks

    Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

Cellular networks

A cellular network provides regional, nationwide, and global mesh coverage for mobile devices.

Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

Advantages

  • Flexibility

  • Access

  • Speed and efficiency

    Disadvantages

  • Expensive

  • Decreased coverage

  • Hardware limitations

IEEE 802.20 and IEEE 802.22

The IEEE 802.20 and 802.22 standards support WWANs, cellular networks and WANETs.

Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

IEEE 802.20

  • Optimizes bandwidth to increase coverage or mobility

  • Used to fill the gap between cellular and other wireless networks

    IEEE 802.22

  • Uses empty spaces in the TV frequency spectrum to bring broadband to low-population, hard-to-reach areas

Protocol Table

Web page protocols

Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

File transfer protocols

Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

Remote access protocols

Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

Email protocols

Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

Network Protocols

Networking Fundamentals Networking Fundamentals

Configuring and Troubleshooting Networks

Configuring a Wired SOHO Network

What is a SOHO Network?

A SOHO (small office, home office) network is a LAN with less than 10 computers that serves a small physical space with a few employees or home users.

It can be a wired Ethernet LAN or a LAN made of both wired and wireless devices.

A typical wired SOHO network includes:

  • Router with a firewall

  • Switch with 4-8 Ethernet LAN ports

  • Printer

  • Desktops and /or laptops

    Configuring and Troubleshooting Networks Configuring and Troubleshooting Networks

Setup steps – plan ahead

When setting up a SOHO network, knowing the compatibility requirements is very important.

  • Before setting up any SOHO network, review and confirm everything in your plan to ensure a successful installation.

    Configuring and Troubleshooting Networks Configuring and Troubleshooting Networks

Setup steps – gather hardware

  • SOHO networks need a switch to act as the hub of the network

  • If Internet is desired, a router can be added or used instead

    Configuring and Troubleshooting Networks Configuring and Troubleshooting Networks

Setup steps – connect hardware

Configuring and Troubleshooting Networks Configuring and Troubleshooting Networks

Setup steps – router settings

Log in to router settings

  • Enter ‘ipconfig’ in a command prompt window to find your router’s public IP address (listed next to default gateway)

  • Enter it into a browser and log in

    Update username and password

  • All routers have default administrator usernames and passwords

  • To improve security, change the default username password

    Update firmware

  • Updating router firmware solves problems and enhances security

  • Check the manufacturer website for available firmware updates

  • Download and install if your firmware is not up-to-date

Setup steps – additional settings

  • SOHO wired network security depends on a firewall
  • Most routers have a built-in firewall, additional software can be installed on individual machines
  • Servers and hardware have built-in DHCP and NAT actions
  • DHCP servers use IP addresses to provide network hosts
  • NAT maps public IPv4 address to private IP addresses

Setup steps – user accounts

User account setup is included in most operating systems.

Configuring and Troubleshooting Networks Configuring and Troubleshooting Networks

Setup steps – test connectivity

Network performance depends on Internet strength, cable specification, installation quality, connected devices, and network and software settings.

Test and troubleshoot to ensure proper network performance.

To troubleshoot performance:

  • Run security tools
  • Check for updates
  • Restart devices
  • Run diagnostic
  • Reboot the router or modem

Configuring a (wireless) SOHO network

What is a SOHO wireless network?

A SOHO wireless network is a WLAN that serves a small physical space with a few home users.

A SOHO wireless network can be configured with the help of a central WAP, which can cover a range of wireless devices within a small office or home.

Configuring and Troubleshooting Networks Configuring and Troubleshooting Networks

Common broadband types

Common broadband types that enable network connection:

  • DHCP:
    • The most common broadband type, used in cable modem connections.
  • PPPoE:
    • Used in DSL connections in areas that don’t have newer options.
  • Static IP:
    • More common in business.

      DHCP is the easiest broadband type to use. Internet Service Providers can provide other options if needed.

Wireless security factors

Wireless networks can be setup to be either open (unencrypted) or encrypted.

Configuring and Troubleshooting Networks Configuring and Troubleshooting Networks

Get to know your wireless router

Configuring and Troubleshooting Networks Configuring and Troubleshooting Networks

Connect to router admin interface

To manage router settings, you must find its default IP address, paste it into a browser and hit enter.

Assign a SSID

  • SSID is the name of a wireless network.
  • This name is chosen during setup.
  • Unique names help to identify the network.
  • Each country determines band and available modes.
  • 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz have specific supported modes.
  • Every router has as a default option.

Wireless encryption security modes

Configuring and Troubleshooting Networks Configuring and Troubleshooting Networks

Going wireless

Once the router is configured, your wireless network is ready.

Users will see it among the available wireless networks when they click the Wi-Fi icon.

Test and troubleshoot connectivity

Test network performance and Internet connectivity on each wireless device in the vicinity of the WAP.

If required, troubleshoot performance issues (network lags, glitches, or network cannot be accessed) with the following actions:

  • Check router configuration settings.
  • Run security tools.
  • Check for updates.
  • Restart devices.
  • Run diagnostics.
  • Reboot the router or modem.
  • Check equipment for damage.

Mobile configuration

IMEI vs. IMSI

IMEI and IMSI are used to identify cellular devices and network users when troubleshooting device and account issues.

Internation Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI)

  • ID# for phones on GSM, UMTS, LTE, and iDEN networks

  • Can be used to block stolen phones

    International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI)

  • ID# for cell network subscribers

  • Stored in a network sim card

Troubleshooting Network Connectivity

Symptoms of connectivity problems

“Can’t connect” or “slow connection” are two of the most common network problems. These symptoms can be caused by several things.

Causes of Connectivity Problems

Common causes of network connectivity problems: Configuring and Troubleshooting Networks Configuring and Troubleshooting Networks

Cable Damage

Cable damage slows or stops network connections. The damage can be obvious or hidden from view.

Ways to solve:

  • Check for physical damage
  • Test the cable using different devices or a specialized tool
  • Replace the cable

Equipment malfunction

An equipment malfunction can slow or stop network connections.

Ways to solve:

  • Check network adapter drivers in Device Manager
  • Check switch or router port settings in the management software
  • Replace the equipment

Out of range

When a user is too far away from a wireless signal, their connection will lag or fail.

Ways to solve:

  • Move physically closer to the source of the wireless connection
  • Move the wireless connection source closer to the affected user(s)
  • Use stronger devices to boost the signal strength
  • Use more devices to ensure the Wi-Fi reaches users who are farther away

Missing SSID

Network connections can fail when a user can’t find the network name (SSID) in the available networks list.

Ways to solve:

  • Move physically closer to the Wi-Fi source
  • Reconfigure the network to ensure the SSID is not hidden
  • Upgrade devices or use compatibility mode on newer network, so older devices can still connect
    • Compatibility mode can slow a network
    • Reserve 2.4 GHz band for legacy devices

Interference

Interference is when a radio or microwave signal slows or breaks a wireless connection.

Ways to solve:

  • Remove the source of the interference signal
  • Use a different Wi-Fi frequency (wireless)
  • Use shielded cables to connect (wired)
  • Remodel the building with signal-blocking materials

Weak signal strength

When signal strength is weak, a wireless adapter might slow speeds down to make the connection more reliable.

Weak signals cause:

  • Lags

  • Dropped connection

  • Back-and-forth network hopping

  • Out of range

  • Interference

  • Physical obstacles

    Ways to solve:

  • Move closer to signal

  • Adjust Wi-Fi frequency

  • Realign router antennae

    Wireless access points should be placed up high and in the middle of the space.

DNS and software configuration

Network connections can fail when DNS or software is configured incorrectly.

DNS issue:

  • Domain not recognized

  • IP addresses recognized

    OS and apps issue:

  • Software affecting connection

    Ways to solve:

  • For DNS servers, test domains using ipconfig in a command prompt

  • For apps and OSes, use the network troubleshooter in Windows Settings

Malware

Malware slows or stops network connections intentionally, or as a result of overloading a system with other tasks.

Ways to solve:

  • Use antimalware tools
  • Adjust firewall settings
  • Configure Privacy settings
    • Windows
    • Browser
    • Email

Network Troubleshooting with Command Line Utilities

Common command line utility commands that you would use to troubleshoot or diagnose network issues:

  • ipconfig
    • IP address
    • Subnet mask
    • Default gateway
  • ping
    • You can ping:
      • IP addresses, or
      • Domains
  • nslookup
    • It lists:
      • Your DNS server
      • Your DNS server’s IP address
      • Domain name
  • tracert
    • Tracert lists:
      • Sent from
      • Sent to
      • Number of transfers
      • Transfer locations
      • Duration
  • netstat: It shows if a server’s email and ports are open and connecting to other devices.
    • Netstat lists:
      • Protocol
      • Local address
      • Foreign address
      • Current state

Storage Types and Network Sharing

Types of Local Storage Devices

Hard Drive (HD or HDD)

HDDs:

  • Large storage capacity
  • Up to 200 MB/s
  • Can overheat
  • Were the standard PC storage for decades

Solid-state Drive (SSD)

  • No moving parts

  • Do not need power to retain data

  • faster than any HDD

    Storage Types and Network Sharing Storage Types and Network Sharing

Solid-state Hybrid Drive (SSHD)

SSHDs integrate the speed of an SSD and the capacity of an HDD into a single device. It decides what to store in SSD vs. HDD based on user activity.

SSHDs are:

  • Faster than HDDs

  • Perform better than HDDs

  • Cost less than SSDs

  • Higher capacities than SSDs

    Storage Types and Network Sharing Storage Types and Network Sharing

Optical Disk Drive (ODD)

ODDs are also called:

  • CD Drives
  • DVD Drives
  • BD Drives
  • Disc Drives
  • Optical Drives

Flash Drive

Flash drives store data on solid-state drives (SSDs). Less energy is needed to run flash drives, as they don’t have moving parts that require cooling. High-end versions deduplicate and compress data to save space.

Storage Types and Network Sharing Storage Types and Network Sharing

Local Storage wit Multiple Drives

Hybrid disk arrays physically combine multiple SSD and HDD devices into an array of drives working together to achieve the fast and easy performance of solid-state and the lower costs and higher capacities of hard-disk.

Storage Types and Network Sharing Storage Types and Network Sharing

Direct Attached Storage (DAS)

DAS is one or more storage units within an external enclosure that is directly attached to the computer accessing it.

Storage Types and Network Sharing Storage Types and Network Sharing

Ephemeral and Persistent storage

In DAS units and other storage devices, you can configure storage settings to be Ephemeral or Persistent.

Storage Types and Network Sharing Storage Types and Network Sharing

Redundant Array of Independent Disks (RAID)

A RAID spread data across multiple storage drives working in parallel.

Storage Types and Network Sharing Storage Types and Network Sharing

Storage Types and Network Sharing Storage Types and Network Sharing

Storage Types and Network Sharing Storage Types and Network Sharing

Storage Types and Network Sharing Storage Types and Network Sharing

Companies choose RAID devices for their durability and performance.

  • Maintain RAID devices
  • Keep spare drives
  • Perform routine backups

Troubleshooting Storage Issues

Disk Failure symptoms

Disk failure can be caused by wear and tear over time, faulty manufacturing, or power loss.

  • Read/write failure
  • Blue screen of Death (BSoD)
  • Bad sectors
  • Disk thrashing
  • Clicking and grinding noises

Chkdsk and SMART

The chkdsk tools and the SMART program are used to monitor and troubleshoot disk health.

SMART: Self-Monitoring Analysis, and Reporting Technology

  • wmic/node: localhost diskdrive get status

    Check disk tools

  • chkdsk /r locates bad sectors

  • chkdsk /f attempts to fix file system errors

Boot failures

When a computer fails to boot:

Computer power up

  • Lights and sound

  • Plugged in

    Drive configuration

  • Correct firmware boot sequence

  • No removable disks

  • Cables connected and undamaged

  • Motherboard port enables

    Filesystem error Boot into recovery and enter C: in command prompt.

  • If invalid media type, reformat disk with bootrec tool (erases all data).

  • If invalid drive specification, partition structure with diskparttool.

Boot block repair

Errors like “Invalid drive specification” or “OSS not found” indicate boot errors (caused by disk corruption, incorrect OS installation, or viruses).

  • Try antivirus boot disk and recovery options
  • Original product disk > Repair
    • Startup repair
    • Command prompt
      • Fix MBR: bootrec /fixmbr
      • Fix boot sector: bbotrec /fixboot
      • Correct missing installation in BCD: bootrec /rebuild bcd

File recovery options

For computers that won’t boot, you can try to recover files by removing the hard drive and connecting it to another computer.

Recovery options:

  • Windows disk management
  • chkdsk
  • Third-Party file recovery

Disk Performance issues

Disk performance can slow if a disk is older, too full, or its files are not optimized.

To improve performance:

  • Defragment the drive
  • Add RAM
  • Upgrade to a solid state or hybrid drive
  • Remove files and applications
  • Add additional drive space

Troubleshooting optical drives

Optical drives are laser-based and don’t physically touch disks.

  • Cleaning kits solve read/write errors

  • CD-ROM drives cannot play DVDs and Blu-rays

  • DVD and Blu-ray drives have third-party support

  • Writable discs have recommended write speeds

    Buffer underrun When the OS is too slow for the optical drive’s write process, errors occur.

    To fix buffer underrun:

  • Use latest writes

  • Burn at lower speeds

  • Close apps during burn

  • Save to hard drive instead

Troubleshooting RAID issues

Here are some common RAID troubleshooting steps:

Storage Types and Network Sharing Storage Types and Network Sharing

Types of Hosted Storage and Sharing

Storage as a Service (STaaS)

STaaS is when companies sell network storage space to customers, so they don’t have to buy and maintain their own network equipment.

  • Dropbox
  • OneDrive
  • Google Drive
  • box
  • Amazon Drive

Email and social media storage

Email Companies store your data, emails, and attachments in their data centers.

Social Media Companies store your photos, videos, and messages in their data centers.

  • Gmail waits 30 days before permanent removal.
  • Facebook deleted after 90 days, but keeps certain user data indefinitely.

Workgroup and homegroup

A workgroup or homegroup is a group of computers on a SOHO network, typically without a server.

  • To share files and folders, users set them to ‘public’

  • Data is stored on the user device that created it.

  • The added points of failure create higher risk of data loss.

  • Newer cloud solutions provide the same features more securely.

    Workgroups and homegroups are less common. Homegroups have been removed from Windows 10 altogether.

Repositories

A repository is a network location that lets a user store, manage, track, collaborate on, and control changes to their code.

Repositories save every draft. Users can roll things back if problems occur. This can save software developers months of time.

  • GitHub
  • DockerHub

Active Directory Domain Service (AD DS)

AD is a Microsoft technology that manages domain elements such as users and computers.

  • Organizes domain structure.

  • Grants network access.

  • Connects to external domains.

  • It can be managed remotely from multiple locations.

    Active Directory Domain Services:

  • Stores centralized data, manages communication and search.

  • Authenticates users so they can access encrypted content.

  • Manages single-sign on (SSO) user authentication.

  • Limits content access via encryption.

Network drives

Network drives are installed on a network and shared with selected users. They offer the same data storage and services as a standard disk drive.

  • Network drives can be located anywhere.
  • Network drives appear alongside local drive.
  • Network drives can be installed on computers, servers, NAS units, or portable drives.

Network file and print sharing

File and Printer Sharing is part of the Microsoft Networks services.

  • Appear alongside local drives
  • Accessed via a web browser
  • Appears in the printer options

Network Storage Types

Network storage is digital storage that all users on a network can access.

  • Small networks might rely on a single device for the storage needs of 1–5 people.
  • Large networks (like the Internet) must rely on hundreds of datacenters full of servers.

Storage Area Network (SAN)

A SAN combines servers, storage systems, switches, software, and services to provide secure, robust data transfers.

  • Better application performance.
  • Central and consolidated.
  • Offsite (data protected and ready for recovery)
  • Simple, centralized management of connections and settings.

Network Attached Storage (NAS)

A NAS device is a local file server. It acts as a hard drive for all devices on a local network.

  • Convenient sharing across network devices.
  • Better performance through RAID configuration.
  • Remote Access
  • Work when the Internet is down.

Difference between NAS and SAN

Storage Types and Network Sharing Storage Types and Network Sharing

Cloud-based Storage Devices

Cloud storage

Cloud storage is when files and applications are stored and engaged with via the Internet.

  • Cloud companies manage data centers around the world to keep applications functioning properly, and user data stored securely.

    Public Cloud: Provide offsite storage for Internet users.

    Private Cloud: Provides collaboration and access to private network users.

    Hybrid Cloud: A mix of both. Provides public sharing and restricted private areas via cloud storage and cloud-hosted apps.

File, Block, and Object storage

Cloud companies use multiple data storage types depending on how often they need to access different data and the volume of that data.

File Storage

File storage saves all data in a single file and is organized by a hierarchical path of folders and subfolders. File storage uses app extensions like .jpg or .doc or .mp3.

  • Familiar and easy for most users
  • User-level customization
  • Expensive
  • Hard to manage at larger scale

Block Storage

Block Storage splits data into fixed blocks and stores them with unique identifiers. Blocks can be stored in different environments (like one block on Windows, and the rest in Linux). When a block is retrieved, it’s reassembled with associated blocks to recreate the original data.

  • Default storage for data that is frequently updated.
  • Fast, reliable, easy to manage.
  • No metadata, not searchable, expensive.
  • Used in databases and email servers.

Object Storage

Object Storage divides data into self-contained units stored at the same level. There are no subdirectories like in file storage.

  • Users metadata for fast searching.
  • Each object has a unique number.
  • Requires an API to access and manage objects.
  • Good for large amounts of unstructured data.
  • Important for AI, machine learning, and big data analytics.

Storage gateways

A storage gateway is a service that connect on-premises devices with cloud storage.

Storage Types and Network Sharing Storage Types and Network Sharing

Archival storage

Storage Types and Network Sharing Storage Types and Network Sharing

Backups and snapshots

Storage Types and Network Sharing Storage Types and Network Sharing

Subsections of Cybersecurity Essentials

Common Security Threats and Risks

Confidentiality, Integrity, and Availability Concerns

The CIA Triad

Common Security Threats and Risks Common Security Threats and Risks

Regulatory Standards

Common Security Threats and Risks Common Security Threats and Risks

Importance of Security and Information Privacy

Data and information assets

An information asset is information or data that is of value.

Common Security Threats and Risks Common Security Threats and Risks

Information assets can exist physically (paper, disks, other media) or they can exist electronically, in databases and files.

Intellectual property (IP)

IP refers to creations of the mind and generally are not tangible. It’s protected by copyright, trademark, and patent law.

  • Industrial designs

  • Trade secrets

  • Research discoveries

    Even some employee knowledge is considered intellectual property.

    Companies use a legally binding document called an NDA to prevent the sharing of sensitive information.

Digital products

Digital products are non-tangible assets a company owns.

It includes:

  • Software

  • Online music

  • E-book or audiobooks

  • Web elements like WordPress or Shopify themes

    A company must protect digital products from piracy and reserse-engineering.

  • DRM is code added directly to files that helps prevent digital assets from being copied or pirated.

  • The DMCA makes it illegal to bypass copy protections or to develop technology that helps bypass copy protections.

Confidential Information

Common Security Threats and Risks Common Security Threats and Risks

Properly handling confidentiality means:

  • Restricting access
  • Not allowing unauthorized views or copies
  • Storing information securely
  • Destroying unneeded files
  • Getting consent
  • Ensuring employees use strong passwords and change them regularly

Security Threats and Ways of Breaches

  • Hardware/physical threats due to weak security or poor practices.
  • Data leaks
  • Data Breach
  • Data Dump
  • Dumpster Diving
  • Software Threats
    • Software or license theft
    • Exploits
    • Malware
      • Viruses
        • Program viruses
        • Macro Viruses
        • Stealth viruses
        • Polymorphic Viruses
      • Worms
      • Trojans
      • Exploits
      • Spyware
      • Adware
      • Ransomware

Different Types of Security Threats

  • Impersonation
    • Public Wi-Fi
    • Websites
    • Social Engineering
  • Snooping
    • Eavesdropping
    • Man in the middle
      • Physical
      • Logical
      • Spoofing
      • Hijacking
      • Theft of browser cookies
    • Replay
  • Password cracking
    • Brute force attacks
    • Dictionary attacks
    • Rainbow attacks
  • Unauthorized information alteration
    • Threats for
      • Financial records
      • Vote totals
      • Health records
      • News stories
    • Tools to avoid this:
      • File integrity monitoring (FIM)
      • Relational database management system (RDBMS)
      • Denial of service
        • Buffer overflow
        • ICMP flood
        • SYN flood
        • DDoS attack

Password Management and Security Best Practices

Password Management Techniques

  • Password Policies
  • Creating better passwords
  • Password Confidentiality
  • Password reuse
  • Password expiration
  • 2FA
  • MFA
  • Password Managers

Identification factors

Identification factors are pieces of information that only you and an authentication service know.

Security Best Practices Security Best Practices

Single sign-on

SSO verifies users for connected accounts or apps, so they only have to log in once.

  • Businesses use SSO to simplify and speed up access to resources.
  • IT departments set up SSO, so employees are automatically logged in when they log into their work networks.

Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting

The three A’s

There are three processes involved in logging in to a network or account.

Security Best Practices Security Best Practices

Access control

  • Rules of the least privilege (ROLP)
  • Role-based access control (RBAC) follows a company’s org chart.

Authorization

Authorization is when you have permissions to access a location or do an action.

Access control must be setup before authorization is granted.

Authorization must be set up for your user account before you’re able to log in.

Authentication

Authentication is the act of confirming the identity of a user.

Security Best Practices Security Best Practices

Accounting

Digital accounting is used in troubleshooting, security analysis, forensics, and hacking.

Security Best Practices Security Best Practices

Non-repudiation

Non-repudiation is when you can’t deny being in a specific location. It guarantees a message sent between two parties is genuine.

Security Best Practices Security Best Practices

Ways to Hardening Devices

  • Device hardening
  • Patching updates
  • Firmware updates
    • Secure boot
    • TPM
    • Drive Encryption
  • Encryption
  • Device lock
  • Disable features and ports
    • Autorun
    • Bluetooth
    • NFC
  • Apps that harden
    • Antivirus
    • Anti-malware
    • Ani-spyware
    • Software firewalls and VPNS
  • Change default password and disable admin accounts

Device hardening

Hardening is the process of securing a device to minimize vulnerabilities.

Harden devices by:

  • Disabling unneeded features.

  • Updating firmware, OS, and software.

  • Using firewalls, VPN, and anti-malware.

    The more layers of security you use, the safer your data and devices will be.

Validation and Device Usage

  • Software sources validation
  • Use OEM websites
  • Avoid third-party websites or use with caution
  • Uninstall unwanted software (bloatware)
  • Keep your computer safe while browsing
  • Firewalls and VPNs
  • Disable admin accounts
  • Keep software updated

Encryption concepts

Security Best Practices Security Best Practices

Public Key Infrastructure (PKI)

PKI is when a user is validated with a digital certificate by a Certificate Authority (CA).

Cryptographic hashes

A cryptographic hash is a short string of numbers and letters created by running a password or file through an algorithm.

Email and Spam Management

Managing email

Email management is classifying email messages and deciding whether they should be saved or deleted.

  • Keep inbox clean
  • Organize with folders
  • Filter with rules
  • Unsubscribe
  • Turn off notifications

Identify and manage spam

Spam is unwanted, unsolicited email. Some spam is harmless, but it can be dangerous when scammers use it for phishing or fraud.

To reduce spam:

  • Don’t give out your email address.
  • Use throwaway accounts.
  • Configure settings to block spam.
  • Use a full-featured mail app.

Security Concerns and Safe Browsing

Application Ecosystem Security

Mobile applications

  • Weak passwords

  • Malware

  • Poorly designed apps

    Safe Browsing Practices Safe Browsing Practices

Rooting and Jail breaking

  • Add functionality but also adds vulnerability

Desktop Software

  • Weak passwords

  • Not physically secure

  • Non-HTTPS browsing

    Safe Browsing Practices Safe Browsing Practices

Business software

Business software automates transactions, mines sales data, manages information, and more.

Safe Browsing Practices Safe Browsing Practices

Corporate network

To protect files, systems, and resources, businesses must limit access.

Safe Browsing Practices Safe Browsing Practices

Safe Browsing Practices Safe Browsing Practices

Public Browsing Risks

Free and Open networks

Safe Browsing Practices Safe Browsing Practices

Public browsing risks

  • Session hijacking
  • Shoulder surfing

Social Networking Sites

Safe Browsing Practices Safe Browsing Practices

Instant messaging

Safe Browsing Practices Safe Browsing Practices

Internet browser and versions

Safe Browsing Practices Safe Browsing Practices

Cookies

Cookies are text files with small pieces of data.

Safe Browsing Practices Safe Browsing Practices

Cookie types:

  • Session cookies
  • Persistent cookies
  • Authentication cookies
  • First-party cookies
  • Third-party cookies
  • Zombie cookies

Security certificates

Secure sockets layer (SSL) certificates authenticate a website’s identity and enable an encrypted connection between a web server and a browser.

Safe Browsing Practices Safe Browsing Practices

Browser updates

Because browsers are a favorite target for hackers, keeping them updated is very important.

Safe Browsing Practices Safe Browsing Practices

Safe Browsing Techniques

Autofill management

Safe Browsing Practices Safe Browsing Practices

Browser cache and history

A browser cache is a storage data that holds downloads of web pages you’ve visited.

Safe Browsing Practices Safe Browsing Practices

Private browsing

  • You appear as a new or unknown user on the sites you visit.
  • Other people who use the device won’t see your history.
  • Cookies and site data are deleted when you exit the browser.
  • But private browsing activity isn’t hidden from your employer, school, or ISP.
  • Bookmarks you create will be kept.
  • Downloaded files are saved and may be visible to other users.

Malicious websites

Safe Browsing Practices Safe Browsing Practices

Safe websites

Identifying safe websites is more significant than ever.

Safety tips include:

  • Use the Whois Lookup tool
  • Look for reviews
  • Only visit HTTPS sites
  • Check the trust seal
  • Inspect URLs

Adware and popups

Safe Browsing Practices Safe Browsing Practices

Redirection

The aim of redirection is to point you towards certain types of advertising or dangerous code.

Redirection is caused by:

  • Unwanted toolbars or browser extensions

  • Malware that alerts searches and URLs

  • Hacked websites servers that redirect visitors

    To avoid hijacking and redirection:

  • Set automatic updates for your browser, OS, and security tools.

  • Run regular system scans.

Warning signs

Search engines use algorithms to detect harmful sites. Browsers use those results to warn users.

Safe Browsing Practices Safe Browsing Practices

Security Threats: Virtual Private Networks

Safe Browsing Practices Safe Browsing Practices

VPN types:

  • Site-to-site VPN
  • Host-to-site VPN
  • Host-to-host VPN

VPN hardware

VPN hardware devices are:

  • Devices specifically designed to create VPNs

  • Network devices with added VPN functionality

    Safe Browsing Practices Safe Browsing Practices

Internet Protocol Security (IPsec)

IPsec is a suite of network standards and protocols that use cryptography to protect data traveling over the Internet.

IPsec suite core protocols:

  1. IPsec Authentication Header (AH) protocol: - Authenticates senders and IP addresses

  2. Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) protocol: - Encrypts data - Authenticates data and senders

The IPsec suite has two modes:

Safe Browsing Practices Safe Browsing Practices

The IPsec suite uses:

Safe Browsing Practices Safe Browsing Practices

Subsections of Cloud Computing

Overview of Cloud Computing

Definition and Essential Characteristics of Cloud Computing

Cloud computing (NIST)

A model for enabling convenient, on-demand network access to a shared pool of configurable computing resources with minimal management effort or service provider interaction.

Examples of computing resources include:

  • Networks
  • Servers
  • Applications
  • Services

Cloud model

  • 5 Essential characteristics
  • 3 Deployment models
  • 3 Service models

5 Essential characteristics

Overview of Cloud Computing Overview of Cloud Computing

  • Cloud Computing as a Service

    Overview of Cloud Computing Overview of Cloud Computing

3 Types of cloud deployment models

  1. Public
  2. Hybrid
  3. Private

3 Service models

Three layers in a computing stack:

  1. Infrastructure (IaaS)
  2. Platform (PaaS)
  3. Application (SaaS)

History and Evolution of Cloud Computing

In the 1950s:

  • Large-scale mainframes with high-volume processing power.

  • The practice of time-sharing, or resource pooling, evolved.

  • Multiple users were able to access the same data storage layer and CPU power.

    In the 1970s:

  • Virtual Machine (VM)

  • Mainframes to have multiple virtual systems, or virtual machines, on a single physical node

Cloud: Switch from CapEx to OpEx

Overview of Cloud Computing Overview of Cloud Computing

Key Considerations for Cloud Computing

Key Drivers for moving to cloud

Overview of Cloud Computing Overview of Cloud Computing

Infrastructure and Workloads

  • The cost of building and operating data centers can become astronomical.
  • Low initial costs and pay-as-you-go attributes of cloud computing can add up to significant cost savings.

SaaS and development platforms

  • Organizations need to consider if paying for application access is a more viable option than purchasing off-the-shelf software and subsequently investing in upgrades

Speed and Productivity

  • Organizations also need to consider what it means to them to get a new application up and running in ‘x’ hours on the cloud versus a couple of weeks, even months on traditional platforms.
  • Also, the person-hour cost efficiencies increases from using cloud dashboards, real-time statistics, and active analytics.

Risk Exposure

  • Organizations need to consider the impact of making a wrong decision – their risk exposure.
  • Is it safer for an organization to work on a 12-month plan to build, write, test, and release the code if they’re certain about adoption?
  • And is it better for them to “try” something new paying-as-you-go rather than making long-term decisions based on little or no trial or adoption?

Benefits of cloud adoption

  • Flexibility
  • Efficiency
  • Strategic Value

Challenges of cloud adoption

  • Data security, associated with loss or unavailability of data causing business disruption
  • Governance and sovereignty issues
  • Legal, regulatory, and compliance issues
  • Lack of standardization in how the constantly evolving technologies integrate and interoperate
  • Choosing the right deployment and service models to serve specific needs
  • Partnering with the right cloud service providers
  • Concerns related to business continuity and disaster recovery

Key Cloud Service Providers and Their Services

Future of Cloud Computing

Overview of Cloud Computing Overview of Cloud Computing

Cloud Service Providers

Overview of Cloud Computing Overview of Cloud Computing

Alibaba Cloud

Overview of Cloud Computing Overview of Cloud Computing

Amazon Web Services

Overview of Cloud Computing Overview of Cloud Computing

Google Cloud Platform

Overview of Cloud Computing Overview of Cloud Computing

IBM Cloud

Overview of Cloud Computing Overview of Cloud Computing

Microsoft Azure

Overview of Cloud Computing Overview of Cloud Computing

Oracle Cloud

Overview of Cloud Computing Overview of Cloud Computing

Salesforce

Overview of Cloud Computing Overview of Cloud Computing

SAP

Overview of Cloud Computing Overview of Cloud Computing

Business Case for Cloud Computing

Cloud Adoption – No longer a choice

  • It is no longer a thing of the future

  • Single individual to Global multi-billion dollar enterprise, anybody can access the computing capacity they need on the cloud.

    Cloud makes it possible for businesses to:

  • Experiment

  • Fail

  • Learn Faster than ever before with low risk.

  • Businesses today have greater freedom to change course than to live with the consequences of expensive decisions taken in the past.

  • To remain, competitive, businesses need to be able to respond quickly to marketplace changes.

  • Product lifecycles have shortened, and barriers to entry have become lower.

  • The power, scalability, flexibility, and pay-as-you-go economics of cloud has made it underpinning foundation for digital transformation.

Emerging Technologies Accelerated by Cloud

Internet of Things in the Cloud

Overview of Cloud Computing Overview of Cloud Computing

Artificial Intelligence on the Cloud

AI, IoT, and the Cloud

Overview of Cloud Computing Overview of Cloud Computing

BlockChain and Analytics in the Cloud

Blockchain & Cloud

Overview of Cloud Computing Overview of Cloud Computing

A 3-Way Relationship

Overview of Cloud Computing Overview of Cloud Computing

Analytics on the Cloud

How can analytics technology leverage the cloud?

  • Track trends on social media to predict future events
  • Analyze data to build machine learning models in cognitive applications
  • Data analytics and predictions maintenance solutions for city infrastructure

Cloud Computing Models

Overview of Cloud Service Models

  • IaaS
  • PaaS
  • SaaS

IaaS – Infrastructure as a Service

It is a form of cloud computing that delivers fundamentals:

  • compute

  • network

  • storage to consumers on-demand, over the internet, on a pay-as-you-go basis.

    The cloud provider hosts the infrastructure components traditionally present in an on-premises data center, as well as the virtualization or hypervisor layer.

IaaS Cloud

The ability to track and monitor the performance and usage of their cloud services and manage disaster recovery.

Cloud Computing Models Cloud Computing Models

  • End users don’t interact directly with the physical infrastructure, but experience it as a service provided to them.

  • Comes with supporting services like auto-scaling and load balancing that provide scalability and high performance.

  • Object storage is the most common mode of storage in the cloud, given that it is highly distributed and resilient.

    Cloud Computing Models Cloud Computing Models

IaaS use cases

Test and Development

  • Enable their teams to set up test and development environments faster.
  • Helping developers focus more on business logic than infrastructure management.

Business Continuity and Disaster Recovery

  • Require a significant amount of technology and staff investment.
  • Make applications and data accessible as usual during a disaster or outage.

Faster Deployments and Scaling

  • To deploy their web applications faster.
  • Scale infrastructure up and down as demand fluctuates.

High Performance Computing

  • To solve complex problems involving millions of variables and calculations

Big Data Analysis

  • Patterns, trends, and associations requires a huge amount of processing power.
  • Provides the required high-performance computing, but also makes it economically viable.

IaaS Concerns

  • Lack of transparency
  • Dependency on a third party

PaaS – Platform as a Service

PaaS

A cloud computing model that provides a complete application platform to:

  • Develop
  • Deploy
  • Run
  • Manage

PaaS Providers Host and Manages

Installation, configuration, operation of application infrastructure:

  • Servers

  • Networks

  • Storage

  • Operating system

  • Application runtimes

  • APIs

  • Middleware

  • Databases

    User manages: Application Code

    Cloud Computing Models Cloud Computing Models

Essential Characteristics of PaaS

  • High level of abstraction
    • Eliminate complexity of deploying applications
  • Support services and APIs
    • Simplify the job of developers
  • Run-time environments
    • Executes code according to application owner and cloud provider policies
  • Rapid deployment mechanisms
    • Deploy, run, and scale applications efficiently
  • Middleware capabilities
    • Support a range of application infrastructure capabilities

Use Cases of PaaS

  • API development and management
  • Internet of Things (IoT)
  • Business analytics/intelligence
  • Business Process Management (BPM)
  • Master data management (MDM)

Advantages of PaaS

  • Scalability
  • Faster time to market
  • Greater agility and innovation

PaaS available offerings

Cloud Computing Models Cloud Computing Models

Risks of PaaS

  • Information security threats
  • Dependency on service provider’s infrastructure
  • Customer lack control over changes in strategy, service offerings, or tools

SaaS – Software as a Service

A cloud offering that provides access to a service provider’s cloud-based software.

Provider maintains:

  • Servers

  • Databases

  • Application Code

  • Security

    Providers manages application:

  • Security

  • Availability

  • Performance

SaaS Supports

  • Email and Collaboration
  • Customer Relationship Management
  • Human Resource Management
  • Financial Management

Key Characteristics

  • Multi-tenant architecture
  • Manage Privileges and Monitor Data
  • Security, Compliance, Maintenance
  • Customize Applications
  • Subscription Model
  • Scalable Resources

Key Benefits

  • Greatly reduce the time from decision to value
  • Increase workforce productivity and efficiency
    • Users can access core business apps from anywhere
    • Buy and deploy apps in minutes
  • Spread out software costs over time

Use Cases for SaaS

Organizations are moving to SaaS to:

  • Reduce on-premise IT infrastructure and capital expenditure

  • Avoid ongoing upgrades, maintenance, and patching

  • Run applications with minimal input

  • Manage websites, marketing, sales, and operations

  • Gain resilience and business continuity of the cloud provider

    Trending towards SaaS integration platforms.

SaaS Concerns

  • Data ownership and data safety
  • Third-party maintains business-critical data
  • Needs good internet connection

Deployment Models

Public Cloud

Cloud Computing Models Cloud Computing Models

Public Cloud providers in the market today

Cloud Computing Models Cloud Computing Models

Public cloud characteristics

Cloud Computing Models Cloud Computing Models

Public cloud benefits

Cloud Computing Models Cloud Computing Models

Public cloud concerns

Cloud Computing Models Cloud Computing Models

Public cloud use cases

  • Building and testing applications, and reducing time-to-market for their products and services.
  • Businesses with fluctuating capacity and resourcing needs.
  • Build secondary infrastructures for disaster recovery, data protection, and business continuity.
  • Cloud storage and data management services for greater accessibility, easy distribution, and backing up their data.
  • IT departments are outsourcing the management of less critical and standardized business platforms and applications to public cloud providers.

Private Cloud

“Cloud infrastructure provisioned for exclusive use by a single organization comprising multiple consumers, such as the business units within the organization. It may be owned, managed, and operated by the organization, a third party, or some combination of them, and it may exist on or off premises.”

Internal or External

Cloud Computing Models Cloud Computing Models

Virtual Private Cloud (VPC)

An external cloud that offers a private, secure, computing environment in a shared public cloud.

Cloud Computing Models Cloud Computing Models

Best of Both Worlds

Cloud Computing Models Cloud Computing Models

Benefits of Private Clouds

Cloud Computing Models Cloud Computing Models

Common Use Cases

Cloud Computing Models Cloud Computing Models

Hybrid Cloud

Connects an organization on-premise private cloud and third-party public cloud.

It gives them:

  • Flexibility

  • Workloads move freely

  • Choice of security and regulation features

    With proper integration and orchestration between the public and private clouds, you can leverage both clouds for the same workload. For example, you can leverage additional public cloud capacity to accommodate a spike in demand for a private cloud application also known as “cloud bursting”.

The Three Tenets

Cloud Computing Models Cloud Computing Models

Types of Hybrid Clouds

Cloud Computing Models Cloud Computing Models

Benefits

  • Security and compliance
  • Scalability and resilience
  • Resource optimization
  • Cost-saving
  • A hybrid cloud lets organizations deploy highly regulated or sensitive workloads in a private cloud while running the less-sensitive workloads on a public cloud.
  • Using a hybrid cloud, you can scale up quickly, inexpensively, and even automatically using the public cloud infrastructure, all without impacting the other workloads running on your private cloud.
  • Because you’re not locked-in with a specific vendor and also don’t have to make either-or- decisions between the different cloud models, you can make the most cost-efficient use of your infrastructure budget. You can maintain workloads where they are most efficient, spin-up environments using pay-as-you-go in the public cloud, and rapidly adopt new tools as you need them.

Hybrid Cloud Use Cases

  • SaaS integration
  • Data and AI integration
  • Enhancing legacy apps
  • VMware migration

Components of Cloud Computing

Overview of Cloud Infrastructure

After choosing the cloud service model and the cloud type offered by vendors, customers need to plan the infrastructure architecture. The infrastructure layer is the foundation of the cloud.

Region

It is a geographic area or location where a cloud provider’s infrastructure is clustered, and may have names like NA South or US East.

Availability Zones

  • Multiple Availability Zones (AZ)

  • Have their own power, cooling, networking resources

  • Isolation of zones improves the cloud’s fault tolerance, decrease latency, and more

  • very high bandwidth connectivity with other AZs, Data Centers and the internet

    Components of Cloud Computing Components of Cloud Computing

Computing Resources

Cloud providers offer several compute options:

  • Virtual Servers (VMs)
  • Bare Metal Servers
  • Serverless (Abstraction)

Storage

Virtual servers come with their default local storage, but the stored documents are lost as we destroy the servers. Other more persistent options are:

  • Traditional Data Centers:
    • Block Storage
    • File Storage
  • Often struggle with scale, performance and distributed characteristics of cloud.
  • The most common mode of storage
    • Object Storage
  • It is highly distributed and resilient

Networking

Networking infrastructure in a cloud datacenter include traditional networking hardware like:

  • routers

  • switches

    For users of the Cloud, the Cloud providers have Software Defined Networking (SDN), which allows for easier networking:

  • provisioning

  • configuration

  • management

    Components of Cloud Computing Components of Cloud Computing

    Networking interfaces in the cloud need:

  • IP address

  • Subnets

    It is even more important to configure which network traffic and users can access your resources:

  • Security Groups

  • ACLs

  • VLANs

  • VPCs

  • VPNs

    Some traditional hardware appliances:

  • firewalls

  • load balancers

  • gateways

  • traffic analyzers

    Another networking capability provided by the Cloud Providers is:

  • CDNs

Types of Virtual Machines

Shared or Public Cloud VMs

Components of Cloud Computing Components of Cloud Computing

Transient or Spot VMs

  • The Cloud provider can choose to de-provision them at any time and reclaim the resources

    These VMs are great for:

  • Non-production

  • Testing and developing applications

  • Running stateless workloads, testing scalability

  • Running big data and HPC workloads at a low cost

    Components of Cloud Computing Components of Cloud Computing

Reserved virtual server instances

  • Reserve capacity and guarantee resources for future deployments

  • If you exceed your reserved capacity, complement it with hourly or monthly VMs Note: Not all predefined VMs families or configuration may be available as reserved.

    Components of Cloud Computing Components of Cloud Computing

Dedicated Hosts

  • Single tenant isolation
  • Specify the data center and pod
  • This allows for maximum control over workload placement
  • Used for meeting compliance and regulatory requirements or licensing terms

Bare Metal Servers

A bare metal server is a single-tenant, dedicated physical server. In other words, it’s dedicated to a single customer.

  • Cloud Provider manages the server up to the OS.
  • The Customer is responsible for administering and managing everything else on the server.

Bare Metal Server Configuration

  • Preconfigured by the cloud provider
  • Custom-configured as per customer specifications
    • Processors

    • RAM

    • Hard drives

    • Specialized components

    • The OS

      Add GPUs:

  • Accelerating scientific computation
  • Data analytics
  • Rendering professional grade virtualized graphics

Characteristics

  • Can take longer to provision
  • Minutes to hours
  • More expensive than VMs
  • Only offered by some cloud providers

Workloads

  • Fully customizable/ demanding environments

  • Dedicated or long-term usage

  • High Performance Computing

  • Highly secure / isolated environments

    Components of Cloud Computing Components of Cloud Computing

Bare-metal server vs. Virtual Servers

Bare Metal Virtual Servers
Work best for: CPU and I/O intensive workloads Rapidly provisioned
Excel with the highest performance and security
Satisfy strict compliance requirements Provide an elastic and scalable environment
Offer complete flexibility, control, and transparency
Come with added management and operational over head Low cost to use

Secure Networking in Cloud

Networking in Cloud vs. On Premise

Components of Cloud Computing Components of Cloud Computing

To create a network in cloud:

  • Define the size of the Network using IP address range, e.g.,: 10.10.0.0/16

    Components of Cloud Computing Components of Cloud Computing

Direct Connectivity

Components of Cloud Computing Components of Cloud Computing

Building a Cloud

It entails creating a set of logical constructs that deliver networking functionality akin to data center networks for securing environments and ensuring high performing business applications.

Containers

Containers are an executable unit of software in which application code is packaged, along with its libraries and dependencies, in common ways so that it can be run anywhere—desktops, traditional IT, or the cloud. Containers are lighter weight and consume fewer resources than Virtual Machines.

  • Containers streamline development and deployment of cloud native applications
  • Fast
  • Portable
  • Secure

Cloud Storage and Content Delivery Networks

Basics of Storage on the Cloud

  • Direct Attached/Local Storage

    • Within the same server or rack
    • Fast
    • Use for OS
    • Not suitable
      • Ephemeral (Temporary)
      • Not shared
      • Non-resilient
  • File Storage

    • Disadvantages
      • Slower
    • Advantages
      • Low cost

      • Attach to multiple servers

        Components of Cloud Computing Components of Cloud Computing

  • Block Storage

    • Advantages
      • Faster read/write speeds

        Components of Cloud Computing Components of Cloud Computing

  • Object Storage

  • Disadvantages

    • Slowest speed
  • Advantages

    • Least expensive

    • Infinite in size

    • Pay for what you use

      Components of Cloud Computing Components of Cloud Computing

File Storage

Like Direct attached:

  • Attached to a compute node to store data

    Unlike Direct attached:

  • Less expensive

  • More resilient to failure

  • Less disk management and maintenance for user

  • Provision much larger amounts of Storage

    File storage is mounted from remote storage appliances: Components of Cloud Computing Components of Cloud Computing

  • Resilient to failure

  • Offer Encryption

  • Managed by service provider

    File storage is mounted on compute nodes via Ethernet networks: Components of Cloud Computing Components of Cloud Computing

Multiple Compute Nodes

  • File storage can be mounted onto more than one compute node
  • Common Workloads:
    • Departmental file share

    • ‘Landing zone’ for incoming files

    • Repository of files

      i.e., speed variance is not an issue

  • Low cost database storage

IOPS

Input/Output Operations Per Second – the speed at which disks can write and read data.

  • Higher IOPS value = faster speed of underlying disk
  • Higher IOPS = higher costs
  • Low IOPS value can become a bottleneck

Block Storage

What is Block Storage?

Block storage breaks files into chunks (or block) of data.

  • Stores each block separately under a unique address.

  • Must be attached to a compute node before it can be utilized.

    Advantages:

  • Mounted from remote storage appliances

  • Extremely resilient to failure

  • Data is more secure

    Mounted as a volume to compute nodes using a dedicated network of optical fibers:

  • Signals move at the speed of light

  • Higher price-point

  • Perfect for workloads that need low-latency

  • Consistent high speed

  • Databases and mail servers

  • Not suitable for shared storage between multiple servers

IOPS

For block storage, as it is for file storage, you need to take the IOPS capacity of the storage into account:

  • Specify IOPS characteristics
  • Adjust the IOPS as needed
  • Depending on requirements and usage behavior

Common Attributes of File and Block Storage

  • Block and File Storage is taken from appliances which are maintained by the service provider
  • Both are highly available and resilient
  • Often include data encryption at rest and in transit

Differences: File Storage vs. Block Storage

File Storage Block Storage
Attached via Ethernet network Attached via high-speed fiber network
Speeds vary, based on load Only attach to one node at a time
Can attach to multiple computer nodes at once
Good for file share where:
1) Fast connectivity isn’t required Good for applications that need:
2) Cost is a factor 1) Consistent fast access to disk

Remember: Consider workload IOPS requirements for both storage types.

Object Storage

  1. Object storage can be used without connecting to a particular compute node to use it:

Components of Cloud Computing Components of Cloud Computing

  1. Object storage is less expensive than other cloud storage options
  2. The most important thing to note about Object Storage is that it’s effectively infinite - With Object Storage, you just consume the storage you need and pay per gigabyte cost for what you use.

When to use Object Storage:

  • Good for large amounts of unstructured data
  • Data is not stored in any kind of hierarchical folder or directory structure

Object Storage Buckets

Components of Cloud Computing Components of Cloud Computing

Components of Cloud Computing Components of Cloud Computing

Managed by Service Provider

Components of Cloud Computing Components of Cloud Computing

Object Storage – Resilience Options

Components of Cloud Computing Components of Cloud Computing

Object Storage – Use Cases

  • Any Data which is static and where fast read and write speeds are not necessary
    • Text files

    • Audio files

    • Video files

    • IoT Data

    • VM images

    • Backup files

    • Data Archives

      Not suitable for operating systems, databases, changing content.

Object Storage – Tiers and APIs

Object Storage Tiers

Components of Cloud Computing Components of Cloud Computing

Standard Tier

  • Store objects that are frequently accessed
  • Highest per gigabyte cost

Vault/Archive Tier

  • Store objects that are accessed once or twice a month
  • Low storage cost

Cold Vault Tier

  • Store data that is typically accessed once or twice a year
  • Costs just a fraction of a US cent per/GB/month
Automatic archiving rules
  • Automatic archiving rules for your data
  • Automatically be moved to a cheaper storage tier if object isn’t accessed for long

Object Storage – Speed

  • Doesn’t come with IOPS options
  • Slower than file or block storage
  • Data in ‘cold vault’ buckets, can take hours for retrieval
  • Object storage not suitable for fast access to files.

Object Storage – Costs

  • Object Storage is priced per/GB

  • Other costs related to retrieval of the data e.g., Higher access costs for cold vault tiers

    Ensure data is stored in correct tier based on frequency of access.

Application Programming Interface, or API

Components of Cloud Computing Components of Cloud Computing

Object Storage – Backup solutions

  • Effective solution for Backup and Disaster Recovery
  • Replacement for offsite backups
  • Many backup solutions come with built-in options for Object Storage on Cloud
  • More efficient than tape backups for geographic redundancy

CDN – Content Delivery Network

  • Accelerates content delivery to users of the websites, by caching the content in data centers near their locations.
  • Makes websites faster.
  • Reduction in load on servers
  • Increase uptime
  • Security through obscurity

Hybrid Multi-Cloud, Microservices, and Serverless

Hybrid Multi-cloud

A computing environment that connects an organization’s on-premise private cloud and third-party public cloud into a single infrastructure for running the organization’s applications.

Hybrid Multicloud use cases

  • Cloud scaling
  • Composite cloud
  • Modernization
  • Data and AI
  • Prevent lock-in to a particular cloud vendor and having a flexibility to move to a new provider of choice

Microservices

Microservices architecture:

  • Single application
  • coupled and independently deployable smaller components or services
    • These services typically have their own stack running on their own containers.
  • They communicate with one another over a combination of:
    • APIs
    • Even streaming
    • Message brokers

What this means for businesses is:

  • Multiple developers working independently
  • Different stacks and runtime environments
  • Independent scaling

Serverless Computing

Offloads responsibility for common infrastructure management tasks such as:

  • Scaling
  • Scheduling
  • Patching
  • Provisioning

Key attributes

Attributes that distinguish serverless computing from other compute models:

  • No provisioning of servers and runtimes
  • Runs code on-demand, scaling as needed
  • Pay only when invoked and used i.e., not when underlying computer resources are idle.

Serverless

  • Abstracts the infrastructure away from developers
  • Code executed as individual functions
  • No prior execution context is required

A Scenario

Emerging Trends and Practices Emerging Trends and Practices

Serverless computing services

  • IBM Cloud Functions
  • AWS Lambda
  • Microsoft Azure Functions

Determining Fit with Serverless

  • Evaluate application characteristics

  • Ensure that the application is aligned to serverless architecture patterns

    Applications that qualify for a serverless architecture include:

  • Short-running stateless functions

  • Seasonal workloads

  • Production volumetric data

  • Event-based processing

  • Stateless microservices

Use Cases

Serverless architecture are well-suited for use cases around:

  • Data and event processing

  • IoT

  • Microservices

  • Mobile backends

    Serverless is well-suited to working with:

  • Text

  • Audio

  • Image

  • Video

    Tasks:

  • Data enrichment

  • Transformation

  • Validation and cleansing

  • PDF processing

  • Audio normalization

  • Thumbnail generation

  • Video transcoding

  • Data search and processing

  • Genome processing

    Data Streams:

  • Business

  • IoT sensor data

  • Log data

  • Financial market data

Challenges

Emerging Trends and Practices Emerging Trends and Practices

Vendor Dependent Capabilities

  • Authentication

  • Scaling

  • Monitoring

  • Configuration management

    Emerging Trends and Practices Emerging Trends and Practices

Cloud Native Applications, DevOps, and Application Modernization

Cloud Native Applications

  • Developed to work only in the cloud environment
  • Refactored and reconfigured with cloud native principles

Development Principles

Whether creating a new cloud native application or modernizing an existing application:

  • Microservices Architecture
  • Rely on Containers
  • Adopt Agile Methods

Benefits

  • Innovation
  • Agility
  • Commoditization

DevOps on the Cloud

What is DevOps?

Dev Teams:

  • Design Software

  • Develop Software

  • Deliver Software

  • Run Software

    Ops Teams

  • Monitoring

  • Predicting Failure

  • Managing Environment

  • Fixing Issues

    A collaborative approach that allows multiple stakeholders to collaborate:

  • Business owners

  • Development

  • Operations

  • Quality assurance

The DevOps Approach

It applies agile and lean thinking principles to all stakeholders in an organization who develop, operate, or benefit from the business’s software systems, including customers, suppliers, partners. By extending lean principles across the software supply chain, DevOps capabilities improve productivity through accelerated customer feedback cycles, unified measurements and collaboration across an enterprise, and reduced overhead, duplication, and rework.

Using the DevOps approach:

  • Developers can produce software in short iterations
  • A continuous delivery schedule of new features and bug fixes in rapid cycles
  • Businesses can seize market opportunities
  • Accelerated customer feedback into products

DevOps Process

  • Continuous Delivery

  • Continuous Integration

  • Continuous Deployment

  • Continuous Monitoring

  • Delivery Pipeline

    Emerging Trends and Practices Emerging Trends and Practices

DevOps and Cloud

With its near limitless compute power and available data and application services, cloud computing platforms come with their own risks and challenges, which can be overcome by DevOps:

  • Tools

  • Practices

  • Processes

    DevOps provides the following solutions to cloud’s complexities:

  • Automated provisioning and installation

  • Continuous integration and deployment pipelines

  • Define how people work together and collaborate

  • Test in low-cost, production-like environments

  • Recover from disasters by rebuilding systems quickly and reliably

Application Modernization

Enterprise Applications

Emerging Trends and Practices Emerging Trends and Practices

Application Modernization

Architecture: Monoliths > SOA (Service Oriented Architecture) > Microservices

Infrastructure: Physical servers > VM > Cloud

Delivery: Waterfall > Agile > DevOps

Cloud Security, Monitoring, Case Studies, Jobs

What is Cloud Security

The security in context of cloud is a shared responsibility of:

  • User

  • Cloud Provider

  • Protect data

  • Manage access

    SEC DevOps

  • Secure Design

    • Secure Build
      • Manage Security

Identity and Access Management

Biggest cloud security concerns are:

  • Data Loss and Leakage

  • Unauthorized Access

  • Insecure Interfaces and APIs

    Identity and Access Management are:

  • First line of defense

  • Authenticate and authorize users

  • Provide user-specific access

Main types of users

A comprehensive security strategy needs to encompass the security needs of a wide audience:

  • Organizational users

  • Internet and social-based users

  • Third-party business partner organizations

  • Vendors

    There are three main type of users:

  • Administrative users

  • Developer users

  • Application users

Administrative Users

Administrators | Operators | Mangers roles that typically create, update, and delete application and instances, and also need insight into their team members’ activities.

An attacker with administrative access could:

  • Steal data from databases
  • Deploy malicious applications
  • Deface or destroy existing applications

Developer Users

Application developers | Platform developers | Application publishers

Can:

  • Read sensitive information
  • Create applications
  • Update applications
  • Delete applications

Application Users

Users of the cloud-hosted applications

Authentication and User Identity

Cloud Security, Monitoring, Case Studies, Jobs Cloud Security, Monitoring, Case Studies, Jobs

Multifactor authentication

It is used to combat identity theft by adding another level of authentication for application users.

Cloud Security, Monitoring, Case Studies, Jobs Cloud Security, Monitoring, Case Studies, Jobs

Cloud Directory Services

They are used to securely manage user profiles and their associated credentials and password policy inside a cloud environment.

  • Applications hosted on the cloud do not need to use their own user repository

Reporting

It helps provide a user-centric view of access to resources or a resource-centric view of access by users:

  • which users can access which resources

  • changes in user access rights

  • access methods used by each user

    Cloud Security, Monitoring, Case Studies, Jobs Cloud Security, Monitoring, Case Studies, Jobs

Audit and Compliance

Critical service within identity and access management framework, both for cloud provider, and cloud consumer.

Cloud Security, Monitoring, Case Studies, Jobs Cloud Security, Monitoring, Case Studies, Jobs

User and service access management

It enables cloud application/service owners to provision and de-provision:

Streamline access control based on:

  • Role
  • Organization
  • Access policies

Mitigating Risks

Some of the controls that can help secure these sensitive accounts include:

  • Provisioning users by specifying roles on resources for each user
  • Password policies that control the usage of special characters, minimum password lengths, and other similar settings
  • Multifactor authentication like time-based one-time passwords
  • Immediate provisioning of access when users leave or change roles

Access Groups

A group of users and service IDs created so that the same access can be assigned to all entities within the group with one or more access policies.

Access Policies

Access policies define how users, service IDs, and access groups in the account are given permission to access account resources.

Cloud Security, Monitoring, Case Studies, Jobs Cloud Security, Monitoring, Case Studies, Jobs

Access Group Benefits

  • Streamline access assignment process vs. assigning individual user access

  • Reduce number of policies

    Cloud Security, Monitoring, Case Studies, Jobs Cloud Security, Monitoring, Case Studies, Jobs

Cloud Encryption

Encryption

It plays a key role on cloud, and is often referred to as the last line of defense, in a layered security model.

  • Encrypts Data
  • Data Access Control
  • Key management
  • Certificate management

Definition

Scrambling data in a way that makes it illegible.

Encryption Algorithm: Defines rules by which data will be transformed

Decryption Key: Defines how encrypted data will be transformed back to legible data.

It makes sure:

  • Only authorized users have access to sensitive data.
  • When accessed without authorization, data is unreadable and meaningless.

Cloud Encryption Services

  • Can be limited to encryption of data that is identified as sensitive, or
  • end-to-end encryption of all data uploaded to the cloud

Data Protection States

Encryption at Rest:

  • Protects stored data
  • Multiple encryption options:
    • Block and file storage

    • Built-in for object storage

    • Database encryption

      Encryption in Transit:

  • Protects data while transmitting
  • Includes encrypting before transmission
  • Authenticates endpoints
  • Decrypts data on arrival
    • Secure Socket Layer (SSL)

    • Transport Layer Security (TSL)

      Encryption in Use:

  • Protects data in use in memory
  • Allows computations to be performed on encrypted text without decryption

Client or Server-side Encryption

Cloud storage encryption could be server-side or client-side.

Server-side:

  • Create and manage your own encryption keys, or

  • Generate and manage keys on cloud

    Client-side:

  • Occurs before data is sent to cloud

  • Cloud providers cannot decrypt hosted data

    There is a need to implement a singular data protection strategy across an enterprise’s on-premise, hybrid, and multi-cloud deployments.

Multi-Cloud Data Encryption

Features:

  • Data access management

  • Integrated key management

  • Sophisticated encryption

    Multi-cloud encryption console:

  • Define and manage access policies

  • Create, rotate, and manage keys

  • Aggregate access logs

Key Management

Encryption doesn’t eliminate security risk.

  • It separates the security risk from the data itself.
  • Keys need to be managed and protected against threats.

Key Management Services

They enable customers to:

  • Encrypt sensitive data at rest
  • Easily create and manage the entire lifecycle of cryptographic keys
  • Protect data from cloud service providers

Key Management Best Practices

  • Storing encryption keys separately from the encrypted data
  • Taking key backups offsite and auditing them regularly
  • Refreshing the keys periodically
  • Implementing multifactor authentication for both the master and recovery keys

Cloud Monitoring Basics and Benefits

Cloud Monitoring Solutions

Monitoring performance across an entire stack of applications and services can be time-consuming and draining on internal resources.

Cloud Monitoring Assessment

Cloud Security, Monitoring, Case Studies, Jobs Cloud Security, Monitoring, Case Studies, Jobs

Cloud Monitoring Features

Cloud monitoring includes:

  • Strategies

  • Practices

  • Processes

    Used for:

  • Analyzing

  • Tracking

  • Managing services and apps

    It also serves to provide actionable insights that can help improve availability and user experience.

Cloud Monitoring Helps to:

  • Accelerate the diagnosis and resolution of performance incidents
  • Control the cost of your monitoring infrastructure
  • Mitigate the impact of abnormal situations with proactive notifications
  • Get critical Kubernetes and container insights for dynamic microservice monitoring
  • Troubleshoot your applications and infrastructure

Cloud Monitoring Solutions Provide:

  • Data in real-time with round the clock monitoring of VMs, services, databases, apps
  • Multilayer visibility into application, user, and file access behavior across all apps
  • Advanced reporting and auditing capabilities for ensuring regulatory standards
  • Large-scale performance monitoring integrations across multicloud and hybrid cloud

Cloud Monitoring Categories

Infrastructure

  • Help identify minor and large-scale failures

    • So that developers can take corrective action

    Database

  • Help track processes, queries, and availability of services

    • To ensure accuracy and reliability

      Application Performance and Monitoring

  • Help improve user experience

  • Meet app and user SLAs

    • Minimize downtime and lower operational costs

Cloud Monitoring Best Practices

To get the most benefit from your cloud-based deployments, you can follow some standard cloud monitoring best practices.

  1. Leverage end-user experience monitoring solutions
  2. Move all aspects of infrastructure under one monitoring platform
  3. Use monitoring tools that help track usage and cost
  4. Increase cloud monitoring automation
  5. Simulate outages and breach scenarios

Cloud monitoring needs to be a priority for organizations looking to leverage the benefits of cloud technologies.

Case Studies and Jobs

Case Studies in Different Industry Verticals

  • The Weather Company migrating to the cloud to reliably deliver critical weather data at high speed, especially during major weather events such as hurricanes and tornadoes
  • American Airlines, using the cloud platform and technologies to deliver digital self-service tools and customer value more rapidly across its enterprise
  • Cementos Pacasmayo, achieving operational excellence and insight to help drive strategic transformation and reach new markets using cloud services
  • Welch choosing cloud storage to drive business value from hybrid cloud
  • Liquid Power using cloud-based SAP applications to fuel business growth

Career Opportunities and Job Roles in Cloud Computing

  • Cloud Developers

    Cloud Security, Monitoring, Case Studies, Jobs Cloud Security, Monitoring, Case Studies, Jobs

  • Cloud Integration Specialists

    Cloud Security, Monitoring, Case Studies, Jobs Cloud Security, Monitoring, Case Studies, Jobs

  • Cloud Data Engineer

    Cloud Security, Monitoring, Case Studies, Jobs Cloud Security, Monitoring, Case Studies, Jobs

  • Cloud Security Engineers

    Cloud Security, Monitoring, Case Studies, Jobs Cloud Security, Monitoring, Case Studies, Jobs

  • Cloud DevOps Engineers

    Cloud Security, Monitoring, Case Studies, Jobs Cloud Security, Monitoring, Case Studies, Jobs

  • Cloud Solutions Architects

    Cloud Security, Monitoring, Case Studies, Jobs Cloud Security, Monitoring, Case Studies, Jobs